· 2020-01-13 · MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS) AFFILIATED TO ANNA...

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)

AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025

REGULATIONS: MEPCO - R2015 (FULL TIME)

(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)

B. E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Department Vision Department Mission

Rendering services to the global needs of

engineering industries by educating students to

become professional mechanical engineers of

excellent calibre

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a

perfect knowledge of intellectual and hands on

experiences and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and

ethics to serve the society

Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

Self-Learning : Continual receptiveness for leadership and social challenges.

Breadth : Inculcate good scientific and engineering knowledge to create

novel

product for the real life issues.

Analytical reasoning : Integrate fundamentals and new concepts from engineering

practices.

Communication Skills : Excel in vocabulary and interpersonal skill as a Professional

Engineer.

Programme Outcomes (POs)

a. Imparting strong foundation in the technical know-how of mechanical engineering.

b. Root cause analysis of mechanical engineering problem through basic and engineering sciences.

c. Solving complex mechanical engineering problems.

d. Critical thinking/analysing mechanical engineering problems using research based methods.

e. Handling latest engineering tools with advanced software knowledge.

f. Tuning Mechanical engineering advancements to the benefits of society.

g. Mechanical engineering solutions to green and sustainable development.

h. Adopting Professional ethics in technical field.

i. Perform individual activity/Leadership ability in a multifaceted group.

j. Communication competency in presenting technocrats reports.

k. Capability in completing a project with financial management.

l. Up-to-date in current events.

1

CURRICULUM (I to VIII SEMESTER)

SEMESTER I (Common to all UG Programmes)

SL. NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. 15HS101 Technical English – I 3 0 2 4

2. 15BS101 Mathematics – I 3 2 0 4

3. 15BS102 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3

4. 15BS103 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3

5. 15GE101 Computer Programming 3 0 0 3

6. 15GE102 Engineering Graphics 2 0 4 4

PRACTICAL

7. 15BS151 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15GE151 Computer Programming Laboratory 0 0 4 2

9. 15GE152 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 17 2 18 27

SEMESTER II

SL.NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. 15HS201 Technical English – II* 3 0 0 3

2. 15BS201 Mathematics – II* 3 2 0 4

3. 15BS202 Environmental Science and Disaster Management* 3 0 0 3

4. 15BS203 Applied Materials Science (Common to Civil and Mechanical Engineering)

3 0 0 3

5. 15GE201 Engineering Mechanics (Common to Civil / Mechanical)

3 2 0 4

6. 15GE202 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering (Common to Civil, Mechanical & Bio-Tech)

3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15BS251 Applied Physics And Environmental Chemistry Laboratory (Common to EEE/ECE/CSE/MECH/IT/BT) (Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Environmental Chemistry)

0 0 4 2

8. 15EE253 Electrical and Electronics Lab 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 18 4 8 24

* Common to all UG Programmes

SEMESTER III

SL.NO. COURSECODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. 15MA305 Mathematics III - Boundary Value Problems and Probability Distribution

3 2 0 4

2. 15ME301 Engineering Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3

3. 15ME302 Strength of Materials 3 0 0 3

4. 15ME303 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery 3 2 0 4

5. 15ME304 Manufacturing Technology – I 3 0 0 3

6. 15EC306 Microprocessors and Control 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15ME351 Strength of Materials and Hydraulics Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15ME352 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory – I 0 0 4 2

9. 15ME353 Computer Aided Machine Drawing Laboratory 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 18 4 12 26

SEMESTER IV


THEORY

1. 15MA402 Mathematics IV - Numerical and Statistical Techniques (Common to EEE & MECH)

3 2 0 4

2

2. 15ME401 Thermal Engineering 3 2 0 4

3. 15ME402 Kinematics of Machinery 3 2 0 4

4. 15ME403 Design of Machine Elements 3 0 0 3

5. 15ME404 Engineering Metallurgy 3 0 0 3

6. 15ME405 Manufacturing Technology –II 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15ME451 Thermal Engineering Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15ME452 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory –II 0 0 4 2

9. 15HS451 Presentation Skills Laboratory (Common to IT/ ECE / MECH / Bio-Tech)

0 0 2 1

TOTAL 18 6 10 26

SEMESTER V


THEORY

1. 15ME501 Heat and Mass Transfer 3 2 0 4

2. 15ME502 Dynamics of Machinery 3 0 0 3

3. 15ME503 Design of Transmission Systems 3 2 0 4

4. Core Elective I 3 0 0 3

5. Open Elective I 3 0 0 3

6. Allied Elective I 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15ME551 Heat Transfer and Metallurgy Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15ME552 CAD and CAM Laboratory 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 18 4 8 24

SEMESTER VI


THEORY

1. 15ME601 Finite Element Analysis 3 0 0 3

2. 15ME602 Power Plant Technology 3 0 0 3

3. 15ME603 Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 0 0 3

4. Core Elective II 3 0 0 3

5. Open Elective II 3 0 0 3

6. Allied Elective II 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15ME651 Mechatronics and Dynamics Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15HS651 Professional Communication Skills Laboratory (Common to ECE /MECH/IT/Bio-Tech)

0 0 4 2

9. 15ME652 Design and Fabrication Project 0 0 8 4

TOTAL 18 0 16 26

SEMESTER VII


THEORY

1. 15ME701 Instrumentation and Metrology 3 0 0 3

2. 15ME702 Industrial Economics, Psychology and Management 3 0 0 3

3. Core Elective III 3 0 0 3

4. Core Elective IV 3 0 0 3

5. Core Elective V 3 0 0 3

6. Open Elective III 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

7. 15ME751 Instrumentation and Metrology Laboratory 0 0 4 2

8. 15ME752 Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Laboratory 0 0 4 2

9. 15ME753 Comprehensive Skill Development** 0 0 2 1

TOTAL 18 0 10 23

** Internal Assessment only

SEMESTER VIII


THEORY 1. Core Elective VI 3 0 0 3

2. Open Elective IV 3 0 0 3

3

PRACTICAL

3. 15ME851 Project Work 0 0 12 6

TOTAL 6 0 12 12

Total Credits: 188 (Regular)

Total Credits: 137 (LES)

LIST OF CORE ELECTIVES


1. 15MEC01 Advances in I.C. Engines 3 0 0 3

2. 15MEC02 Artificial Intelligence and Robotics 3 0 0 3

3. 15MEC03 Automobile Engineering 3 0 0 3

4. 15MEC04 Composite Materials 3 0 0 3

5. 15MEC05 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3

6. 15MEC06 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 3 0 0 3

7. 15MEC07 Cryogenics 3 0 0 3

8. 15MEC08 Design of Thermal Systems 3 0 0 3

9. 15MEC09 Design of Jigs, Fixtures and Press Tools 3 0 0 3

10. 15MEC10 Enterprise Resource Planning 3 0 0 3

11. 15MEC11 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3

12. 15MEC12 Fracture Mechanics 3 0 0 3

13. 15MEC13 Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion 3 0 0 3

14. 15MEC14 Industrial Tribology 3 0 0 3

15. 15MEC15 Maintenance Engineering 3 0 0 3

16. 15MEC16 Marketing Management 3 0 0 3

17. 15MEC17 Micro Electro Mechanical system 3 0 0 3

18. 15MEC18 Non Destructive Testing 3 0 0 3

19. 15MEC19 Nuclear Engineering 3 0 0 3

20. 15MEC20 Plant Layout and material handling 3 0 0 3

21. 15MEC21 Pressure Vessels and Piping Design 3 0 0 3

22. 15MEC22 Principles of Flight 3 0 0 3

23. 15MEC23 Process Planning and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3

24. 15MEC24 Production Planning and Control 3 0 0 3

25. 15MEC25 Project Management 3 0 0 3

26. 15MEC26 Refrigeration and Air conditioning 3 0 0 3

27. 15MEC27 Renewable Energy Systems 3 0 0 3

28. 15MEC28 Resource Management Techniques 3 0 0 3

29. 15MEC29 Thermal Turbomachines 3 0 0 3

30. 15MEC30 Total Quality Management and Reliability Engineering 3 0 0 3

31. 15MEC31 Unconventional Machining Processes 3 0 0 3

32. 15MEC32 Vibration and Noise Control 3 0 0 3

33. 15MEC33 Waste Management and Energy Recovery 3 0 0 3

ALLIED ELECTIVES - CURRICULUM

Offered by Civil Department

V Semester


1. 15CEA01 Industrial Pollution Prevention and Control 3 0 0 3

2. 15CEA02 Introduction to Engineering Seismology 3 0 0 3

3. 15CEA03 Solar Energy Utilization 3 0 0 3

4. 15CEA04 Environmental Geotechnology 3 0 0 3

4

5. 15CEA05 Principles of Global Positioning System 3 0 0 3

VI Semester


1. 15CEA06 Non-Conventional Energy Resources 3 0 0 3

2. 15CEA07 Energy Conservation and Management 3 0 0 3

3. 15CEA08 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 0 0 3

4. 15CEA09 Fundamentals of Supply Chain 3 0 0 3

5. 15CEA10 Coastal Engineering 3 0 0 3

6. 15CEA11 Manufacturing Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3

Offered by EEE Department

V Semester


VI Semester


1. 15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3

2. 15EEA07 Fundamentals of Electric Power Utilization 3 0 0 3

3. 15EEA08 Soft Computing Techniques and Applications 3 0 0 3

4. 15EEA09 Fundamentals of Power Quality 3 0 0 3

5. 15EEA10 Wiring, Estimation and Costing 3 0 0 3

Offered by ECE Department

V SEMESTER


1. 15ECA01 Communication Systems 3 0 0 3

2. 15ECA02 Microprocessors and Applications 3 0 0 3

3. 15ECA03 MATLAB Programming 2 0 2 3

4. 15ECA04 Antenna Fundamentals 3 0 0 3

5. 15ECA05 Television Engineering 3 0 0 3

VI SEMESTER


1. 15ECA06 Remote Sensing Techniques 3 0 0 3

2. 15ECA07 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3

3. 15ECA08 Optical Communication 3 0 0 3

4. 15ECA09 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3

5. 15ECA10 Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3

Offered by CSE Department

V SEMESTER

SL NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15CSA01 Internet Programming 3 0 0 3

2. 15CSA02 Fundamentals of Software Engineering 3 0 0 3

3. 15CSA03 Introduction to Database 3 0 0 3

4. 15CSA04 Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms 3 0 0 3

5. 15CSA05 Fundamentals of Operating Systems 3 0 0 3

1. 15EEA01 Industrial Instrumentation 3 0 0 3

2. 15EEA02 Illumination Engineering 3 0 0 3

3. 15EEA03 Switched Mode Power Converters 3 0 0 3

4. 15EEA04 Power Plant Instrumentation and Control 3 0 0 3

5. 15EEA05 Electrical Machines and Drives 3 0 0 3

5

VI SEMESTER

SL NO. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

1. 15CSA06 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 3 0 0 3

2. 15CSA07 Principles of Multimedia 3 0 0 3

3. 15CSA08 Introduction to Genetic Algorithms 3 0 0 3

4. 15CSA09 XML Programming 3 0 0 3

5. 15CSA10 Introduction to UML 3 0 0 3

6. 15CSA11 Introduction to Computer Organization 3 0 0 3

Offered by IT Department

V SEMESTER


1. 15ITA01 Introduction to Computer Graphics 3 0 0 3

2. 15ITA02 Rich Internet Application 3 0 0 3

3. 15ITA03 Introduction to Java 3 0 0 3

4. 15ITA04 Perl 3 0 0 3

5. 15ITA05 Fuzzy Systems 3 0 0 3

VI SEMESTER


1. 15ITA06 Graphics Programming 3 0 0 3

2. 15ITA07 PHP Programming 3 0 0 3

3. 15ITA08 Android Application Development 3 0 0 3

4. 15ITA09 Python Programming 3 0 0 3

5. 15ITA10 Decision Making Methods 3 0 0 3

Offered by Bio-Tech Department

V SEMESTER


1. 15BTA01 Basic Cell and Molecular Biology 3 0 0 3

2. 15BTA02 Basic Microbiology 3 0 0 3

3. 15BTA03 Basic Biochemistry 3 0 0 3

4. 15BTA04 Basic immunology 3 0 0 3

VI SEMESTER


1. 15BTA05 Chemicals in Environment and Public Health 3 0 0 3

2. 15BTA06 Biological Waste Management 3 0 0 3

3. 15BTA07 Nanobiotechnology 3 0 0 3

4. 15BTA08 Human Physiology 3 0 0 3

Offered by MBA Department

VI SEMESTER


1. 15BAA01 Essentials of Finance 3 0 0 3

2. 15BAA02 Essentials of Marketing 3 0 0 3

3. 15BAA03 Essentials of Human Resource Management 3 0 0 3

6

15HS101 Technical English – I

(Common to all UG Programmes)

L T P C

3 0 2 4

Course Objectives are to:

enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary

improve grammatical accuracy

develop language functions

understand the basic nuances of language

Course Outcomes:

The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to build up their vocabulary

Grammatical accuracy will be improved

Language functions will be developed

The basic nuances of language will be understood

UNIT-I 12

Listening–Importance of listening- Types of listening - Listening to audio files and understanding the concept;

Speaking -Speaking about one’s place, important festivals etc. – Introducing oneself, one’s family / friend; Asking

for Information; Reading - Skimming and Scanning - Note-making - Reading comprehension exercises; Writing -

Free writing on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobbies / School life, etc.) - Sentence completion-

Autobiographical writing (writing about one’s leisure time activities, hometown, etc.) - Creative Writing;

Grammar–Parts of Speech- Kinds of Sentences- Framing questions; Vocabulary -Word formation - Word

expansion

UNIT-II 12

Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Listening exercises with sample telephone

conversations; Speaking - Describing a simple process (filling a form, etc.) - Asking & answering questions on

various everyday activities: Telephone skills – Telephone etiquette. Reading – Critical reading - Finding key

information in a given text and paraphrasing - Sifting facts from opinions; Value Based Text Reading and

thematic analysis. Writing: Informal letter – Letter to the editor (Regarding Social Issues) - Single line Definitions

– Recommendations- Paragraph Writing; (cause & effect / compare & contrast / narrative / analytical)

Grammar– tense - Use of sequence words - Adverbs -; Vocabulary –prefixes and Suffixes -Compound words.

UNIT-III 12

Listening - Listening to specific task - focused audio tracks - Listening to different accents - Watching videos /

documentaries and responding to questions based on them and giving personal opinion.

Speaking - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, officials, foreigners); Role-play and Simulation

Reading - Reading and interpreting data given as visual material. Writing– Coherence and cohesion in writing- -

Channel conversion -Process descriptions – interpretations of Pictures of flow charts, graphs, pie charts and

tables - Essay writing – Different types of essays. Grammar– Articles - Connective adverbs – Subject-verb

agreement-; Vocabulary – Same word in a different parts of speech & Word Association

UNIT-IV 12

Listening - Excerpts from films focusing on theme and follow up exercises - film scenes; Speaking - Responding

to questions - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given topics- Group interaction; Reading -

Making inference from the reading passage - Predicting the content of a reading passage; Jumbled sentences;

Writing - Business Letters- Sales and Credit letters; Letter of Enquiry; Letter of Quotation, Order, Claim and

Adjustment Letters. Grammar – Preposition – future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substitutes - Use

7

of abbreviations & acronyms.

UNIT-V 12

Listening - Listening to Speeches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast & telecast from Radio & TV; Sample

interview; Speaking; Different forms of interviews - Speaking at different types of interview; Reading - Email

communication - Reading the attachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through

email Writing; Writing: invititation letter, accepting, declining letter and permission letter, Creative writing,

Poster making, Interpreting posters; Grammar –Editing-Direct and indirect speech; Vocabulary - Lexical items

(fixed / semi fixed expressions).

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.

Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.

2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.

Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.

3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,

New Delhi, 2007.

4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition

(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.

Extensive reading:

1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.

15BS101 MATHEMATICS I


L T P C

3 2 0 4


To know the matrix algebra techniques needed by engineers for practical applications

To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that he/ she

will be familiar with limitations of using infinite series approximations for solutions arising in

mathematical modeling

To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in engineering problems

To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta functions which are needed in

engineering problems

To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and their usage

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the students are able to

Expertise matrix algebra

Apply tests of convergence

Understand and apply functions of several variables

Evaluate integrals using Beta and Gamma functions

8

Expertise multiple integrals and their usage

UNIT 0 (Not for Examination) 5+ 0

Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable

UNIT-I MATRICES 9 + 3

Characteristic equation - Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix– Properties of eigen values and

eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a quadratic form to

canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms

UNIT-II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9 + 3

Partial derivatives –Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem-Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit

functions-Change of variables - Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for

functions of two variables – Errors and approximations - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables –

Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers

UNIT-III INFINITE SERIES 9 + 3

Sequences – Convergence of series – General properties – Series of positive terms – Tests for convergence:

Comparison test, Integral test, Comparison of ratios and D’Alembert’s ratio test (Proofs excluded) – Alternating

series – Series of positive and negative terms – Absolute and conditional convergence – Power Series –

Convergence of exponential, logarithmic and Binomial Series

UNIT-IV IMPROPER INTEGRALS 9 + 3

Improper integrals of the first and second kind and their convergence – Evaluation of integrals involving one

parameter by Leibnitz rule – Beta and Gamma functions – Properties – Evaluation of integrals using Beta and

Gamma functions – Error functions

UNIT-V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9 + 3

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area enclosed by

plane curves – Triple integrals– Triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates – Volume of Solids

L= 45 hours T = 15 hours Total = 60 hours

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd

Edition, 2013

2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, Singapore,

9th

Edition, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,

4th

Edition, 2014

2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition,

11th

Reprint, 2013

3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7th

Edition, 2012

4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 2.1,2.3,3.1,5.2, Unit – 2,3,5)

5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company, New Delhi, 11th

Reprint, 2010

9

15BS102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS


LT PC

30 0 3

Course Objective

To impart sound knowledge about basic concepts of physics.

To introduce the basic physics concepts relevant to different branches of Engineering and Technology

To introduce the fundamentals of physics and its applications in engineering.

Course Outcomes:

The students are able to understand the elastic properties of the materials.

The students will acquire knowledge about solid state physics.

The students will acquire knowledge about the basic concepts of physics in the topics such as

acoustics, ultrasonics, thermal physics, and applied optics.

UNITI PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9

Elasticity - Poisson’s ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram and its uses -

factors affecting tensile strength - bending of beams - cantilever - bending moment - theory and experiment of

Young’s modulus determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders - twisting couple - hollow

cylinder - shaft - torsion pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus- moment of inertia of a body (regular and

irregular).

UNITII ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9

Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner Law - standard intensity and intensity level -

decibel - reverberation - reverberation time - rate of growth and decay of sound intensity - derivation of Sabine’s

formula - absorption coefficient and its determination – factors affecting acoustics of buildings : focusing,

interference, echo, Echelon effect, resonance - noise and their remedies. Ultrasonics - production -

magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - detection of ultrasound - acoustic grating - industrial applications -

NDT – Ultrasonic method: scan modes and practice.

UNITIII THERMAL PHYSICS 9

Thermal expansion - thermal stress - expansion joints - bimetallic strips - thermal conductivity- conductions in

solids - Forbe’s and Lees’ disc methods - Rectilinear flow of heat through a rod -flow of heat through a

compound media - radial flow of heat – thermal insulation of buildings – Laws of blackbody radiation: Kirchhoff’s

law, Stephens law, Wien’s law, Raleigh-Jean’s law and Planck’s law (derivation). Laws of thermodynamics -

Otto and diesel engines and their efficiency - entropy - entropy of Carnot’s cycle - reverse Carnot’s cycle -

refrigerator.

UNITIV APPLIED OPTICS 9

Interference - Michelson interferometer: construction, working, determination of wave length and thickness - anti-

reflection coating - air wedge and its application - Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients - CO2, Nd:YAG and

semiconductor lasers - homojunction and heterojunction -construction and working - applications - Optical fibers -

classification (index & mode based) - principle and propagation of light in optical fibers - acceptance angle and

numerical aperture - fiber optic communication system - active and passive sensors.

UNITV SOLID STATE PHYSICS 9

Growth of single crystals-Czochralski method and Bridgeman-Stockbarger method - unit cell, crystal systems,

Bravais space lattices - crystal planes and directions, Miller indices - expressions for interplanar distance -

coordination number and packing factor for simple structures: SC, BCC, FCC and HCP - structure and

significance of NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite - crystal imperfections: point defects, dislocations and stacking

faults.

10

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

T1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

T2. Gaur R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Raj Publications, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS:

R1. Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2009.

R2. Palanisamy, P.K., Engineering Physics, Scitech Publications (P) Ltd, 2009.

R3. Arumugam, M., Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publications, 2000.

R4. John W. Jewett. Jr, and Raymon A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics

– Seventh Edition, Cengage Learnings, Delhi, India, 2013.

R5. David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, sixth edition, John Wiley

and Sons, New Delhi, 2010.

15BS103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY


LT PC

30 0 3

Course Objective

The student should be familiar with

1. The treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.

2. The principles of electrochemistry, electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.

3. The principles of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.

4. Different materials and their engineering applications.

Different types of fuels and combustion.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to

1. Understand the basic principles of water quality parameters, their analysis and various water treatment

processes for domestic and industrial applications.

2. Understand the basic principles of electrochemistry and its applications.

3. Know the principles, various types of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.

4. Have a sound knowledge on various engineering materials and their industrial applications.

Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.

UNITI WATER TECHNOLOGY 9

Characteristics of water – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types of hardness and

estimation by EDTA method (problems on calculation of hardness only); Boiler feed water – requirements –

disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – priming and foaming – scales and sludges – caustic embrittlement

– boiler corrosion – external conditioning (demineralization process) – internal conditioning (colloidal, phosphate,

carbonate and calgon conditionings) – Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination,

Ozonation, UV treatment) – break point chlorination – salinity – desalination by reverse osmosis.

UNITII ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9

Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf – Single electrode potential

– Nernst equation (problems) – reference electrodes – Standard Hydrogen electrode – Calomel electrode – Ion

11

selective electrode – glass electrode and measurement of pH – Standard Cell – electrochemical series –

significance – potentiometric redox titration – conductometric titrations (Strong acid Vs Strong base and Weak

acid Vs Strong base)

UNITIII CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9

Chemical corrosion – Pilling-Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors

influencing corrosion – different types – galvanic corrosion – erosion corrosion – pitting corrosion – crevice

corrosion – waterline corrosion – stress corrosion – corrosion control – sacrificial anode and impressed current

cathodic methods – corrosion inhibitors – Protective coatings – metallic coating – pretreatment of surface –

hotdipping – spraying – cladding – cementation – electroplating (Cr, Cu, Ni and Au) – electrolessplating

(electroless nickel plating only).

UNITIV ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9

Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness, refractoriness

under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia

bricks.

Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants – properties (viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud

and pour points, oiliness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide – semi solid lubricants and

emulsions.

Nanomaterials – introduction to nano chemistry – carbon nanotubes and their applications.

UNITV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels – Classification – Calorific value (Problems using Dulong’s formula) – Coal – proximate and ultimate

analysis – Hydrogenation of coal – Petroleum – processing and fractions – cracking – catalytic cracking and

methods – knocking – octane number and cetane number – synthetic petrol – Fischer-Tropsch and Bergius

processes – Gaseous fuels – Natural gas, CNG and LPG – Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – Combustion –

theoretical calculation of air (Problems on calculation of weight of air only).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

T1. P.C. Jain and Monika Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., 16th

Edition,

New Delhi (2013).

T2. S.S.Dara, A text book of engineering chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (2010).

REFERENCE BOOKS:

R1. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New Delhi

(2009).

R2. B. K. Sharma, Engineering chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2006).

R3. B. Sivasankar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi (2008).

15GE101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING


L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives:

To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques

To learn how to write modular and readable C programs

To understand the usage of arrays and strings

To learn to use pointers to access and manipulate memory

12

To exploit the notion of derived data types and files

Course Outcomes:

Solve problems using sound techniques

Develop modular C programs for a given problem

Store and manipulate homogeneous data using arrays and strings

Write programs that uses memory based on the run time needs

Store and manipulate heterogeneous data using structures

Write programs that manipulate data stored on permanent storage

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF C 9

Basic Organization of a Computer - Problem Solving Techniques: Introduction to Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow

Chart.

Structure of ‘C’ program, compilation and linking processes - C Tokens: Keywords, Data Types, Constants,

Variables - Declaration - Qualifiers - typedef - Enumeration - Pre-processor directives (#include, #define)

UNIT II BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C 9

Managing simple Input and Output operations - Operators and Expressions - Decision Making: Branching

statements, Looping statements - Function: Declaration, Definition - Recursion - Storage classes

UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C 8

Arrays: Initialization - One dimensional, Two dimensional, and Multi-dimensional arrays - String: String

operations, Manipulating Strings - Pre-processor directives (#if, #else, #elif, #ifdef, #ifndef)

UNIT IV POINTERS IN C 10

Pointers - Parameter passing mechanism in functions - Dynamic Memory Allocation - Pointer arithmetic -

Pointers and one dimensional array - Pointers and Multi-Dimensional Array: Array of Pointers, Pointer to Pointer,

Pointer to an array - void Pointer - Pointer to function - Command Line Arguments

UNIT V STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C 9

Structure: Declaration, Definition-Array of Structures - Pointer to Structure - Structure within a Structure - Bit

fields in Structure - Union - Files: File Management functions, Working with Text Files and Binary Files

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford

University Press, 2009

2. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C, Schaum’s Outlines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010

reprint.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson

Education, 2006 reprint.

2. R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, 2008

3. Al Kelley, Ira Pohl, “A Book on C : Programming in C”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 reprint

4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2009 reprint.

5. Ashok N. Kamthane, “Computer programming”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.

13

6. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm

2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html

3. http://www.w3schools.in/c

4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners

15GE102 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS


L T P C

2 0 4 4

Course Objectives:

To gain knowledge on the basics of Engineering Drawing construction procedures.

To understand the principles involved in graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design

of Engineering products.

To draw the drawing of various solids.

To expose the above to existing national standards related to technical drawings.

An ability to draw the drawing for any given object to the required standard.

Course Outcomes:

Sketch multiple views of Engineering components

Create the projection of point, straight line and plane

Project the solid objects

Section the solid

Develop lateral surfaces of solids

Apply isometric and perspective projections

Concepts and Conventions (Not For Examination) 5

Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS

conventions and specifications – Lettering and Dimensioning-Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets.

UNITI PLANE CURVES AND PICTORIAL VIEWS TO ORTHOGRAPHIC

VIEWS

14

Geometrical Constructions like bisection of a straight line, division of a straight line into n equal parts, bisection

of angles, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by

eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – Construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of

tangents and normal to the above curves.

Orthographic projection – Principles – Principal planes- Representation of Three Dimensional objects – Layout

of views– Sketching of multiple views (Front, Top and Side views) from pictorial views of simple objects and

Engineering Components.

UNITII PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 14

First Angle projection–Projection of points in four quadrants. Projection of straight lines (only First angle

projection) inclined to both the principal planes – Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating

line method and traces.

Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by change of position

method.

UNITIII PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 14

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one of the

principal planes by change of position method. Projection of simple solids when the axis inclined to both planes.

14

UNITIV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL

SURFACES OF SOLIDS

14

Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of the principal

planes and perpendicular to the other – Obtaining true shape of the section.

Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Development of

lateral surfaces of sectioned solids and simple applications like funnel.

UNITV ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 14

Principles of isometric projection – Isometric scale –Isometric View– Isometric projections of simple solids and

cut solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones– Combination of two solid objects in simple vertical positions.

Perspective projection of simple solids–Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.

TOTAL: 75 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. N.D. Bhatt, “Engineering Drawing” Charotar Publishing House, 50th

Edition, (2010).

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.

2. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an

introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy Edition,

Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.

3. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.

4. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited, 2008.

5. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.

6. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company

Limited, New Delhi, 2008.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing

sheets.

2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.

3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.

4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.

5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.

Special points applicable to End Semester Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.

2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.

3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be permitted

to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.

4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

15BS151 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY


(Classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry)

L T PC

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Young’s modulus

To be familiar with findings thickness of a thin paper

15

To deal with the determination of Ultrasonic velocity

To have a study on estimation of hardness and alkalinity of water

To deal with Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration

Course Outcomes:

Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire

Determine thickness of a thin sheet of paper

Find the specific resistance of wire

Estimate hardness and Alkalinity of water sample

Do Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration

Find corrosion rate

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Torsional pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc.

2. Non-uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination

3. Air-wedge- Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper

4. Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating

5. Lee’s disc-Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor

6. Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer.

7. Carey Foster Bridge- Determination of specific resistance of the given coil of wire.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR CHEMISTRY LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method

2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample

3. pH-metric titration (acid & base)

4. Conductometric titration (strong acid Vs strong base)

5. Conductometric titration (mixture of acids Vs Strong base)

6. Potentiometric titration between ferrous ion and potassium dichromate

7. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss method

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J. D. Barnes, M.J.K. Thomas, Vogel's Quantitative Chemical Analysis,

Prentice Hall, India, 2000.

2. D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.

15GE151 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY


L T PC

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To develop C programs using conditional and looping statements

To understand the principles of arrays and strings

To learn to access memory using pointers

To group different kinds of information related to a single entity

16

To understand the manipulation of data in permanent storage

Course Outcomes:

Implement programs using control statements

Write programs using arrays and strings

Access data in memory using pointers

Use structures to manipulate heterogeneous data

Manipulate data stored on permanent storage

SYLLABUS FOR THE LABORATORY:

0. Study of simple Document Processing & Presentation Preparation

Study of basic OS commands, Software Engineering Practices -2 sessions (Not for End Examination)

1. Programs using simple statements

2. Programs using decision making statements

3. Programs using looping statements

4. Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions

5. Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays

6. Solving problems using string functions

7. Programs using pointers and dynamic memory allocation

8. Programs using structures and unions

9. Programs using pointers to structures and other data types

10. Programs using text files

11. Programs using binary files

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford

University Press, 2009

2. Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson

Education, 2006 reprint.

3. Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C”, Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010

reprint.

4. Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India,2009

5. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm

2. http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html

3. http://www.w3schools.in/c

4. http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners

15GE152 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY


LT P C

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering practices

17

in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.

To have a study and hands-on-exercise on plumbing and carpentry components.

To have a practice on gas welding, foundry operations and fitting

To have a study on measurement of electical quantities, energy and resistance to earth.

To have a practice on soldering

Course Outcomes:

Do pipe connections with different joining components.

Create joints for roofs, doors, windows and furniture

Prepare square fitting and vee fitting models

Do residential house wiring

Measure energy and resistance to earth of an electrical equipment

Apply soldering

GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)

I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9

Buildings:

Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings, Safety aspects.

Plumbing Works:

1. Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers, and elbows

in household fittings.

2. Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.

3. Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.

4. Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with

different joining components.

5. Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.

Carpentry using Power Tools only:

1. Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.

2. Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.

II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

Welding:

Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.

Basic Machining:

1. Simple Turning, Step turning

2. Drilling Practice using drilling machine.

Sheet Metal Work:

1. Forming & Bending:

2. Model making – Trays, funnels, etc.

18

3. Different type of joints.

Machine assembly practice:

1. Study of centrifugal pump

2. Study of air conditioner

Demonstration on:

1. Gas welding practice

2. Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –Exercise – Production of

hexagonal headed bolt.

3. Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.

4. Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.

GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)

III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10

1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.

2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.

3. Stair case wiring

4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.

5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.

6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.

IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement of AC signal

parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CRO.

2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EXOR and NOT.

3. Generation of Clock Signal.

4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.

5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory”,

Anuradha Publications, (2007).

2. T.Jeyapoovan, M.Saravanapandian & S.Pranitha, “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas Publishing

House Pvt. Ltd, (2006)

3. H.S. Bawa, “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, (2007).

4. A.Rajendra Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, “Workshop Practice”, Sree Sai Publication, (2002).

5. P.Kannaiah & K.L.Narayana, “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, (1999).

SEMESTER EXAMINATION PATTERN

The Laboratory examination is to be conducted for Group A & Group B, allotting 90 minutes for each group, with

19

a break of 15 minutes. Both the examinations are to be taken together in sequence, either in the FN session or in

the AN session. The maximum marks for Group A and Group B lab examinations will be 50 each, totaling 100 for

the Lab course. The candidates shall answer either I or II under Group A and either III or IV under Group B,

based on lots.

List of equipment and components

(For a Batch of 30 Students)

CIVIL ENGINEERING

1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, plastic pipes,

flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings.

15 Sets.

2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.

3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.

4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each

5. Power Tools:

(a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos.

(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos.

(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos.

(d) Planer 2 Nos.

(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos.

(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.

2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.

3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.

4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other welding outfit. 2 Nos.

5. Centre lathe 10 Nos.

6. Drilling machine 2 Nos.

7. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets

8. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets

9. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos.

10. . Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each.

ELECTRICAL

1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 10 Sets

2. Electrical measuring instruments 15 Sets.

3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each

4. Megger (250V/500V). 1 No.

5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos.

(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos.

ELECTRONICS

1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.

2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.

3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.

4. Multimeters 10 Nos.

5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power supply 2 Nos.

20

15HS201 Technical English – II


L T P C

3 0 0 3


make the students of Engineering and Technology enhance their communicative skills

strengthen LSRW skills

boost up creative and critical thinking

master the skills of writing

face the challenges of the competitive world

Course Outcomes:

The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to enhance LSRW skills

Their creative and critical thinking will be enriched

The students will be able to face the challenges of the competitive world

UNIT I 15

Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Listening to different types of conversation and

answering questions. Speaking - Opening a conversation (greetings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn

taking - Closing a conversation (excuses, general wish, positive comment, and thanks); narrating personal

experience. Reading - Developing analytical skills, Deductive and inductive reasoning - intensive reading.

Writing - Biography Writing- Effective use of SMS for sending short notes and messages - Using ‘emoticons’ as

symbols in messages -e-mail/blogs - Posting reviews in blogs. Grammar – Regular and irregular verbs - Modal

verbs - Purpose expressions. Vocabulary – Match the Synonyms- Homonyms and Homophones.

UNIT II 7

Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues - Conversations between great leaders and celebrities.

Speaking - Conversation practice in real life situations, asking for directions (using polite expressions), giving

directions (using imperative sentences), Purchasing goods from a shop, Discussing various aspects of a film

(they have already seen) or a book (they have already read); Dialogues (Fill up exercises), Recording students’

dialogues. Reading - Reading a short story or an article from newspaper, Critical reading, Comprehension skills;

Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels); Writing - Writing a review / summary of a story /article -

Product Description -Dialogue Writing- memos and circulars. Grammar - Use of clauses - Conditional clauses -

Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences– Conjunctions. Vocabulary :

Descriptive words & phrases,

UNIT III 6

Listening - Listening to the conversation with various accents/dialects - Understanding the structure of

conversations. Speaking -Conversation skills with a sense of stress, intonation, pronunciation and meaning –

Seeking information – expressing feelings (affection, anger, regret, etc.). Reading - Speed reading – reading

passages with time limit - Skimming; Writing - Minutes of meeting – format and practice in the preparation of

minutes - Writing summary after reading articles from journals - Giving instructions Grammar - Reported speech

- Active and passive voice - American and British English.

Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the Spelling.

UNIT IV 7

Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic

and video conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skills - listening and responding - asking

questions, -note taking – passing on messages, Role play and mock interview for grasping interview skills;

21

Telephonic interview – recording the responses. Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the

company concerned. Writing - Applying for a job – cover letter - résumé preparation – vision, mission and goals

of the candidate; e-résumé writing. Writing Advertisements for a Product. Grammar - Numerical expressions -

discourse markers -Adjectives and comparative Adjectives. Vocabulary -Idioms and their meanings – Using

idioms in sentences - Phrases used for Advertisements

UNIT V 10

Listening - Viewing a model debate and reviewing the performance of each participant - Identifying the

characteristics of a good listener; Sample Debate Speaking - Group communication skills –assertiveness in

expressing opinions – mind mapping technique; Reading - making notes from books, Newspaper or any form of

written materials. Writing – Itinerary - Checklist - report writing – recommendations / suggestions – interpretation

of data (using charts for effective presentation) - Note making skills. Grammar–Infinitives and Gerunds - Cause

and effect expressions.Vocabulary – Collocation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.

Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.

2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.

Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.

3. Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,

New Delhi, 2007.

4. Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition

(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.

Extensive reading:

1. Wells, H.G. The Time machine, Peacock, India, 2008.

15BS201 MATHEMATICS II


L T P C

3 2 0 4


To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary differential equations

obtained from engineering problems

To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus that is needed for problems in engineering

disciplines

To know the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to enable the student to apply them

with confidence, in application areas such as heat conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of the

electric current

To make the student for appreciating the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in which it

is earlier to handle the problem that is being investigated.

22

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the students are able to

Apply different techniques to solve ordinary differential equations

Solve engineering problems using vector calculus

Use complex variable theory for applications like heat conduction, fluid dynamics etc.

Transform given problem to a new domain for solving it efficiently

UNIT 0 (Not for Examinations) 5+0

Reviews of integration concepts

UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Method of variation of parameters –Method of undetermined coefficients – Homogeneous equation of Euler’s

and Legendre’s type – System of Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients

UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 9+3

Gradient and Directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields – Line

integral over a plane curve – Surface integral and Volume integral– Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stokes’

theorems (excluding proofs) – Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals

UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9+3

Analytic functions – Necessary and Sufficient conditions for analyticity – properties – Harmonic conjugates –

Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions w= z+c, cz, 1/z, z+1/z, and -

Bilinear transformation.

UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9+3

Line integral – Cauchy’s theorem and integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues

– Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and

semi-circular contour with no pole on real axis

UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 9+3

Laplace transform – Transforms of elementary functions – Basic properties – Transform of derivatives and

integrals – Transform of periodic functions - Initial and Final value theorems – Inverse Transforms – Convolution

theorem –Application to solution of linear ODE with constant coefficients

TOTAL: 65 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”,, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 43rd

edition (2013)

2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9th

Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2013)

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,

4th

Edition, 2014

2. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition,

11th

Reprint, 2013

3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7th

Edition, 2012

23

4. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 5.2, Unit – 1,2)

5. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company, New Delhi, 11th

Reprint, 2010

15BS202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT

(Common to all UG Programme)

L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives:

The student is expected to understand

What constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve

these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful

environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve bio-

diversity.

The role of government and non-government organizations in environment management.

About Disaster and its management.

Course Outcomes:


Understand the basic concepts of environment studies and natural resources.

Get the thorough knowledge about ecosystem and biodiversity.

Have an elaborate knowledge about causes, effects and control measures of various types of pollution.

Understand the social issues and various environmental acts.

Get the knowledge about types of disaster and mitigation measures.

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL

RESOURCES

9

Definition, scope and importance – Need for public awareness – Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation,

deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people –

Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water,

dams – benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and

using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture

and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer, pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies

– Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate

energy sources. Case studies – Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of

resources for sustainable lifestyles

UNITII ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 10

Concept of an ecosystem – Structure and function of an ecosystem – Producers, consumers and decomposers –

Energy flow in the ecosystem (single channel energy flow model) – Concept of nutrient cycling (Nitrogen cycle) –

Ecological succession – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction to Biodiversity –

Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use,

social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, National and local levels – India as a mega-

diversity nation – Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife

conflicts – Endangered and endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ

conservation of biodiversity.

UNITIII ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOCIAL ISSUES 12

Definition – Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Marine pollution (d)

Noise pollution (e) Nuclear hazards – Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban

and industrial wastes – Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.

24

Unsustainable and Sustainable development – Unsustainable practices – Issues – possible solutions –

Water conservation, rain water harvesting – Environmental ethics –Acts for Prevention of Environmental

Pollution – Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act - Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act –

Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Environment Protection Act – Issues involved in enforcement of

environmental legislation – Public awareness.

UNITIV DISASTER AND ITS IMPACTS 7

Definition of Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Risk – Types – Natural disasters (earthquake, landslides, flood,

cyclones, tsunami and drought) – Manmade disasters (Chemical, nuclear and biological) Disaster impacts

(environmental, physical, social, ecological and economical) – Case studies.

UNITV DISASTER MANAGEMENT 7

Need and concept of Disaster management – Disaster Management cycle – Prevention, mitigation,

preparedness, relief, recovery – Post–disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste

management, disease control) – Role and responsibilities of government, community, local institutions and

NGOs.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science,

Pearson Education Pvt., Ltd., Third Edition, 2014.

2. Miller T.G. Jr, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co.

3. Townsend C., Harper J., and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science, Third Edition.

4. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to Air Pollution, Techno-Science Publications.

5. Anubha Kaushik and Kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age International

(P) Ltd, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-81-224-3647-1, 2014.

6. Mukesh Dhunna., 2009, Disaster Management, Vayu Education of India, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2004.

2. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol. I

and II, Enviro Media.

3. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai,

2001.

4. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.

5. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,

New Delhi, ISBN: 0070601690, 2006.

6. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.

7. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation.

15BS203 APPLIED MATERIALS SCIENCE

(Common to Civil and Mechanical Engineering)

L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives:

To introduce the essential principles of material science for Mechanical and related Engineering

applications

To transform the basic principles and concepts to understand the utility of Engineering Materials for

industrial applications in terms of their structure and properties

25

To identify the fleet of scientific channels exploring the generation of high-tech Engineering materials

Course Outcomes:

The students are able to understand the crystal structure and structure related properties of the

materials

The students will acquire knowledge about magnetic and superconducting materials

The students will acquire knowledge about the non-ferrous materials like polymers and ceramics

The students will acquire knowledge about the composite materials

The students are able to understand the application of nano devices

UNIT I PLASTIC DEFORMATION OF MATERIALS 9

Crystal imperfections: point, line, planar and volume defects–Frank Reed source of dislocations–Plastic and

elastic deformation, twinning, cold/hot work hardening–Recovery, recrystallization and grain growth–grain size,

ASTM grain size number–Strengthening methods–Strain hardening–Refinement of the grain size–Solid solution

strengthening–Precipitation hardening

UNIT II MAGNETIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9

Origin of magnetic moment–Bohr magneton–Dia and para magnetism–Ferro magnetism–Domain theory–

Hysteresis–Soft and hard magnetic materials–antiferromagnetic materials–Ferrites–applications

Superconductivity: properties–Types–BCS theory (qualitative) –High Tc superconductors –Application of

superconductors–SQUID, cryotron, magnetic levitation.

UNIT III POLYMERIC AND CERAMIC MATERIALS 9

Polymers–Types of polymers–Thermal, Mechanical, Electrical and Viscoelastic Properties–Conducting Polymers,

Bio-Polymers and High temperature polymers and their applications Engineering ceramics–Properties and

applications–ZrO2, Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4

UNIT IV COMPOSITE MATERIALS 9

Definition–function of matrix and reinforcement in composites–classification of composites based on

reinforcement–types of composite materials–polymers, metallic and ceramic matrix composites. Law of mixtures.

Comparison with conventional materials. Fabrication of metal matrix and ceramic matrix composites–properties

and uses.

UNIT V NANOMATERIALS 9

Introduction–low dimensional structures–quantum well, wires and dots–Electronic and optical properties–

nanoclusters and nanocrystals–properties of nanomaterials. Synthesis–CVD, electrodeposition, sol-gel.

Fabrication and characterization of nano electronic devices and MEMS. CNT– Fabrication techniques–properties

and applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. William D. Callister, Jr. Material Science and Engineering, Seventh Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc. New

Delhi, 2010

2. Kasap, S.O., Principle of electronic materials and devices, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007

3. Koch C, Nanostructured materials: processing, properties and applications, William Andrew Pub., 2008

4. The Science and Engineering of Materials, Sixth Edition, Donald R. Askeland, Pradeep, P. Fulay,

Wendelin J. Wright, SI Edition Prepared by D.K. Bhattacharya

26

5. Cengage Learning, 2011

6. Ragavan, V. Material science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Kenneth G. Budinski and Micheal K. Budinski, Engineering Materials, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.

2. Flinn R. A. and Trojan P.K. Engineering Materials and their application, Wiley, 2009.

3. Pradeep T. Nano: The essential, McGraw Hill Professional, 2012.

4. J.C. Anderson, K.D. Leaver, P. Leevers, R. D. Rawlings, Material Science of Engineers, 5th

Edition,

Nelson Thomas Ltd. UK, 2003.

5. Polymer Science and Technology, Third Edition, by Joel R. Fried, Prentice Hall; 3 Edition, 2014.

15GE201 ENGINEERING MECHANICS

(Common to Civil / Mechanical)

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments

To apply static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three

dimensions.

To comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium.

To understand the principle of work and energy, the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion.

To write the dynamic equilibrium equation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course the student will be able to

Understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments

Static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three dimensions.

Understand the principle of work and energy.

Comprehend the effect of friction on equilibrium.

Understand the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion and the interrelationship.

Write the dynamic equilibrium equation.

UNIT I BASICS & EQUILIBRIUM OF PARTICLES 12

Introduction – Rigid Bodies –Laws of Mechanics – Lame’s theorem, Parallelogram and triangular Law of forces

,Principle of transmissibility – Coplanar Forces – Resolution and Composition of forces – Equivalent systems of

forces – Single equivalent– force Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space –

Vectorial representation of forces.

UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12

Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – requirements of stable equilibrium – Moments and

Couples – Scalar components of a moment– Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial

representation of moments and couples –– Varignon’s theorem – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions –

Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in three dimensions – Examples.

27

UNIT III FRICTION 12

Frictional force – Laws of Coulomb friction – simple contact friction –Sliding Friction–Inclined planes–Angle of

Repose– Belt friction – Ladder friction– Wedge Friction– Rolling resistance.

UNIT IV PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12

Significance of properties of Sections - First moment of area and the Centroid of Simple sections – Rectangle,

circle, triangle from integration method– T section, I section, – Angle section, Hollow section by using standard

formula – Theorem of Pappus Guldinus– Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem - Second and

product moments of plane area – Rectangle, triangle, circle from integration method – T section, I section, Angle

section, Hollow section by using standard formula –Polar moment of inertia – Principal moments of inertia of

plane areas – Principal axes of inertia – mass moment of inertia of solid rectangular prisms, cylinders and cones.

UNIT V DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES & RIGID BODIES 12

Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion – Newton’s

law of motion – D’Alembert principle – Work Energy Equation of particles – Impulse and Momentum – Impact of

elastic bodies. General Plane motion–Translation and rotation of rigid bodies.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. Beer, F.P and Johnson Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Engineers”, Vol. 1 Statics and Vol. 2 Dynamics,

McGraw–Hill International Edition, 1997.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rajasekaran, S, Sankarasubramanian, G., “Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics”, Vikas Publishing

House Pvt. Ltd., 2000.

2. Hibbeller, R.C., “Engineering Mechanics”, Vol. 1 Statics, Vol. 2 Dynamics, Pearson Education Asia Pvt.

Ltd., 2000.

3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagam, S., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics & Dynamics”, Tata McGraw–Hill,

2001.

4. MeriamJ.L, KraigeL.G, “Engineering Mechanics-Statics”, 6th

Edition, Wiley, 2010.

5. Irving H. Shames, “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd.,

4th

Edition, 2003.

6. Ashok Gupta, “Interactive Engineering Mechanics – Statics – A Virtual Tutor (CDROM)”, Pearson

Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2002.

15GE202 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering

(Common to Civil, Mechanical & Bio-Tech)

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the students to have a clear knowledge of the basic electrical and electronics engineering.

To analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.

To understand the operating principles of measuring instruments.

To familiarize the construction, working principle, EMF equation of DC machines, single phase

transformer, alternator, synchronous motor and induction motor.

To acquaint the students with construction, operation, characteristics and applications of semiconductor

28

devices.

To make the students understand the concepts of logic gates and their applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, students will be able to

Analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.

Apply the basic laws governing the operation of the instruments.

Demonstrate about DC machines, AC machines and its applications.

Analyze and compare the construction, theory and characteristics of the semiconductor devices.

Design basic combinational and sequential logic circuits.

UNITI ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASUREMENTS 12

Ohm’s Law – Kirchhoff’s Laws –Reduction of series and parallel circuits-Mesh and Nodal Analysis of DC circuits –

Introduction to AC Circuits - RMS Value, Average value, Form factor and peak factor phasor representation – Single

Phase AC series circuits with R,RL, RC & RLC- Power and Power factor. Introduction to three phase circuits- Star

and delta connected balanced load.

Electrical measurements - Introduction, Operating torques, Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron

Instruments, Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy meter.

UNITII DC MACHINES & TRANSFORMER (Qualitative treatment only) 8

DC Generators - construction, principle of operation, Types, EMF equations and applications. DC Motors -

operation, Types, Speed and torque equation – speed control of DC shunt motors. Single Phase Transformer -

Constructional details and operation, Types, EMF equation, transformation ratio.

UNITIII AC MACHINES (Qualitative treatment only) 8

Synchronous generators - construction and operation, EMF equation - Synchronous motors – principle of

operation. Three phase induction motor – Types, Construction and operation, Torque equation, slip torque

characteristics, Single phase induction motor - construction, operation and applications.

UNITIV SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS (Qualitative

treatment only)

9

Introduction to semiconductors-PN Junction Diode – characteristics, breakdown effect and applications - Half wave

and Full wave rectifiers, Zener Diode - characteristics and voltage regulator. Bipolar Junction Transistor – operation

of NPN and PNP, characteristics of CB, CE, CC configurations. Transducer - Thermistor, Thermocouple, Hall

effect, peltier effect.

UNITV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS (Qualitative treatment only) 8

Number System – Binary, octal, hexadecimal, Logic Gates (AND, OR,NOT,NAND,NOR,XOR,XNOR), Half and Full

Adders – Flip-Flops –RS, JK, T and D - Counters – synchronous up counter, synchronous down counter,

asynchronous up counter, asynchronous down counter, shift registers – shift right and shift left register

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. V N Mittle, Arvind Mittle “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.

2. R.S. Sedha, “A Textbook of Applied Electronics” S. Chand & Co., 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S, “Basic Electrical, Electronics and Computer Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009.

2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University press (2012).

29

3. V K Mehta, Rohit mehta “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, (2015).

4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline Series, McGrawHill,

(2014).

15BS251 APPLIED PHYSICS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

(Common to EEE/ECE/CSE/MECH/IT/BT)

(Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Environmental

Chemistry)

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To determine particle size and wavelength

To find the viscosity of liquid

To find band gap of a semiconductor

To determine dissolved oxygen and chloride content in water

To estimate chromium, iron, sodium and chlorine using various methods

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Use Post Office Box to determine band gap of a semiconductor

Use spectrometer to determine the dispersive power of the prism

Use Winkler’s method to determine dissolved oxygen in water

Use Argentometric method to estimate chloride content in water

Use flame photometry to estimate sodium in water

PHYSICS LABORATORY

List of Experiments (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Laser- (i) Particle size and wavelength determination

(ii) Numerical aperture and acceptance angle measurement of an optical fiber

2. Post Office Box-Determination of band gap of a semiconductor

3. Indexing of Powder Diffraction Pattern

4. Characteristics of a photodiode

5. Uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination

6. Spectrometer-Dispersive power of the prism

7. Viscosity of liquids- Determination of co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s method.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, MepcoSchlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.

ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

List of Experiments (Any FIVE Experiments)

1. Determination of DO in water by Winkler’s method

30

2. Estimation of Chloride in water sample by Argentometric method

3. Determination of COD value of industrial effluents

4. Estimation of chromium in tannery wastes

5. Estimation of available chlorine in bleaching powder

6. Estimation of iron by spectrophotometry

7. Estimation of sodium by flame photometry

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. A. L. Vogel, A Text Book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, ELBS London, 1995.

2. D. P. Shoemaker and C. W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.

3. N. Manivasakam, Industrial Effluents – Origin, Characteristics, Effects Analysis & Treatment, Sakthi

Publications, Coimbatore, 1987.

15EE253 Electrical and Electronics Lab LT PC

0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:

To expose the students to apply the basic laws and give them experimental skill.

To expose the students to the operation of DC Machines, transformer, synchronous generator and

induction motors and give them experimental skill.

To expose the students to the characteristics of Diode, Zener Diode and BJT and their applications.

Course Outcomes:

Students will be able to

Apply the circuit theory concepts and analyze the outcome.

Obtain various characteristics of AC and DC Machines.

Explain the operation of various simple semiconductor devices and obtain their characteristics.

List of Experiments

1. Speed Control of D.C. Shunt Motor

2. Open Circuit characteristic of self excited D.C. shunt generator

3. Load Test on Single phase transformer

4. Load Test on three phase squirrel cage induction motor

5. Open Circuit characteristic of an Alternator

6. Verification of Kirchhoff’s voltage and current laws

7. V – I characteristics of P-N Junction Diode and Zener Diode

8. Input and Output characteristics of CE configuration of NPN transistor

9. Half wave Rectifier

10. Full wave Rectifier

TOTAL: 45 Periods

31

15MA305 : MATHEMATICS III - BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS AND

PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know a sound knowledge on Partial Differential Equations.

To acquaint the student with the concepts of Fourier series that is needed for problems in engineering

disciplines.

To know the standard techniques for solving boundary value problem.

To familiarize the student with Fourier transform which is used to solve problems in engineering and

technology.

To make the student knowledgeable in the area of probabilistic models.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course, the students will be able to

Solve various Partial Differential Equations.

Express any periodic functions as a series of well-known periodic functions sine and cosine.

Obtain the solution of boundary value problem such as displacement of string and heat conduction.

Use Fourier transform in engineering applications.

Familiar with the concepts of probability and distributions.

UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Formation of PDE – Solutions of first order PDE – Lagrange’s linear PDE - Singular solution for Standard types

- Equations reducible to standard types – Classification of second order PDE – Solution of second and higher

order linear homogeneous PDE with constant coefficients – Linear non-homogeneous partial differential

equations with constant coefficients.

UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12

.Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half-range Sine and Cosine series

– Parseval’s identity – Harmonic Analysis – Complex form of Fourier series.

UNIT III FOURIER TRANSFORM 12

Fourier integral theorem (Statement only) – Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties –

Transform of elementary functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.

UNIT IV BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN PDE 12

Method of separation of variables – Solutions of one dimensional wave equation and one dimensional heat

flow equation – Steady state solution of two-dimensional heat flow equation – Fourier series solutions in

Cartesian coordinates.

UNIT V PROBABILITY RANDOM VARIABLES AND DISTRIBUTIONS 12

Axiomatic definition of probability – Conditional Probability – Baye’s Theorem - Discrete and Continuous

random variables – Cumulative distribution function – properties – Moments – Moments about mean – Moment

generating function – Uniform and Exponential distributions.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition, 2014.

2. Gupta, S.C, and Kapoor, V.K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand and Sons,

32

New Delhi, Reprint 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media (An imprint of

Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2011.

2. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi,

7th Edition, 2012.

3. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 5th

Edition, 2015.

4. Hwei Hsu, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and Random

Processes”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2014.

5. Oliver C. Ibe, “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, Elsevier India Pvt Ltd,

New Delhi, Reprint-2012.

15ME301 : ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To achieve an understanding of principles of thermodynamics and to be able to use it in accounting

for the bulk behavior of the simple physical systems.

To provide in-depth study of thermodynamic principles, thermodynamics of state, basic

thermodynamic relations, principles of psychrometry and properties of pure substances.

To enlighten the basic concepts of vapour power cycles.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course students will:

Have a fundamental understanding of basic concepts and first law of thermodynamics.

Be able to understand the second law and its statements, concept of entropy and availability.

Familiarize the concepts of real and ideal gases, equations of state and various thermodynamic

relations and applications.

Recognize the significance of thermodynamic properties of pure substances in various phases and

detailed concepts of steam power cycles.

Acquire knowledge about the concepts of psychrometry, different psychrometric process and its

applications.

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9

Basic concepts - concept of continuum, macroscopic approach. Thermodynamic systems - closed, open and

isolated. Property, state, path and process, quasi-static process, work, modes of work, Zeroth law of

thermodynamics – concept of temperature and heat. Concept of ideal and real gases. First law of

thermodynamics – application to closed and open systems, internal energy, specific heat capacities, enthalpy,

steady flow process with reference to various thermal equipments.

UNIT II SECOND LAWOF THERMODYNAMICS 9

Second law of thermodynamics – Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statements of second law, Reversibility and

irreversibility. Carnot theorem, Carnot cycle, reversed Carnot cycle, efficiency, Coefficient of Performance

(COP). Thermodynamic temperature scale, Clausius inequality, concept of entropy, entropy of ideal gas,

principle of increase of entropy –Availability (Elementary treatment only).

UNIT III PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE 9

33

Properties of pure substances, thermodynamic properties of pure substances in solid, liquid and vapour

phases, phase rule, P-V, P-T, T-V, T-S, H-S diagrams, PVT surfaces, thermodynamic properties of steam,

Calculations of work done and heat transfer in non-flow and flow processes.

UNIT IV IDEAL AND REAL GASES AND THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 9

Properties of ideal and real gases, equation of state, Avogadro’s Law, Van der Waals equation of state,

compressibility factor, Exact differentials. Thermodynamic relations, Maxwell relations, Clausius - Clapeyron

equations, relations for changes in Entropy, Enthalpy & Internal Energy, Joule-Thomson coefficient & inversion

curve.

UNIT V PROPERTIES OF MIXTURES 9

Ideal gas mixtures – Evaluation of properties, Dalton’s law of partial pressure, properties of air-water vapour

mixtures: DBT, WBT, RH, dew point temperature, degree of saturation, thermodynamic wet bulb temperature,

enthalpy of moist air, sensible heating and cooling, bypass factor, calculations using psychrometric table and

chart.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

(Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram, Psychrometric chart and Refrigerant

property tables are permitted)

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Nag.P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition. 2013.

2. Yunus Cengel, Michael Boles, ‘Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach’ 8th Edition 2014 – Tata

McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Holman.J.P, “Thermodynamics”, 3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill, 1995.

2. Vanwylen and Sontag, “Classical Thermodynamics”, Wiley Eastern, 4th Edition 1994.

3. Arora C.P, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

4. Merle C, Potter, Craig W, Somerton, “Thermodynamics for Engineers”, Schaum Outline Series, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition 2013.

15ME302 : STRENGTH OF MATERIALS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge of simple stresses, strains and deformation in components due to external loads.

To assess stresses and deformations through mathematical models of beams, Twisting bars or

combinations of both.

Effect of component dimensions and shape on stresses and deformations are to be understood.

The study would provide knowledge for use in the design courses (Design of M/C Elements, FEA).

Review Topics: Resultant forces, Free Body Diagram- Moment of a force- Equilibrium Equations.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course the students will be able to:

Understand the basic concepts of deformable body mechanics, stress, strain and fundamentals of

elasticity.

Construct shear force diagram, Bending moment diagram for different beam configurations with

combination of transverse loading and understand theory of simple bending.

34

Determine the deflection of different beam configurations and emphasize on buckling of Columns.

Compute stresses on inclined plane and principal planes by graphical and analytical method.

Acquire knowledge in pure Torsion of shafts and deformation of helical springs and apply it in

different situations.

UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 8

Rigid and Deformable bodies – Strength, Stiffness and Stability-Stresses; Tensile, Compressive and Shear –

Basics of Elasticity- Elastic constants - Stress-Strain Diagram for ductile and brittle material – Deformation of

simple and compound bars under axial load –Thermal stress – Strain energy and unit strain energy – Strain

energy in Uniaxial loads.

UNIT II ANALYSIS OF STRESSES IN TWO DIMENSIONS 10

Biaxial state of stresses – Thin cylindrical and spherical shells – Deformation in thin cylindrical and spherical

shells – Applications of thin cylindrical and spherical shells-Biaxial stresses at a point – Stresses on inclined

plane – Principal planes and stresses – Mohr’s circle for biaxial stresses – Maximum shear stress.

UNIT III BEAMS - LOADS AND STRESSES 10

Types and applications of beams: Supports and Loads – Shear force and Bending Moment in beams –

Cantilever, Simply supported and overhanging beams – Stresses in beams – Theory of simple bending –

Bending Stress variation along the length and in the beam section – Effect of shape of beam section on stress

induced – Variation of Shear stresses in beams – Shear flow.

UNIT IV BEAM & COLUMN DEFLECTION 10

Elastic curve of Neutral axis of the beam under normal loads – Evaluation of beam deflection and slope:

Double integration method, Macaulay Method, and Moment-area Method – Columns – Applications- End

conditions – Equivalent length of a column – Euler equation –Slenderness ratio – Rankine formula for

columns.

UNITV TORSION & SPRINGS 7

Torsion of circular bars – Torsion Equation-Shear stress distribution – Bars of Solid and hollow circular section

– Stepped shaft – Twist and torsion stiffness – Compound shafts – Fixed and simply supported shafts –

Application to close-coiled helical springs – Maximum shear stress in spring section including Wahl Factor –

Deflection of helical coil springs under axial loads – stresses in helical coil springs under torsion loads.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Software demonstration should be given to the students for the simple simulation of bars, beams, springs,

columns using Educational Softwares for Mechanics of Materials like MDSolids etc.,

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Beer F. P. and Johnston R, “Mechanics of Materials”, McGraw-Hill Book Co, 7th Edition, 2014.

2. Bansal R.K, “A Textbook of Strength of Materials”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Popov E.P, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Timoshenko S.P, “Elements of Strength of Materials”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 1997.

3. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co, New Delhi, Revised 1st Edition,

2004.

4. Ryder G.H, “Strength of Materials”, Macmillan India Ltd., 3rd Edition, 2002.

5. Khurmi R.S, Khurmi N, “Strength of Materials”, S.Chand, New Delhi, 2013.

6. Singh D.K, “Mechanics of Solids” Pearson Education 2008.

35

15ME303 : FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the structure and the properties of the fluid.

To analyze and appreciate the complexities involved in solving the fluid flow problems.

To study the mathematical techniques already in vogue and apply them to the solutions of practical

flow problems.

To understand the energy exchange process in fluid mechanics handling incompressible fluids.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Demonstrate the structure and the properties of the fluid.

Analyze the complexities involved in solving the fluid flow problems.

Understand the mathematical techniques already in vogue and apply to the solutions of practical flow

problems.

Acquire knowledge about the energy exchange process in fluid mechanics handling incompressible

fluids.

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND PROPERTIES 12

Fluid – definition, distinction between solid and fluid - Units and dimensions - Properties of fluids - density,

specific weight, specific volume, specific gravity, temperature, viscosity, compressibility, vapour pressure,

capillary and surface tension - Fluid statics: concept of fluid static pressure, absolute and gauge pressures –

Pascal’s law, Hydrostatic Law - pressure measurements by manometers and pressure gauges.

UNIT II FLUID KINEMATICS AND FLUID DYNAMICS 12

Fluid Kinematics - lines of flow - types of flow - velocity field and acceleration – circulation and vorticity -

continuity equation (one and three dimensional differential forms)- Equation of streamline - stream function -

velocity potential function -fluid dynamics - equations of motion - Euler's equation along a streamline -

Bernoulli's equation – applications – Venturi meter, Orifice meter, Pitot tube.

UNIT III INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUID FLOW 12

Viscous flow - Navier-Stoke's equation (Statement only) - Shear stress, pressure gradient relationship -

laminar flow between parallel plates - Laminar flow through circular tubes (Hagen poiseulle's) - Hydraulic and

energy gradient - flow through pipes - Darcy -weisback's equation - friction factor- Moody's diagram-minor

losses - flow through pipes in series and in parallel - power transmission.

UNIT IV HYDRAULIC TURBINES 12

Fluid machines: definition and classification - exchange of energy - Euler's equation for turbo machines -

Construction of velocity vector diagrams - head and specific work - components of energy transfer - degree of

reaction.

Hydro turbines: definition and classifications - Pelton turbine - Francis turbine - Kaplan turbine - working

principles - velocity triangles - work done – efficiencies.

UNIT V HYDRAULIC PUMPS 12

Pumps: definition and classifications - Centrifugal pump: classifications, working principle, velocity triangles,

specific speed, efficiency and performance curves - Reciprocating pump: classification, working principle,

indicator diagram, work saved by air vessels and performance curves - rotary pumps: working principles of

gear and vane pumps.

36

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Victor L.Streeter, Wylie E. Benjamin and Bedford W. Keith W, “Fluid Mechanics”,Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing CompanyLtd, New Delhi, 9th Edition, 2010.

2. Kumar, K. L., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics”, Eurasia Publishing House (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 7th

Edition, 2010.

3. Vasandani, V. P., “Hydraulic Machines - Theory and Design”, Khanna Publishers, 11th Edition, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bansal, R.K., “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines”, Laxmi publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 5th

Edition, 2013.

2. White, F.M., “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2013.

3. Ramamirtham, S., "Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulics and Fluid Machines", Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New

Delhi, 2012.

15ME304 : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY - I L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the student to understand the important concepts of basic manufacturing processes.

To understand the principles of various fabrication and forming processes.

To study about bulk deformation processes, sheet metal and plastics manufacturing processes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

After studying this course students will be able:

To gain an understanding and appreciation of the breadth and depth of the field of manufacturing.

To indicate which types of casting process are suited to produce different shapes of a product using a

specific material.

To understand the principles of various fabrication and cutting processes.

To describe and explain applications of the metal forging, rolling, extrusion and drawing processes

and select the most appropriate metal forming process to a particular component.

To become familiar with forming, welding, casting, and forming (metal/plastic) processes.

UNIT I METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9

Sand casting – Sand moulds - Type of patterns – Pattern materials – Pattern allowances – Types of Moulding

sand – Properties – Core making – Methods of Sand testing – CO2 process - Moulding machines – Melting

furnaces.

Working principle of Special casting processes – Shell, investment casting – Ceramic mould – Pressure die

casting – Centrifugal casting –– Sand Casting defects – Inspection methods.

UNIT II JOINING PROCESSES 9

Fusion welding processes – Types of Gas welding – Equipments used – Flame characteristics – Filler and

Flux materials - Arc welding equipments - Electrodes – Coating and specifications. Principles of Resistance

welding – Spot/butt, seam welding – Percussion welding - Gas metal arc welding – Flux cored – Submerged

arc welding – Electro slag welding – TIG welding.

Principle and application of special welding processes - Plasma arc welding – Thermit welding – Electron

beam welding, Laser Beam Welding, Friction stir welding, Ultrasonic Welding – Weld defects – Brazing and

soldering process – Methods and process capabilities – Filler materials and fluxes.

37

UNIT III METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9

Hot working and cold working of metals – Forging processes – Open, impression and closed die forging –

Characteristics of the process – Types of Forging Machines – Typical forging operations.

Rolling of metals – Types of Rolling mills - Flat strip rolling – Shape rolling operations – Defects in rolled parts

- Principle of rod and wire drawing - Tube drawing - Principles of Extrusion – Types of Extrusion – Hot and

Cold extrusion - Equipments.

UNIT IV SHEET METAL PROCESSES 9

Sheet metal characteristics - Typical shearing operations, bending and drawing operations – Stretch forming

operations – Formability of sheet metal and Bending force calculations – Test methods.

Working principle and application of special forming processes - Hydro forming – Rubber pad forming – Metal

spinning –Explosive forming - Magnetic pulse forming - Peen forming - Super plastic forming.

UNIT V PROCESSING OF PLASTIC COMPONENTS 9

Types of plastics - Characteristics of the forming and shaping processes – Moulding of Thermoplastics –

Working principles and applications of Injection moulding – Plunger and screw machines – Compression

moulding - Transfer moulding – Typical industrial applications –Blow moulding – Rotational moulding – Film

blowing – Extrusion - Thermoforming - Bonding of Thermoplastics. Elastomers – Processing Reinforced

plastics.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hajra Choudhury, “Elements of Workshop Technology, Vol. I”, Media PromotorsPvt Ltd., Mumbai,

2012.

2. S.Gowri, P.Hariharan, and A.SureshBabu, “Manufacturing Technology 1”, Pearson Education, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B.S. NagendraParashar& R.K. Mittal, “Elements of Manufacturing Processes”, Prentice Hall of India,

2004.

2. P.N. Rao, “Manufacturing Technology: Foundry, Forming and Welding - Volume 1”, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Limited, 4th Edition, 2013.

3. P.C. Sharma, “A text book of Production Technology (Manufacturing Processes)”, S. Chand and

Company, 7th Edition 2008.

4. Bergman, “Manufacturing Process”, John Wilely& Sons, 8th Edition, 2005.

5. SeropeKalpajian, Steven R.Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson

Education, 7th Edition 2013.

6. Beddoes.J and Bibby M.J, “Principles of Metal Manufacturing Processes”, Elsevier, 2006.

7. Rajput R.K, “A text book of Manufacturing Technology”, Lakshmi Publications, 2015

15EC306 : MICROPROCESSORS AND CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To give a complete understanding of the Architecture of 8085 and 8086 Microprocessor.

To impart the knowledge of programming 8085 and 8086 Microprocessor.

To make the students to solve real life problem using Microprocessor based systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyse the Architecture of 8085 and 8086 Microprocessor.

38

Develop applications on 8085 and 8086 Microprocessor.

Design advanced processor based system within realistic constraint.

Develop an ability to read and understand the architecture of other Processors.

UNIT I 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9

Introduction to microprocessor, computer and its organization, Programming system, Evolution of

Microprocessors, Block diagram of Microcomputer, Architecture of Intel 8085, Pin configuration and description

of signals, Data transfer Mechanisms-Memory-mapped and I/O mapped Data transfer, Programmed Data

transfer, Direct Memory access, parallel data transfer, serial data transfer, Interrupts, Memory interfacing,

interfacing I/O devices.

UNIT II 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9

Architecture of 8086, Pin Details of 8086- Function of pins common to minimum and maximum modes,

Function of pins used in minimum mode, Function of pins used in maximum mode, Minimum mode Bus cycles-

Maximum mode bus cycles- Memory Interfacing- 8086 Interrupts.

UNIT III 8086 INSTRUCTION SET AND PROGRAMMING 9

Programmer’s model of 8086, operand types, Addressing modes in 8086, Instruction set of 8086, Data transfer

instructions, Arithmetic instructions, Logical instructions, Flag manipulation instructions, Control transfer

instructions, Shift/rotate instructions, Machine or processor control instructions, 8086 Assembly Language

Programming

UNIT IV PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING 10

Serial and parallel I/O (8251 and 8255), key board display controller (8279), Programmable Interval timers

(Intel 8254), Interfacing Switches and LEDs, Interfacing Seven-segment Displays, ADC/DAC interfacing

UNIT V 8086 MICROPROCESSOR BASED CONTROL APPLICATIONS 8

High Power devices, Optical motor shaft encoders, Traffic Light control-stepper motor control-speed control of

DC motors, Analog interfacing and Industrial control, Industrial Process control system.

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. N.Senthil Kumar, M.Saravanan, S. Jeevanathan, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers”, Oxford

University Press 2011.

2. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Architecture, programming and system design

using 8085, 8086, 8051 and 8096”. PHI 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Applications with the 8085”, 5th

Edition, PHI 2002.

2. Douglas V.Hall, “Microprocessor and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”, Tata McGraw Hill,

2004.

3. Kenneth J.Ayala, “The 8086 Microprocessor, Programming and Interfacing the PC”, Thomson press

India Ltd. 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.wiki.saitjbp.org/wp-content/uploads/2015/03/UNIT-IIB.pdf

2. http://www.eastaughs.fsnet.co.uk/cpu/execution-instructions.htm

3. http://www.zseries.in/embedded%20lab/8085%20microprocessor/#.VqMMrk9enIU

15ME351 : STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND HYDRAULICS

LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

39

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The experimental work involved in this laboratory should make the student understand the

fundamental modes of loading of the structures and also make measurements of loads,

displacements and strains. Relating these quantities, the student should be able to obtain the

strength of the material and stiffness properties of structural elements.

Student should be able to verify the principles studied in theory by conducting the experiments.

The students should be able to perform basic measurements in fluid mechanics.

They should also be able to write and extract dimensionless groups in fluid mechanics problems.

In addition, the students should formulate and apply fluid mechanics equations in turbo machinery

and compressible flow applications.

The course lab provides skills in performing experiments and writing lab reports.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Introduce the concept of determining stresses and strains from the member forces.

Provide the basic concepts and effects of axial loads, bending, shear, and torsion on structural

components.

Ability to determine the behavior of structural elements, such as bars, beams and columns subjected

to tension, compression, shear, bending, and torsion by means of experiments.

Physical insight into the behavior materials and structural elements, including distribution of stresses

and strains, deformations and failure modes.

Conduct designed experiments, and analyze and evaluate data.

Measure fluid flow through ducts, selecting appropriate methods of measurements.

Evaluate the performance of centrifugal pumps and compressors.

Evaluate the performance of turbines: tangential and radial.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

STRENGTH OF MATERIALS

1. Tests involving axial compression, axial tension to obtain the stress – strain curve.

2. Test involving torsion to obtain the torque vs. angle of twist and hence the stiffness.

3. Tests on springs.

4. Hardness tests.

5. Shear test.

6. Test for impact resistance.

FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY

1. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for venturimeter.

2. Study of friction losses in pipes.

3. Study on performance characteristics of Pelton turbine.

4. Study on performance characteristics of Francis turbine.

5. Study on performance characteristics of Centrifugal pumps. (Constant speed / Variable speed)

6. Study on performance characteristics of submersible pump.

LISTOFEQUIPMENTS (For a batch of 30 students)

STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY

Sl.No. Description of Equipments Quantity

1. UTM of minimum 400 KN capacity 1

2. Torsion testing machine for steel rods 1

3. Izod impact testing machine 1

4. Hardness testing machine

Rockwell Vicker’s (any2) Brinnel

1

5. Extensometer 1

6. Compressometer 1

40

7. Dial gauges Few

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Modi, P.N. & Seth, S.M., “A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Standard Book

House, New Delhi, 10th Edition, 1991.

2. Rajput, R.K.,” A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, S.Chand and Co., New

Delhi, 1998.

3. Bansal, R.K., Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 1998.

4. The Testing of Engineering Materials – H.E. Daris, G.E. Troxell, G.F.W. Hauck – 4th Edition,

International Student Edition. Mc Graw Hill International Book Company.

FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY

Sl. No. Description of Equipments Quantity

1. Flowmeasurementinpipes

Venturimeter,U-tubemanometerfixtureslike Valves,collectingtank

1 Unit

2. LossesinPipes

- Major loss–Frictionloss

- Pipe lengths(min.3m) ofdifferent diameters with Valves and

pressure rapping & collecting tank

1 Unit

3. Pumps

(i) Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories (single

stage)

(ii) Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories (multi stage)

(iii) Submersible pump assembly with accessories

1 Unit

1 Unit

1 Unit

4. Turbine

(i) Impulse turbine assembly with fittings & accessories

(ii) Francis turbine assembly with fittings & accessories

1 Unit

1 Unit

STANDARDS:

1. IS 4460: Parts 1 to 3: 1995, Gears – Spur and Helical Gears – Calculation of Load Capacity.

2. IS 7443: 2002, Methods of Load Rating of Worm Gears.

3. IS 15151: 2002, Belt Drives – Pulleys and V-Ribbed belts for Industrial applications – PH, PJ, PK,

Pl and PM Profiles: Dimensions.

4. IS 2122: Part 1: 1973, Code of practice for selection, storage, installation and maintenance of

belting for power transmission: Part 1 Flat Belt Drives.

5. IS 2122: Part 2: 1991, Code of practice for selection, storage, installation and maintenance of

belting for power transmission: Part 2 V-Belt Drives.

15ME352 : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY – I L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To have a study and hands-on-experience on working of various lathe operations.

To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various manufacturing processes

such as gas welding and cutting, brazing and sheet metal work.

To have a practice on preparing sand mould, foundry operations.

To know the process of injection moulding.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Do lathe operations such as turning, facing, boring, etc. with lathe in an industry.

Students can do welding, gas cutting, and brazing by taking hands on training in this laboratory.

41

Students can fabricate funnel, Dust bin, and Soap tray using sheet metal.

To prepare sand moulds for making casting in the foundries.

UNIT I LATHE WORKS LEADING TO SIMPLE PRODUCTS 12

1.1. Facing, plain turning and step turning leading to a simple Product.

1.2. Taper turning using compound rest, Tailstock set over, etc.

1.3. Single start and multi start V thread cutting and knurling.

1.4. Boring and internal thread cutting. Dismantling and assembly of tailstock

1.5. Dismantling and assembly of tailstock

UNIT II WELDING EXCERCISES 10

2.1.Horizontal, Vertical and overhead welding.

2.2. Gas Cutting, Gas Welding.

2.3. Brazing - for demonstration purpose.

UNIT III SHEET METAL WORK 11

3.1. Fabrication of Soap tray or Dust bin using sheet metal.

3.2. Fabrication of a funnel using sheet metal.

UNIT IV PREPARATION OF SAND MOULD 12

4.1. Mould with solid, split patterns.

4.2. Mould with loose-piece pattern.

4.3. Mould with Core.

4.4. Injection Moulding- Demonstration.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS:

1. Centre Lathe with accessories

2. Welding

2.1. Arc welding machine.

2.2. Gas welding machine.

2.3. Brazing machine.

3. Sheet Metal Work facility

3.1. Hand Shear 300mm.

3.2. Bench vice.

3.3. Standard tools and callipers for sheet metal work.

4. Sand moulding Facility

4.1. Moulding Table.

4.2. Moulding boxes, tools and patterns.

5. Plastic Moulding

5.1. Injection Moulding Machine.

15ME353 : COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE DRAWING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the students understand and interpret drawings of machine components so as to prepare

assembly drawings by manually and using standard CAD packages.

42

To familiarize the students with Indian Standards on drawing practices and standard components.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identifying model parameters and the finite element method.

Understand the integrated design and manufacture systems.

Apply the Knowledge of computer recording of designs and methods for constructing solid objects.

Analyze the collisions of assembled elements, connecting parts and complex objects.

Build, edit and parameterize properties of complex solid objects.

Ability to perform strength verification of a simple machine component using FEM and prepare

technical documentation of a selected machine component.

UNIT I DRAWING STANDARDS 5

Code of practice for Engineering Drawing, BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints, keys, fasteners

– Reference to hand book for the selection of standard components like bolts, nuts, screws, keys etc.

UNIT II 2-D DRAWINGS 5

Limits, Fits – Tolerancing of individual dimensions- Specification of Fits- Manual Preparation of production

drawings and reading of part and assembly drawings

UNIT III CAD PRACTICE (USING APPLICATION PACKAGES) 10

Drawing, Editing, Dimensioning, Plotting Commands, Layering Concepts, Hatching, Detailing, Assembly,-

Exercises involving a Product, basic principles of GD&T (geometric dimensioning & tolerancing)

UNIT IV ASSEMBLY DRAWING (MANUAL & USING APPLICATION PACKAGES) 25

Manual part drawing and preparation of assembled views for given part details, followed by practicing the

same using CAD packages.

Suggested Assemblies:

Shaft couplings – Plummer block – Screw jack- Lathe Tailstock – Universal Joint – Machine Vice – Stuffing

box- safety Valves - Non-return valves- Connecting rod –Piston and crank shaft- Multi plate clutch- Preparation

of Bill of materials and tolerance data sheet.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Use of standard CAD application packages is recommended from the point of view of requirement by industries.

However to encourage our national efforts in indigenous development of software packages with focus on open

source, students may be encouraged to work with “CollabCAD Software”, developed by: National Informatics Centre

(CAD Group), Govt. of India, A-Block, C.G.O. Complex, Lodhi Road, New Delhi 110003, 2003” www.collabcad.com.

EQUIPMENTS NEEDED ( FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS)

1. Computer System

17” Graphics Terminal

Pentium IV Processor

80 GB HDD

512 MB RAM

Advanced graphics accelerator

2. Laser Printer

3. Plotter (A2 size)

4. Software

30 seats of latest/recent versions of

43

AutoCAD/CATIA/SOLIDWORKS/SOLID EDGE/NX/PRO-E/COLLABCAD or equivalent software.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bhatt.N.D. and Panchal.V.M, “Machine Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 388001, 38th Edition,

2003.

2. P.S.G. College of Technology, “Design Data”, Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2012.

3. Luzadder, Warren.J, and Duff, Jon.M. “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing”, Prentice Hall India

Pvt. Ltd., Eastern Economy Edition, 11th Edition.

EXTENSIVE READING :

Kulkarni, “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.

WEB REFERENCES:

http://www.onesmartclick.com/engineering/machine-design.html

15MA402 : MATHEMATICS IV - NUMERICAL AND STATISTICAL

TECHNIQUES

(COMMON TO EEE & MECH)

L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know the techniques for solving the transcendental equations, system of equations and eigenvalue

problem.

To construct an approximate polynomial to represent the data and to find the intermediate values.

To find differentiation and integration when the functions are in the analytical form which is too

complicated or the huge amounts of data are given.

To acquire the notion of sampling distributions and knowledge of statistical techniques useful in

making rational decision in management problems.

To expose the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific

judgments in the face of uncertainty and variation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course, the students will be able to

Apply the techniques for solving the transcendental equations, system of equations and eigenvalue

problem.

Construct an approximate polynomial to represent the given data and know to find the intermediate

values.

Obtain the differentiation and integration from the given data.

Justify about the behavior of the samples

Understand the statistical methods designed to contribute to the process of making scientific

judgments in the face of uncertainty and variation.

UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS 12

Iteration method - Regula-Falsi method – Newton-Raphson method – Gauss elimination method – Gauss

Jordan method – Matrix inversion by Gauss Jordan method - Gauss-Seidel method – Eigenvalues of a matrix

by Power method and Gauss-Jacobi method

UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATIONS 12

Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation – Gauss forward and backward difference

44

interpolation –Newton’s divided difference interpolation – Lagrange’s interpolation– Cubic spline interpolation.

UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 12

Approximation of derivatives using Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation, Newton’s divided

difference interpolation and Lagrange’s interpolation – Numerical integration using Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s

1/3 and 3/8 rule – Gaussian two point and three point quadrature formula.

UNIT IV TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12

Sampling distributions – Type I and Type II errors -One sample and two sample tests for means and

proportions of large samples (z-test) - One sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test) -

F-test for two sample standard deviations - Chi-square distribution - Tests for independence of attributes and

goodness of fit.

UNIT V DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12

Analysis of variance – One way classification – Completely Randomized Design (CRD) - Two way

classification – Randomized Block Design (RBD) - Latin square Design.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, Khanna Publishers,

New Delhi, 9th Edition, 2010 (7th Reprint 2012).

3. R.A. Johnson and C.B. Gupta, “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson

Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sankar Rao.K, “Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India

Private, New Delhi, 2009.

2. P.Kandasamy,K.Thilagavathy and K.Gunavathy, “NumericalMethods”, S. Chand Co. Ltd., New Delhi,

3rd Edition, 2010.

3. Walpole, R. E., Myers, R. H. Myers R. S. L. and Ye. K, “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and

Scientists”, 8th Edition, Pearsons Education, Delhi, 2007.

4. Lipschutz. S and Schiller. J, “Schaum’s outlines - Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1st Edition, 2011.

5. Gupta, S.C, and Kapur, V.K., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan hand, New Delhi,

Reprint 2014.

15ME401 : THERMAL ENGINEERING L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the student understand the big picture of applied thermodynamics through topics such as

Power cycles, IC Engines, Steam nozzles, air compressors and Refrigeration and Air Conditioning.

This subject enables the students to understand the principle of operation, construction and control of

several thermal equipments which find wide applications in a variety of fields like power generation,

automobile industry, process industries, food preservation and human comfort.

It provides the fundamentals for Power plant Engineering, Automobile Engineering, Turbo machinery,

Advanced IC engine design and Refrigeration & Air conditioning.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

45

Upon completion of the course students will

Able to do thermodynamic analysis of cycles.

Understand the construction, operation and performance of different IC engines.

Analyse and design different steam nozzles.

Analyse and design different reciprocating air compressors.

Analyse and design different RAC systems.

UNIT I POWER CYCLES AND IC ENGINES 15

Otto, Diesel and Dual cycles, mean effective pressure, air standard efficiency – Comparison of efficiencies,

Theoretical and Actual PV diagrams.

Classification of internal combustion engines, Components and their function - Comparison of two stroke and

four stroke engines and petrol and diesel engines - valve timing diagram and port timing diagram-,

performance calculations - methods of calculating friction power, Morse test, heat balance test.

UNIT II STEAM NOZZLES 9

Flow of steam through nozzles, shapes of nozzles, effect of friction, critical pressure ratio, supersaturated flow.

UNIT III RECIPROCATING AIR COMPRESSORS 11

Classification and working principle, work of compression with and without clearance, Volumetric efficiency,

Isothermal efficiency and Isentropic efficiency, Multistage air compressor and intercooling –work of multistage

air compressor.

UNIT IV REFRIGERATION 12

Vapour compression refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub cooling – Performance calculations, Principle and

working of Ammonia–Water vapour absorption refrigeration system (Description only), Comparison between

vapour compression and absorption systems, Alternate refrigerants.

UNIT V APPLIED PSYCHROMETRY AND AIR CONDITIONING 13

Applied Psychrometry: Sensible and latent heat exchange, effectiveness, different psychrometric processes,

adiabatic mixing.

Comfort air conditioning: Requirements, GSHF, RSHF - Simple designs of air conditioning system.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Domkundwar. A.V, “A course in thermal engineering”, Dhanpat

Rai & Sons, 2015.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rajput.R.K,”Thermal Engineering”,S.Chand Publishers, 2010.

2. Mahesh.M.Rathore,“Thermal Engineering”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd.,2015.

3. Sarkar.B.K, “Thermal Engineering”,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2011.

4. Arora.C.P, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning,” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2012.

15ME402 : KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concept of machines, mechanisms and related terminologies.

To analyze a mechanism for displacement, velocity and acceleration at any point in a moving link.

To understand the theory of gears, gear trains and cams.

To understand the role of friction in drives and brakes.

46

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the basic concepts of Mechanisms, Machines and their relative motions, then apply it to

appropriate environments.

Carry out kinematic analysis (Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration) of simple mechanisms (Single

slider Crank Mechanism and four bar Mechanisms) by graphical and analytical method.

Construct & Design different CAM profiles for given conditions using graphical & Theoretical

methods.

Understand basic terminologies and apply laws and principles of gears and gear trains.

Acquire knowledge of friction in various mechanical components and apply it in different situations.

UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANISMS 7

Definitions – Link, Kinematic pair, Kinematic chain, Mechanism, and Machine. - Degree of Freedom – Mobility

- Kutzbach criterion (Gruebler’s equation) - Grashoff's law - Kinematic Inversions of four-bar chain and slider

crank chain - Mechanical Advantage- Transmission angle.

Description of common Mechanisms - Offset slider mechanism as quick return mechanisms, Pantograph,

Straight line generators (Peaucellier and Watt mechanisms), Steering gear for automobile, Hooke’s joint,

Toggle mechanism, Ratchets and escapements - Indexing Mechanisms.

UNIT II VELOCITY & ACCLERATION ANALYSIS 10

Analysis of simple mechanisms (Single slider crank mechanism and four bar mechanism) - Graphical

Methods for displacement, velocity and acceleration: Shaping machine mechanism - Coincident points –

Coriolis acceleration – concepts and applications - Instantaneous Centre & Kennedy’s theorem (Theory only)

- Analytical method of analysis of slider crank mechanism and four bar mechanism. Approximate analytical

expression for displacement, velocity and acceleration of piston of reciprocating engine mechanism.

UNIT III KINEMATICS OF CAMS 8

Classifications - Cam Nomenclature –Types of follower-Displacement diagrams - Parabolic, Simple harmonic

and cycloidal motions – Graphical construction of displacement diagrams and layout of plate Cam profiles –

Pressure angle - Circular arc with Flat faced follower - Tangent cams with Roller Follower

UNIT IV GEARS 10

Classification of gears – Gear tooth terminology - Characteristics of Involute action - Fundamental Law of

toothed gearing and involute gearing – Length of path of contact and contact ratio - Interference and

undercutting - Gear trains – Simple, compound and epicyclic gear trains - Differentials.

UNIT V FRICTION 10

Dry friction – Friction in power screws – Self-locking- Pivot, collar and conical bearings - Plate and Conical

clutches - Belt and rope drives - Block brakes – Single – Pivoted - Band brake.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ambekar A. G., “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Uicker J.J., Pennock G.R., Shigley J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms” (Indian Edition),

Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 2009.

3. Khurmi R.S & Gupta J.K, “Theory of Machines”, S.Chand Publications, 2015.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Thomas Bevan, “Theory of Machines”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 3rd Edition, 2005.

47

2. Ramamurti, V., “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, 3rd Edition, Narosa Publishing House,

2011.

3. Ghosh A and A.K.Mallick, “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines”, East West Press, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition, 2006.

4. Rao J.S and Dukkipati R.V, “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, New Age International Publishers,

2006.

5. John Hannah and Stephens R.C, “Mechanics of Machines”, Viva Low-Prices Student Edition, 2006.

BIS CODES OF PRACTICE

1. IS 2458: 2001, Vocabulary of Gear Terms – Definitions Related to Geometry.

2. IS 2467: 2002 (ISO 701: 1998), International Gear Notation – Symbols for Geometric Data.

3. IS 5267: 2002 Vocabulary of Gear Terms – Definitions Related to Worm Gear Geometry.

4. IS 5037: Part 1: 2004, Straight Bevel Gears for General Engineering and Heavy Engineering -

Part 1: Basic Rack.

5. IS 5037: Part 2: 2004, Straight Bevel Gears for General Engineering and Heavy Engineering -

Part 2: Module and Diametral Pitches.

WEB REFERENCE:

1. http://www.howstuffworks.com

15ME403 : DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To familiarize the steady stresses and variable stresses in machine members.

To understand the various stages involved in design of shafts and couplings

To learn about design of temporary and permanent joints

To impart strong design knowledge about energy storing elements.

To acquire knowledge about the bearings and engine components design.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Familiarize the various steps involved in the design process, steady stresses and variable stresses in

machine members.

Understand the procedures involved in the design of shafts keys, splines and couplings.

Gain the design knowledge about threaded fasteners, Knuckle joints, Cotter joints, welded and

riveted joints.

Acquire knowledge about the design of springs and flywheels and apply it in practical problems.

Effectively analyze the design of bearings and engine components.

UNIT I STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE

MEMBERS 9

Introduction to the design process - factor influencing machine design, selection of materials based on

mechanical properties – Preferred numbers, fits, Limits and tolerances – Direct, Bending and torsional stress

equations – Impact and shock loading – calculation of principle stresses for various load combinations,

eccentric loading – Design of curved beams – crane hook and ‘C’ frame - Factor of safety - theories of failure –

stress concentration – design for variable loading – Soderberg, Goodman and Gerber relations - Design for

finite and infinite life under variable loading.

48

UNIT II DESIGN OF SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 9

Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed – Design of keys, key ways and

splines - Design of rigid and flexible couplings.

UNIT III DESIGN OF TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS 9

Threaded fasteners - Design of bolted joints including eccentric loading, Knuckle joints, Cotter joints – Design

of welded joints, riveted joints for pressure vessel.

UNIT IV DESIGN OF ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS 9

Design of various types of springs, helical springs, leaf springs, torsion springs, Belleville springs - Design of

flywheels considering stresses in rims and arms for engines and punching machines.

UNIT V DESIGN OF BEARINGS AND ENGINE COMPONENTS 9

Sliding contact and rolling contact bearings – Design of hydrodynamic journal bearings, McKee's Eqn.

Sommerfeld Number, Raimondi & Boyd graphs, – Selection of Rolling Contact bearings – Design of

crankshafts - Design of Connecting Rod.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Note: (Use of P S G Design Data Book is permitted in the University examination)

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Shigley J.E and Mischke C. R., “Mechanical Engineering Design”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,

2008.

2. Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sundararajamoorthy T.V, Shanmugam .N, "Machine Design", Anuradha Publications, Chennai, 2007.

2. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, 2004.

3. Ugural A.C, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approach”, McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2003.

4. Spotts M.F., Shoup T.E “Design and Machine Elements” Pearson Education, 2004.

5. PSG College of Technology, “Design Data”, Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2012.

STANDARDS:

1. IS 10260: Part 1: 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 1: Construction.

2. IS 10260: Part 1: 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 2: Friction and

Wear.

3. IS 10260: Part 1: 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 3: Lubrication.

15ME404 : ENGINEERING METALLURGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge on the phase structure of metals/alloys.

To study the heat treatment process employed for various materials.

To learn the applications of metals and non-metallic materials.

To impart knowledge on mechanical testing tools for engineering materials.

To study the non-destructive testing methods.

49

COURSE OUTCOMES:

By studying this subject, the students are able to

Know the phase reactions of various metals and alloys.

Have a great exposure in heat treatment process and know their purpose in engineering applications.

Have the knowledge in the classification, properties and applications for various ferrous and non-

ferrous materials.

Identify the various mechanical properties for the above said materials using sophisticated facilities.

Able to do non-destructive testing for materials.

UNIT I BINARY PHASE DIAGRAM 9

Solid solutions: Substitutional and interstitial –Compound – Classification of Phase diagram - Phase reactions

with an example: Isomorphous, eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, and peritectoid, Iron – Iron carbide diagram.

UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT PROCESSES 9

Full, stress relief, recrystallisation and spheroidizing annealing – normalising, hardening and tempering of steel

– phase transformation - Isothermal transformation (TTT) diagrams – cooling curves - CCR - Hardenability,

Jominy end quench test - Austempering, martempering – case hardening - carburising, nitriding, cyaniding,

carbonitriding, flame and induction hardening - precipitation hardening.

UNIT III FERROUS AND NON FERROUS METALS 9

Classification, properties, microstructure, processing and applications of plain carbon steels & cast iron – effect

of alloying elements on steel (Mn, Si, Cr, Mo, V, Ti & W) - stainless and tool steels - HSLA &maraging steels -

Copper and its alloys - Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and its alloys – Bearing alloys.

UNIT IV MECHANICAL TESTING AND CHARACTERISATION 9

Mechanical properties - stress strain curve for ferrous and non-ferrous alloys - Mechanism of plastic

deformation, slip and twinning – types of fracture – Griffith theory - testing of materials under tension,

compression and shear loads – Hardness tests (Brinell, Rockwell and Vickers) - Impact test (Izod and Charpy)

- Fatigue and creep tests - fracture toughness tests - characterisation techniques: Optical, SEM, XRD.

UNIT V NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING 9

Basic principles and testing method for Radiographic testing - Ultrasonic testing - Magnetic particle inspection -

Liquid penetrant inspections - Eddy current testing - acoustic emission testing – applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sydney H. Avner “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2nd Edition,

2007.

2. Selvakumar N, “Engineering Metallurgy and Nanotechnology” Scitech, Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd.,

2016.

3. Kenneth G.Budinski and Michael K.Budinski, “Engineering Materials: Properties and Selection”

Prentice-Hall, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raghavan.V,“Materials Science and Engineering”, Prentice-Hall, 6th Edition, 2015.

2. William D Callister and David G. Rethwisch, “Material Science and Engineering: An Introduction”,

John Wiley, 8th Edition, 2009.

3. George E. Dieter, Jr, “Mechanical Metallurgy”, CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform, 2014.

4. Jindal. U.C “Material science and metallurgy”, Pearson New Delhi, 2013.

50

15ME405 : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY-II L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concept and mechanics of metal cutting, working of standard machine tools such

as lathe, shaping and allied machines, milling, drilling and allied machines, grinding and allied

machines and broaching.

To understand the basic concepts of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine tool and CNC

programming.

To gain knowledge of Surface Finishing Processes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course students will be able to

Gain an understanding and appreciation of breadth and depth of the field of manufacturing.

Understand the concepts and mechanics of metal cutting, working of standard machine tools such as

lathe, shaping and allied machines, milling, drilling and allied machines, grinding and allied machines

and broaching.

To become familiar with Surface Finishing Processes.

Understand the basic concepts of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine tool and CNC

programming.

UNIT I THEORY OF METAL CUTTING 9

Introduction: Material removal processes, types of machine tools – Theory of metal cutting: Mechanics of metal

cutting, chip formation, orthogonal cutting, cutting tool materials, tool wear, tool life, surface finish, cutting fluids

- Influence of tool angles - Influence of tool height.

UNIT II CENTRE LATHE AND SPECIAL PURPOSE LATHES 9

Centre lathe, constructional features, cutting tool geometry, various operations, taper turning methods, thread

cutting methods, special attachments, machining time and power estimation. Capstan and turret lathes –

Automats – Single spindle, Swiss type, multi spindle - Turret Indexing mechanism, Bar feed mechanism.

UNIT III MACHINE TOOLS FOR NON-CIRCULAR COMPONENTS AND HOLE

MAKING.

9

Reciprocating machine tools: shaper, planer, slotter. (Construction details only).

Milling machines: Horizontal milling m/c and Vertical milling m/c: specifications, parts, milling cutters, work

holding devices, operations.

Hole making: Drilling, reaming, boring, tapping - sawing machine: hack saw, band saw, circular saw; broaching

machines: Push, pull, surface and continuous broaching machines– broach construction.

UNIT IV GEAR MANUFACTURING AND SURFACE FINISHING PROCESSES 9

Gear manufacturing processes: Extrusion, Stamping and Powder metallurgy. Gear machining: Forming,

Geargenerating process – Gear shaping, Gear hobbing.

Surface finishing- Abrasive processes: Types of grinding process – cylindrical grinding, surface grinding,

centre less grinding, –grinding wheel specifications and selection. Fine finishing processes – Honing, lapping,

super finishing, polishing and buffing, power brushing-Tumbling - - Metal spraying – Metallization.

UNIT V CNC MACHINE TOOLS AND PART PROGRAMMING 9

Numerical control (NC) machine tools.CNC: types, constructional details, special features – Design

51

considerations of CNC machines for improving machining accuracy – Structural members – Slide ways –

Linear bearings – Ball screws – Spindle drives and feed drives. Part programming fundamentals – Manual

programming – Computer aided part programming - APP: Post processors. APT programming – Motion

statements, additional APT statements.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hajra Choudry, “Elements of Workshop Technology: Machine Tools (Volume - 2)”, Media Promoters.

2010.

2. HMT – “Production Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rao, P.N. “Manufacturing Technology”, Metal Cutting and Machine Tools, 3rd edition Tata McGraw–

Hill, New Delhi, 2013.

2. P.C. Sharma, “A text book of Production Technology (Manufacturing Processes) 7th Edition”, S.

Chand and Company, 2008.

3. Shrawat N.S. and Narang J.S, ‘CNC Machines’, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2002.

4. P.N.Rao, ‘CAD/CAM Principles and Applications’, TATA Mc Craw Hill, 3rd edition, 2007.

5. Milton C.Shaw, ‘Metal Cutting Principles’, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2005.

6. Rajput R.K, ‘A text book of Manufacturing Technology’, Lakshmi Publications, 2007.

7. Philip F.Ostwald and Jairo Munoz, ‘Manufacturing Processes and systems’, John Wiley and Sons, 9th

Edition, 2008.

8. Mikell P.Groover, ‘Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing, Materials, Processes and Systems’, John

Wiley and Sons, 3rd

Edition, 2009.

9. Chapman. W. A. J and S.J. Martin, Workshop Technology, Part III, Viva Books Private Ltd., 1998.

10. Serope kalpakjian, Steven R Schmid, ‘Manufacturing Engineering and Technology’, Pearson

Education, 6th edition, 2015.

WEB REFERENCE:

http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/112105126/

15ME451 : THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To give practical hands on exposure to students in the equipment involved in measuring Thermal

conductivity.

To have the knowledge in measuring Stefan Boltzmann constant and emissivity values.

To have exposure to parallel flow and counter flow heat exchangers.

To know about the measurement of heat transfer coefficient and temperature distribution in free and

forced convection.

To give practical hands on exposure to students in the specimen preparation, microscopic

examination and hardness testing of various metallographic specimens.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Be able to measure the values of Thermal conductivity, Emissivity and Stefan Boltzmann constant.

Have a good understanding about the working of parallel and counter flow heat exchangers.

Be able to measure the heat transfer coefficient and temperature distribution in forced and free

convection.

52

Obtain exposure to the specimen preparation, microscopic examination and hardness testing of

various metallographic specimens.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

I.C ENGINE LAB AND FUELS LAB 20

1. Valve Timing and Port Timing Diagrams.

2. Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine.

3. Heat Balance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine.

4. Morse Test on Multi cylinder Petrol Engine.

5. Retardation Test to find Frictional Power of a Diesel Engine.

6. Determination of Viscosity – Red Wood Viscometer.

7. Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point.

8. Emission test on Diesel Engine exhaust.

9. Determination of Calorific value of Fuels using Bomb calorimeter.

10. Performance test on Variable Compression Ratio Engine.

STEAM LAB 15

1. Study of Steam Generators and Turbines.

2. Performance and Energy Balance Test on a Steam Generator.

3. Performance and Energy Balance Test on Steam Turbine.

REFRIGERATION AND AIRCONDITIONING 10

1. Determination of COP of a refrigeration system.

2. Experiments on air-conditioning system.

3. Performance test on single/two stage reciprocating air compressor.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS

(For a batch of 30 students)

1. I.C Engine – 2 stroke and 4 stroke model 1 set.

2. Red Wood Viscometer 1 No.

3. Apparatus for Flash and Fire Point 1 No.

4. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with mechanical loading 1 No.

5. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with hydraulic loading 1 No.

6. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with electrical loading 1 No.

7. Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.

8. Single cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.

9. Data Acquisition system with any one of the

above engine 1 No.

10. Gas Analyser 1 No.

11. Steam Boiler with turbine setup 1 No.

12. Single/two stage reciprocating air compressor 1 No.

13. Refrigeration test rig 1 No.

14. Air-conditioning test rig 1 No.

15. Bomb Calorimeter 1 No.

16. Petrol Engine for Variable compression Ratio test 1 No.

15ME452 : MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY- II L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To give hands on exposure, to students in various metal cutting operations that are done using

conventional machine tools, such as shaper, planer, drilling machine, milling machine, grinding

53

machine, capstan and turret lathe.

To know how to measure engineering components. To gain knowledge in assembly of machined

components with different fits.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course

Students are capable of measuring shear angle in orthogonal machining, cutting force during turning

operation.

Students know how to make dovetail, internal keyway, and perform tapping, reaming, and gear

milling operations.

Students develop skill in surface grinding, and cylindrical grinding of components.

EXERCISES:

1. Studies on the components and working principle of special machines.

2. To make a cube from cylinder using shaper.

3. To make a dove tail or V-Block using shaper.

4. To make internal keyway using slotting/milling machine.

5. To make a cube from cylinder using planer.

6. To perform drilling, reaming and tapping operations. .

7. To make a spur gear using milling machine.

8. To make a keyway using end milling operation.

9. To do cylindrical grinding operation.

10. To make simple component that involves i facing, turning and eccentric turning operations using

lathe.

11. To make a bush using lathe.

12. To make a stud (multi start) using lathe.

13. To make a collar using capstan lathe.

14. To make a spur gear using gear hobbing machine.

15. Tool Wear Studies

16. Determination of shear angle during orthogonal cutting operations

17. Measurement of cutting forces during turning operation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS : (For a batch of 30 students)

1. Centre lathe - 10 Nos.

2. Turret and Capstan lathe - 1 No.

3. Horizontal milling machine - 1 No.

4. Vertical milling machine - 1 No.

5. Surface grinding machine - 1 No.

6. Cylindrical grinding machine - 1 No.

7. Shaper - 2 Nos.

8. Slotter - 1 No.

9. Planer - 1 No.

10. Radial drilling machine - 1 No.

11. Tool dynamometer - 1 No.

12. Gear hobbing machine - 1 No

13. Tool makers microscope - 1 No.

54

15HS451 : PRESENTATION SKILLS LABORATORY

(COMMON TO IT / ECE / MECH / BIO-TECH)

L T P C

0 0 2 1

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To hone the students’ proficiency in speaking skills

To enhance their pronouncing skills

To help the students acquire presentation skills

To enable the students communicate effectively

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Students of Engineering and Technology will be able to

recognize phonemes

improve pronunciation

acquire all strategies of presentation skills

develop interpersonal skills

UNIT I PHONETIC PRACTICE 4

English phonemes: Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants - Word Stress, phoneme recognizing practice

UNIT II LISTENING COMPREHENSION 3

Documentaries, Educational video clips, Oration of Great leaders, Radio & TV news, Listening to

conversations, Telephone etiquette, Reviewing news from Media.

UNIT III LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS 3

Giving reasons, talking about future plans, Comparing & Contrasting, Making suggestions

UNIT IV PRESENTATION STRATEGIES 5

Presentation Strategies Defining Purpose; Audience & Locale; Organizing Contents; Preparing Outline; Audio-

visual Aids; Nuances of Delivery; Body Language; Proximics; Setting Nuances of Voice Dynamics; Time-

Dimension.

UNIT V PRESENTATION AND APPRAISAL SESSIONS 10

Importance of Journal articles – elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results,

discussion, conclusion, appendices, Bibliography and references), Preparation of scholarly papers based on

the internet Resources, Oral Presentations & Reviews.

TOTAL: 30 Periods

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mandel, Steve. Effective Presentation Skills. New Delhi: Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2004.

2. Gopalaswamy, Ramesh & Ramesh Mahadevan. ACE of Soft Skills. New Delhi: Pearson, 2010.

3. Gimson, AC. An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English. London: ELBS, 1989.

4. Oconnor, JD. Better English Pronunciation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1967.

15ME501 : HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

This course is intended to gather adequate knowledge of various modes of heat transfer that occurs

in any physical systems.

To identify the parameters that characterizes these problems and the methods to solve it in various

55

practical systems.

To analyze complex heat and mass transfer problems in any engineering systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


To perform the influence of conduction heat transfer and thermal analysis based on conduction in

various mechanical systems.

Demonstrate and have the ability to recognize the characteristics of convection heat transfer in

external and internal flow.

To analyze the effect of different boiling regimes and condensation and also through the proper use

of modeling can able to choose different heat exchangers for specific applications.

To perform the impact of radiation heat transfer in different systems that involves heat transfer.

Gather adequate knowledge regarding the various modes of mass transfer and its analogy with heat

transfer.

UNIT I CONDUCTION 14

Basic Concepts – Mechanism of Heat Transfer – Conduction, Convection and Radiation – Fourier Law of

Conduction - General Differential equation of Heat Conduction –– Cartesian and Cylindrical Coordinates

– One Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction – Conduction through Plane Wall, Cylinders and

Spherical systems – Composite Systems – Conduction with Internal Heat Generation – Extended Surfaces –

Unsteady Heat Conduction – Lumped Analysis – Use of Heislers Chart.

UNIT II CONVECTION 13

Basic Concepts –Heat Transfer Coefficients – Boundary Layer Concept – Types of Convection – Forced

Convection – Dimensional Analysis – External Flow – Flow over Plates, Cylinders and Spheres – Internal

Flow – Laminar and Turbulent Flow – Combined Laminar and Turbulent flow over Bank of tubes – Free

Convection in Vertical Plate, Horizontal Plate, Inclined Plate, Cylinders and Spheres - Dimensional Analysis.

UNIT III PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT EXCHANGERS 12

Nusselts theory of condensation-pool boiling, flow boiling, correlations in boiling and condensation. Types of

Heat Exchangers – Heat Exchanger Analysis – LMTD Method and NTU - Effectiveness – Overall Heat

Transfer Coefficient – Fouling Factors.

UNIT IV RADIATION 11

Basic Concepts, Laws of Radiation – Stefan Boltzmann Law, Kirchhoff’s Law –Black Body Radiation –Grey

body radiation -Shape Factor Algebra – Electrical Analogy – Radiation Shields –Introduction to Gas Radiation,

Greenhouse effect, Solar Radiation (elementary treatment only).

UNIT V MASS TRANSFER 10

Basic Concepts – Diffusion Mass Transfer – Fick’s Law of Diffusion – Steady state Molecular Diffusion –

Convective Mass Transfer – Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer Analogy – Convective Mass Transfer

Correlations.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sachdeva R C, “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer” New Age International, 4th

Edition (Reprint Nov, 2014).

2. Incropera, Frank P.; DeWitt, David P.; Bergman, Theodore L; Lavine, Adrienne S., “Fundamentals of

Heat and Mass Transfer”, John Wiley and Sons, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Yadav R “Heat and Mass Transfer” Central Publishing House - Allahabad, 1992.

2. Ozisik M “Heat Transfer: A Basic Approach”,McGraw-Hill,1984.

3. Nag P.K, “Heat Transfer”, 3rd Edition Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011.

56

4. Holman J.P “Heat Transfer” 10th Edition Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.

5. Kothandaraman.C.P, “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer” 4th Edition New Age International,

New Delhi, (Reprint 2015).

6. Cengel, Y.A., Heat Transfer - A Practical Approach, 3rd Edition McGraw-Hill, 2002.

7. G.D.Rai, “Solar Energy utilization” Khanna Publishers, NewDelhi,2004

WEB REFERENCES:

NPTEL lecture videos

15ME502 : DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the method of static force analysis and dynamic force analysis of mechanisms.

To study the undesirable effects of unbalances in rotors and engines.

To understand the concept of vibratory systems and their analysis.

To understand the principles of governors and gyroscopes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand and conduct static and dynamic force analysis of Mechanisms.

Apply the concept of balancing and use it for reducing the unbalanced forces in rotating masses and

reciprocating engines under operating conditions exposure to IS standards.

Acquire knowledge on types of vibrations in different systems.

Apply different damping methods to minimize vibrations using IS standards.

Understand, apply and analyze the control mechanisms in Governors and Gyroscopes.

UNIT I FORCE ANALYSIS AND FLYWHEELS 9

Static force analysis of mechanisms – D’ Alemberts principle - Inertia force and Inertia torque – Dynamic force

analysis - Dynamic Analysis in Reciprocating Engines – Gas Forces - Equivalent masses - Bearing loads -

Crank shaft Torque – Engine shaking Forces - Turning moment diagrams - Flywheels of engines –

Fluctuation of speed – Maximum fluctuation of Energy – Flywheel in punching press (Elementary level).

UNIT II BALANCING 9

Static and dynamic balancing - Balancing of rotating masses - Balancing of Reciprocating masses -

Single cylinder Engine – Primary and secondary unbalanced forces - Partial Balancing of uncoupled two &

three cylinder locomotives- Balancing of Multi-cylinder Engines – In line engine - Firing order

UNIT III FREE VIBRATION 9

Basic features of vibratory systems - Basic elements and lumping of parameters - Degrees of freedom -

Single degree of freedom - Free vibration - Equations of motion - natural frequency - Types of Damping -

Damped free vibration - Damping Factor – Logarithmic Decrement– Whirling of shafts and critical speed -

Torsional systems; Natural frequency of two and three rotor systems.

UNIT IV FORCED VIBRATION 9

Response to periodic forcing - Harmonic Forcing – Forced vibration caused by unbalance - Support

motion – Force transmissibility and amplitude transmissibility - Vibration isolation.

UNIT V MECHANISMS FOR CONTROL 9

57

Governors - Types - Centrifugal governors - Gravity controlled (Porter & Proell) and spring controlled

centrifugal governors (Hartnell & Hartung) – Characteristics - Effect of friction - Controlling Force – Quality of

governors – effect of friction.

Gyroscopes - Gyroscopic couple - Gyroscopic stabilization - Gyroscopic effects in Automobiles and

ships - Gyroscopic effect on Aeroplanes, naval ship, stability of two wheeled and Four wheeled vehicles.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ambekar A. G., "Mechanism and Machine Theory", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Khurmi R.S & Gupta J.K, "Theory of Machines" S.Chand Publications, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", CBS Publishers and Distributors, 3rd Edition, 2005.

2. Ghosh A. and Mallick A.K., "Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", East West Press, New Delhi, 3rd

Edition, 2006.

3. Shigley J.E. and Uicker J.J., "Theory of Machines and Mechanisms", McGraw-Hill, Inc., 3rd Edition,

2009.

4. Rao J.S. and Dukkipati R.V., "Mechanism and Machine Theory ", New Age International Publishers,

2006.

5. John Hannah and Stephens R.C., "Mechanics of Machines", Viva low-Priced Student Edition, 2006.

6. Sadhu Singh "Theory of Machines" Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2012.

STANDARDS:

1. IS 11717: 2000, Vocabulary on Vibration and Shock.

2. IS 13301: 1992, Guidelines for vibration isolation for machine foundations.

3. IS 10000: Part 7: 1980, Methods of tests for internal combustion engines: Part 7 Governing tests for

constant speed engines and selection of engines for use with electrical generators.

4. IS 13274: 1992, Mechanical vibration - Balancing – Vocabulary.

5. IS13277: 1992, Balancing machine - Description and evaluation.

15ME503 : DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C

3 2 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of power Transmission

components.

To understand the standard procedure available for Design of Transmission sip terms.

To learn to use standard data and catalogues.

To learn to use catalogues and to design standard transmission systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course the students will be able:

To remember the standard procedure available for design of transmission sip terms.

To understand the principles and procedure for the design of power transmission components.

To learn to use standard data and catalogues.

An ability to analyze, design, and/or select a variety of machine components such as gears, gear

boxes, belt drives, cam, brakes and clutches.

To develop a working knowledge in the use of various standard procedures and catalog information

in the identification and selection of engineering materials.

58

UNIT I DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS IN TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9

Selection of V belts and pulleys – selection of flat belts and pulleys – Selection of wire ropes and pulleys –

Selection of transmission chains and sprockets.

UNIT II SPUR AND HELICAL GEARS 9

Gear terminology - speed ratios and number of teeth-force analysis -Tooth stresses - dynamic effects – fatigue

strength - Factor of safety - Gear materials – Design of straight tooth spur & helical gears based on strength

and wear considerations – Pressure angle in the normal and transverse plane- Equivalent number of teeth-

forces for helical gears.-Crossed helical and Herringbone gear - Cross helical, Terminology-helix angles-

Design of the pair of cross helical gears.

UNIT III BEVEL AND WORM GEARS 9

Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth. Design of pair

of straight bevel gears.

Worm Gear: Merits and demerits- terminology, materials-forces and stresses, efficiency, Design of the worm

gear pair-Heat generation in worm gear drive.

UNIT IV DESIGN OF GEAR BOXES 9

Design of multi - speed gearbox - Standard step ratio - Preparation of ray diagram and kinematic arrangement

- Design of Speed reducer box..

UNIT V DESIGN OF CAM, CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 9

Cam Design: Types-pressure angle and under cutting - base circle determination-forces and surface stresses.

Design of plate clutches – axial clutches-cone clutches-internal expanding rim clutches.

Design of Block, Band, internal and external shoe brakes.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Shigley J.E and Mischke C. R “Mechanical Engineering Design” (English) 9th Edition, Tata McGraw-

Hill, 2011.

2. Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Maitra G.M., Prasad L.V., “Hand book of Mechanical Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition,

2009.

2. Prabhu. T.J., “Design of Transmission Elements”, Mani Offset, Chennai, 2000.

3. Hamrock B.J., Jacobson B., Schmid S.R., “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”, 3rd Edition,

McGraw-Hill Book Co., 2006.

4. Sundararajamoorthy T.V, Shanmugam .N, "Machine Design", Anuradha Publications, Chennai, 2007.

5. Ugural A.C, "Mechanical Design: An Integrated Approach", McGraw-Hill, 2004.

6. PSG College of Technology, “Design Data”, Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2012.

STANDARDS:

1. IS 4460: Parts 1 to 3: 1995, Gears – Spur and Helical Gears – Calculation of Load Capacity.

2. IS 7443: 2002, Methods of Load Rating of Worm Gears.

3. IS 15151: 2002, Belt Drives – Pulleys and V-Ribbed belts for Industrial applications – PH, PJ, PK, Pl

and PM Profiles: Dimensions.

59

4. IS 2122: Part 1: 1973, Code of practice for selection, storage, installation and maintenance of belting

for power transmission: Part 1 Flat Belt Drives.

5. IS 2122: Part 2: 1991, Code of practice for selection, storage, installation and maintenance of belting

for power transmission: Part 2 V-Belt Drives.

15ME551 : HEAT TRANSFER AND METALLURGY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To give hands on exposure to students to measure Thermal conductivity.

To have the knowledge in measuring Stefan Boltzmann constant and emissivity values.

To have exposure to parallel flow and counter flow heat exchangers.

To know about the measurement of heat transfer coefficient and temperature distribution in free and

forced convection.

To give practical exposure to students in the specimen preparation, microscopic examination and

hardness testing of various metallographic specimens.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Be able to measure the values of Thermal conductivity, Emissivity and Stefan Boltzmann constant.

Have a good understanding about the working of parallel and counter flow heat exchangers.

Be able to measure the heat transfer coefficient and temperature distribution in forced and free

convection.

Obtain exposure to the specimen preparation, microscopic examination and hardness testing of

various metallographic specimens.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 30

Thermal conductivity measurement by guarded plate method.

Thermal conductivity of pipe insulation using lagged pipe apparatus.

Natural convection heat transfer from a vertical cylinder.

Forced convection inside tube.

Heat transfer from pin-fin (natural & forced convection modes).

Determination of Stefan-Boltzmann constant.

Determination of emissivity of a grey surface.

Effectiveness of Parallel/counter flow heat exchanger.

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS

Guarded plate apparatus – 1 No.

Lagged pipe apparatus – 1 No.

Natural convection-vertical cylinder apparatus – 1 No.

Forced convection inside tube apparatus – 1 No.

Pin-fin apparatus – 1 No.

Stefan-Boltzmann apparatus – 1 No.

Emissivity measurement apparatus – 1 No.

Parallel/counter flow heat exchanger apparatus – 1 No.

METALLURGY 15

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Specimen preparation for metallographic studies.

Microscopic examination of un-etched and etched FG, SG iron.

Microscopic examination of plain carbon steel in un-etched and etched state.

Microscopic examination of annealed, normalised, hardened steel.

60

Jomney end quench test.

Comparison of hardness by executing the heat treatment of

Annealed/ Normalised specimen.

Quenched specimen

Quenched and tempered specimen - with Unhardened specimen

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS

Metallurgical Microscope - 3 No’s

Muffle Furnace (900ºC) -1 No.

Jomney end quench apparatus -1 No.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

15ME552 : CAD AND CAM LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To be able to understand and handle design problems in a systematic manner.

To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modeling software systems.

To be able to apply CAD in real life applications.

To understand the concepts G and M codes and manual part programming.

To expose students to modern control systems (Fanuc, Siemens etc.).

To know the application of various CNC machines.

To expose students to modern CNC application machines EDM, EDM wire cut and RapidPrototyping.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Have a fundamental knowledge of Computer Numerical Control machines.

Apply the concepts and commands of a computer-aided design system.

Able to combine the computer-aided design system with language acceptable to the numerical control

machines in designing, and producing usable parts.

Create accurate and precise geometry of complex engineering systems and use the geometric

models in different engineering applications.

Compare the different types of modeling techniques and explain the central role solid models play in

the successful completion of CAD/CAM-based product development.

Use and assess state-of-the-art CAD/CAM codes efficiently, effectively and intelligently in advanced

engineering applications.

Develop algorithms for 2D and 3D geometric modeling.

Use current state-of-the-art CAD/CAM technology in research.

Extend CAD/CAM technology for research and development purposes.

Explain the basic concepts of CNC programming and machining.

UNIT I 3D GEOMETRIC MODELING 20

Creation of 3D Models - Wire Frame, Surface, Solid modeling Techniques Using CAD Packages – CSG, B-

Rep Approaches in Solid Modeling - Feature Based Modeling Technique – Assembly – Detailing - Exposure to

Industrial Components – Application of GD&T.

UNIT II MANUAL CNC PART PROGRAMMING 12

Manual CNC Part Programming.

Manual CNC Part Programming Using Standard G and M Codes - Tool Path Simulation – Exposure to Various

Standard Control Systems- Machining simple components by Using CNC machines.

61

UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED PART PROGRAMMING 10

CL Data Generation by Using CAM Software– Post Process Generation for Different Control System –

Machining of Computer Generated Part Program by Using Machining Center and Turning Center.

UNIT IV COMPUTER AIDED METROLOGY 3

Measurement of geometric elements in Coordinate Measuring Machine – Vision Measuring Machine – non

contact measurement of geometrical features (Demonstration only).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

HARDWARE

Computer Server

Computer nodes or systems (High end CPU with at least 1 GB main memory) networked to the

server

Laser Printer

Trainer CNC Lathe

Trainer CNC milling

SOFTWARE

CAD/CAM software (Pro-E or IDEAS or Unigraphics or CATIA or SOLIDWORKS)

CAM Software (CNC Programming and tool path simulation for FANUC /Sinumeric and Heiden

controller)

Licensed operating system

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rogers DF & Adams J A, “Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics”, McGraw-Hill, 1989.

2. Shah JJ &Mantyla M, “Parametric and feature-based CAD/CAM”, John Wiley & Sons, 1995.

3. Zeid I, “CAD/CAM Theory and Practice”, McGraw-Hill, 1991.

4. Hoschek J and Lasser D, “Fundamentals of Computer Aided Geometric Design”, A.K. Peters,

Wellesley, Massachusetts, 1993.

5. Lee K, “Principles of CAD/CAM/CAE”, Addison Wesley Longman, Reading Massachusettes, 1999.

15ME601 : FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide in depth knowledge in approximate methods in Structural mechanics problems.

To offer understanding of One Dimensional Finite Element Analysis with various types of Elements.

To get exposed to plane problems in Engineering Analysis including Two Dimensional Finite Element

Analysis.

To design and analyse any Engineering Component using FEA.

Review Topics: Matrix algebra, Deformable bodies, Structural Mechanics

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the basic fundamental equations of elasticity and solving linear system of equation.

Make familiar of basic approximate methods in Structural applications.

Understand the basic principle of Finite Element Analysis in 1D structural and thermal application.

Solve structural and non-structural problem using 2D FEM.

Equip them to effectively employ finite element method in order to simulate and launch a new

engineering component to the market.

62

UNIT I ELASTICITY 12

Introduction - Stress at a point - Stress Tensor - Elementary view- differential equations of equilibrium; Strain -

Displacement relation; Stress-Strain relationship in Two dimension and Three dimension- Solving linear

system of equations by Gaussian elimination method.- Numerical integration - Gaussian quadrature.

UNIT II APPROXIMATE METHODS 12

Solution to complex engineering problems - Exact solution - Approximate Solution - mathematical modelling -

differential forms of beams - Strain energy - principle of minimum total potential energy - Rayleigh Ritz

method - general weighted residual statement - Weighted residual Techniques - Method of Collocation,

Subdomain method, Method of least square, Galerkin’s method, Method of Moments- Comparison of

approximate solutions with exact solution.

UNIT III ONE DIMENSIONAL FEA 12

Introduction to FEM - engineering applications of FEA - Governing equation of FEM - Finite element modelling

- Global Coordinates; Local Coordinates - nodal approximation - Element connectivity - shapes functions for

various elements - Stiffness matrices and load vectors - global stiffness matrix - Boundary conditions -

Computation of deflection, strains and stresses for axial (bar) element; tapered bar element; spring element;

plane truss (spar) element; beam element - Thermal stress problem - Higher order elements - quadratic

element (Shape function expressions only) - One dimension heat transfer analysis - Composite wall.

UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL FEA 12

Introduction - Plane problems in elasticity - Plane Stress, Plane Strain and axi-symmetry - approximation of

geometry and field variable - natural coordinates and global coordinates - Constant Strain Triangular (CST)

element - Jacobian matrix - elasticity matrix - strain displacement matrix - element stiffness matrix - load

vectors - global stiffness matrix - Computation of deflection, strains and stresses for CST element subjected to

in plane load; surface traction - plane stress and plane strain problems - shape functions for CST - Thermal

stress problem in two dimension - Higher order elements - six-noded triangular element (Shape function

expressions only) - Two dimension heat transfer analysis - Axisymmetric formulation using triangular element -

Cylinder under internal pressure.

UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENT FORMULATION 12

Isoparametric formulation - Four node quadrilateral Element - Shape functions - Element stiffness matrix and

force vector - Eight node quadrilateral Element (Shape function expressions only).

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Chandrupatla T.R. and Belegundu A.D, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Pearson

Education, 4th Edition, 2012.

2. Raamachandran J, “Boundary and Finite Elements-Theory and problems”, Narosa Publishing House,

2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rao S.S, “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Pergammon Press, 1999.

2. Bhavikatti S.S, “Finite Element Analysis”, New Age International Publishers, 2011.

3. Seshu P, “Textbook of Finite Element Analysis”, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2013.

4. Logan D.L, “A First course in the Finite Element Method”, Thomson Learning, 3rd Edition, 2002.

5. Robert D Cook, David S and Malkucs Michael E Plesha, “Concepts and Applications of Finite

Element Analysis”, Wiley, 4th Edition, 2003.

6. Reddy J.N, “An Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw-Hill International Student Edition,

2005.

7. David V Hutton, “Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Int. Ed., 2004.

63

15ME602 : POWER PLANT TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the various components and operations of different types of power plants.

To study the applications of different types of power plants.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course

Various components and operations of different types of power plants will be understood.

The applications of different types of power plants will be studied

UNIT I STEAM BOILERS AND STEAM POWER CYCLES 9

Comparison and selection of sites- Fuels and combustion, High pressure and Super Critical Boilers – Fluidised

Bed Boilers –Overview of the Indian power sector – load curves for various applications.

Steam power cycles – Simple Rankine Cycle, Reheat and Regenerative, Binary vapour cycle.

UNIT II STEAM TURBINESAND POWER PLANT 11

Selection of steam turbine- Working of Impulse and Reaction steam turbines, compounding, velocity diagrams

for simple and multi-stage turbines, efficiencies.

Steam power plant: Layout - components - working of Steam power plants, Fuel Coal and ash handling,

Combustion Equipment for burning coal, Mechanical Stokers. Pulveriser, Electrostatic Precipitator, Draught-

Different Types - Surface condenser types, cooling Towers, Steam injectors.

UNIT III NUCLEAR AND HYDEL POWER PLANTS 9

Nuclear power plant- Layout - components: Nuclear Energy- Fission, Fusion, Chain Reaction, Types of

Reactors - Waste disposal and safety. Hydel Power plant – Layout: Essential elements- Micro hydel

developments- Pumped storage power plant.

UNIT IV DIESEL AND GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT 9

Diesel power plant: Layout – components- Types of diesel plants, Selection of Engine type, combustion in IC

engines, Cooling and Lubrication systems -applications and comparison.

Gas turbine power plant: Fuels- Gas turbine material – open and closed cycles- reheating – Regeneration and

intercooling - Brayton cycle.

UNIT V OTHER POWER PLANTS AND ECONOMICS OF POWER PLANTS 7

Solar central receiver system, Geo thermal- OTEC- Wind, Tidel, cogeneration plant, Cost of electric Energy-

Fixed and operating costs- Energy rates- Types of tariffs - Economics of load sharing.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

(Use of standard thermodynamic steam tables is permitted)

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Nag P. K, “Power Plant Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw- Hill, 2007.

2. Arora S.C and Domkundwar S, “A Course in Power Plant Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai, 2001.

3. Collier J.G., and Hewitt G.F, “Introduction to Nuclear power”, Hemisphere publishing, New York,

1987.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. K.K.Ramalingam, “Power Plant Engineering”, Scitech Publications, 2002.

2. G.R, Nagpal, “Power Plant Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 1998.

3. G.D.Rai, “Introduction to Power Plant technology”, Khanna Publishers, 1995.

4. EI-Wakil M.M, “Power Plant Technology,” Tata McGraw-Hill 1984.

64

15ME603 : APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge on

The Industrial Hydraulics and Pneumatics Course deals with fluid power, and describes the basic

principles and the importance of pressure, flow, speed, and efficiency rating factors.

Explaining the advantage of fluid power, it provides examples of applications.

Understand the relevant theory (units, flow, pressure, temperature, forces).

Understand the operation of hydraulics & pneumatics circuits and components typically used in

industry.Construct a range of functional hydraulic circuits.

Read hydraulics & pneumatics circuit drawings.

Understand how PLCs are interfaced and used to control pneumatic systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the main components of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems.

To design hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for industrial applications.

To provide essential underpinning knowledge of pneumatics principles and control techniques.

Understand how the PLCs are interfaced and used to control pneumatic systems.

To provide essential knowledge and skills for assembly of fluid power systems

UNIT I FLUID POWER SYSTEMS AND FUNDAMENTALS 9

Introduction to fluid power, Advantages of fluid power, Application of fluid power system. Types of fluid power

systems, Properties of hydraulic fluids – General types of fluids – Fluid power symbols. Basics of Hydraulics-

Applications of Pascal’s Law- Laminar and Turbulent flow – Reynolds’s number – Darcy’s equation – Losses

in pipe, valves and fittings

UNIT II HYDRAULIC COMPONENT & SYSTEM 9

Sources of Hydraulic Power: Pumping theory – Pump classification – Gear pump, Vane Pump, piston pump,

construction and working of pumps – pump performance – Variable displacement pumps. Fluid Power

Actuators: Linear hydraulic actuators – Types of hydraulic cylinders – Single acting, Double acting special

cylinders like tandem, Rod less, Telescopic, Cushioning mechanism, Construction of double acting cylinder,

Rotary actuators – Fluid motors, Gear, Vane and Piston motors.

UNIT III DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS 9

Construction of Control Components : Directional control valve – 3/2 way valve – 4/2 way valve – Shuttle valve

– check valve – pressure control valve – pressure reducing valve, sequence valve, Flow control valve – Fixed

and adjustable, electrical control solenoid valves, Relays, ladder diagram. Accumulators and Intensifiers:

Types of accumulators – Accumulators circuits, sizing of accumulators, intensifier – Applications of Intensifier

– Intensifier circuit.

UNIT IV PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS 9

Pneumatic Components: Properties of air – Compressors – Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator Unit – Air control

valves, Quick exhaust valves, and pneumatic actuators. Fluid Power Circuit Design, Speed control circuits,

synchronizing circuit, Pneumo hydraulic circuit, Sequential circuit design for simple applications using cascade

method.

UNIT V DESIGN OF PNEUMATIC CIRCUITS 9

65

Servo systems – Hydro Mechanical servo systems, Electro hydraulic servo systems and proportional valves.

Fluidics – Introduction to fluidic devices, simple circuits, Introduction to Electro Hydraulic Pneumatic logic

circuits, ladder diagrams, PLC applications in fluid power control. Fluid power circuits; failure and

troubleshooting.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Pearson Education 2015.

2. Srinivasan.R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic controls”, Vijay Nicole, 2016.

3. Majumdar S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems- Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic controls”, Chand & Co, 2013.

2. Majumdar S.R., “Pneumatic systems – Principles and maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995.

3. Anthony Lal, “Oil hydraulics in the service of industry”, Allied publishers, 1982.

4. Harry L. Stevart D.B, “Practical guide to fluid power”, Taraoeala sons and Port Ltd.Broadey, 1976.

5. Michael J, Prinches and Ashby J. G, “Power Hydraulics”, Prentice Hall, 1989.

6. Dudelyt, A. Pease and John T. Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php

2. http://www.ebookbrowsee.net/np/nptel-lecture-notes

15ME651 : MECHATRONICS AND DYNAMICS LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Analyze, design, and build analog circuits using switches, op- amps, diodes, transistors, and relays.

Analyze and build digital circuits.

Explain the basic components of a microcontroller and develop code for programming of microcontrollers.

Explain the different interfacing techniques of PC and microcontrollers such as A/D, D/A, Parallel and Serial.

Explain the concept of time and timers, and implement timers in different computing platforms.

Develop state transition diagrams for control of physical systems.

Explain the principle of operation and interface of different sensors.

To understand how certain measuring devices are used for dynamic testing.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to design a pneumatic system/hydraulic system for any innovative ideas.

Selection and use of the sensors and actuators in process monitoring systems.

Design a Simulation circuit for hydraulic and Pneumatic system without prototyping.

Make an interface program for mechanical systems.

Setup a speed control devices for various drive systems.

The various concepts of dynamics will be learnt by the students.

UNIT I PNEUMATIC TRAINER KITS 9

66

Design of circuits with logic sequence using Basic & Electro pneumatic trainer kits.

UNIT II HYDRAULIC TRAINER KITS 9

Design of circuits with logic sequence using Basic & Electro pneumatic trainer kits.

Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control.

(i) Velocity (ii) direction and (iii) force of single and double acting actuators.

UNIT III SIMULATIONS 9

Simulation of basic Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Electric circuits using software.

UNIT IV MICROPROCESSOR & PLC 9

1. Circuits with multiple cylinder sequences in Electro pneumatic using PLC.

2. Stepper motor interfacing with 8051 Micro controller.

3. Full step resolution (ii) half step resolution.

4. Computerized data logging system with control for process variables like pressure flow and temperature.

5. Servo controller interfacing for open loop and closed loop system.

UNIT V DYNAMICS 9

1. Determination of Mass moment of inertia of Fly wheel and Axle system.

2. Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia using bifilar suspension and compound pendulum.

3. Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic effect and couple.

4. Governor - Determination of range sensitivity, effort etc., for Watts, Porter, Proell and Hartnell Governors.

5. Cams – Cam profile drawing, Motion curves and study of jump phenomenon.

6. Balancing of rotating masses.

7. Balancing of reciprocating masses.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

HARDWARE

Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit

Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit (Electrical) VMT-04

Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit (PLC) VMT-05

Advanced Hydraulic Trainer Kit

8051 Micro Controller Training Kit

Stepper Motor Interface (VBMB – 013A)

Computerized Data Logging System (VMPA – 062)

Design & testing of Fluid control circuit VPAT-12L

Speed control of AC Servo Motor (VPAT-22)

Digital PID Controller (VDPID – 01)

Temperature control Module

DC Motor Speed Control Module (VPAT – 02)

SOFTWARE

Hydraulic Simulation Software Hydrosim 3.64

Hydraulic Simulation Software Hydrosim 3.64

DYNAMICS LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS:

Stroboscope

Vibrometer

J,K,T Thermocouples

67

Gas Thermometer

Radiation pyrometer

Load Cell

LVDT

Brake Dynamometer

Cam analyzer

Motorised gyroscope

Governor apparatus - Watt, Porter, Proell and Hartnell governors

Whirling of shaft apparatus

Static and dynamic balancing machine

15HS651 : PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY

(COMMON TO ECE / MECH / IT / BIO-TECH)

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To enable the students of engineering and technology attain effective professional communication

skills

To train the aspirants to get through interviews successfully

To make them successful corporates

To upgrade the language proficiency level of engineering students

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Students of Engineering and technology will be able to

attain effective communication skills

enhance business communication

acquire language proficiency

face interviews

UNIT I VOCABULARY BUILDING 9

Synonyms & antonyms, grammar: error spotting exercise, listening exercise, reading comprehension

exercises, sequencing the jumbled sentences, cloze test

UNIT II BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 9

Report Writing: types of Reports- Project report – report format, Preparation of a report based on the

newspaper article. Writing memos, notice, agenda and circular.

UNIT III GROUP DISCUSSION 9

Group Discussion-an introduction, Sample videos on GD and appraisal, Participation in Group Discussion-

Persuasive skills, Negotiating ability, team skills and leadership Quality.

UNIT IV INTERVIEW SKILLS AND SOFT SKILLS 9

Resume designing, Online Resume, Successful interview skills, mock interviews, and Motivation – self-image –

goal setting – managing changes – corporate etiquette, body language, and power dressing- time management

– stress management, Career and life planning.

UNIT V THEATRE ART AND AN INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL

EXAMINATIONS

9

Master of Ceremony, Welcome Address, Role play activities, dramatics, An Introduction to International

English Language Testing System (IELTS) – Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), Cambridge

Advanced English(CAE)– Graduate Record Examination (GRE) – Civil Service (Language related)

68

TOTAL: 45 Periods

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Berry, Thomas Elliott. Most Common Mistakes in English Usage. New Delhi: TMH Publication

Company Limited, 2012.

2. Thorpe,E and Heaton,S. Objective English. Ed: Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,

New Delhi: 2007.

3. Bhatnagar, R.P. English for Competitive Examination. 3rd Edition. Macmillan, New Delhi: 2012.

4. Bhatnagar, R.P., NITINBhatnagar and Mamta. Communicative English for Engineers & Professionals.

Noida: Pearson Education, 2010.

5. Rizvi, Asharaf M. Effective Technical Communication. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Limited, 2007.

15ME652 : DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT L T P C

0 0 8 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide opportunity for the students to implement their skills acquired in the previous semesters to

practical problems.

To inculcate the habit of working in teams.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

The students will be able

To design, fabricate and demonstrate working of a machine element.

The students in convenient groups of not more than 3 members have to take one small item for design and

fabrication. Every project work shall have a guide who is the member of the faculty of the institution and if

possible with an industry guide also.

The item chosen may be small machine elements (Example-screw jack, coupling, machine vice, cam and

follower, governor etc.), attachment to machine tools, tooling (jigs, fixtures etc.), small gear box, automotive

appliances, agricultural implements, simple heat exchangers, small pumps, hydraulic /pneumatic devices etc.

to benefit the society.

The students are required to design and fabricate the chosen item in the college and demonstrate its working

apart from submitting the project report. The report should contain assembly drawing, parts drawings, process

charts relating to fabrication.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

15ME701 : INSTRUMENTATION AND METROLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge on basic principles of instrumentation and metrology.

To study the working principle of metrological instruments.

To become an expert in the field of measurements.

To inculcate the knowledge of various types of measuring instruments and its applications.

To create the knowledge on cutting edge technology followed in the field of instrumentation and

69

metrology.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Basic knowledge on instrumentation and metrology.

Able to analyze the basic principles and classification of metrological instruments.

Proficient in the field of measurements.

Hands on theoretical experience in handling measuring instruments for an industrial exposure.

Designing the measuring system for various applications.

UNIT I BASICS OF INSTRUMENTATION 9

General concept - application of measurement - instrumentation- monitoring of process and operations -

control of process and operations – configurations - functional elements of the instruments - definitions and

terminology of calibration – accuracy – precision – sensitivity – threshold – resolution – hysteresis - dead

space – range – span - errors of measurements –strain gauge-ultrasonic detectors, machine vision.

UNIT II MEASURING INSTRUMENTS 9

Study of strain measuring instrument - measurement of force - torque temperature and pressure - vibration

measuring instruments - seismic instruments - sensors in automation.

UNIT III COMPARATORS AND INTERFEROMETER 9

Definition of metrology - economics of measurement - measurement as a comparative process - dimensional

properties - terminology and accuracy of measurement - measuring errors.

Abbe’s principle - principle of interferometry - flatness testing - optical interferometer - laser interferometer -

holography and speckle metrology. Linear measurements: Material length standards – line and end

measurement – calibration of end bars - datum and reference surfaces - surface plates - gauges – feeler

gauges – micrometres - dial test indicator - slip gauges - care of gauge blocks. Comparators: Mechanical –

electrical - optical and pneumatic - optical projector.

UNIT IV GEOMETRICAL MEASUREMENT 9

Angular measurement – plain vernier and optical protractors - sine bar - optical instruments – flatness -

parallelism and roundness measurement - need for limit gauge - design of plug gauge – Taylor’s principle -

types of limit gauges - surface texture - controlling surface texture - parameters used - specification of surface

texture - drawing and symbols - Tomlinson surface meter - CMM.

UNIT V THREADS, GEARS MEASUREMENT AND MACHINE VISION 9

Types of screw threads – terminology - proportions of ISO metric thread - measurement of major - minor and

effective diameters - Gear terminology and standard proportions - spur gear measurement - checking of

composite errors - base pitch measurement - clean room environment - machine vision - image processing

and analysis - cone sight - grey scaling.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Jain R.K., “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, 2009.

2. Gupta S.C, “Engineering Metrology”, Dhanpatrai Publications, 2005.

3. Nakra B.C., Chaudhry K K, “Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis, Tata Mc. Graw Hill, 3rd

Edition, 2009.

4. D. V. S. Murty, “Transducers & Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, 8th Edition 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Beckwith T. G and Buck N. L, “Mechanical Measurements”, Addition Wesley Publishing, 2009.

2. Dominique Placko, “Fundamentals of Instrumentation and Measurement”, Wiley- ISTE, 2007.

3. Narayana K, “Engineering Metrology”, Scitech Publication(India) Pvt Ltd, 2006.

4. Donald P. Eckman, "Industrial Instrumentation", Wiley Eastern Limited, 2004.

5. Ernest O. Doebelin, “Measurements systems, Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition,

70

2004.

6. Thomas G.Beckwith,Roy D.Marangoni& John H.Lienhard V, “Mechanical Measurements” Pearson

Prentice Hall, 2007.

7. Harrison H.L. and Bollinger J.G., “Automatic Controls”, International Text Book Co., 2001.

15ME702 : INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS, PSYCHOLOGY AND

MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the concepts of economics as applied to Industry.

To provide the details about demand analysis and forecasting, National Income and Measurement.

To study the Principles and Functions of Management and organization theory.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

After studying this course students will be able to:

Understand the scope of economics and demand analysis.

Gain the knowledge about demand forecasting related to market conditions.

Understand the Concept of National Income and Measurement.

Become familiar with Principles and Functions of Management and organization theory.

Become familiar with Profit Volume Analysis.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS 9

Industrial Economics: Definition and scope in engineering perspective. Demand Analysis: Law of Demand,

Determinants of Demand, Demand forecast, Elasticity of Demand - Supply, Law of supply, and Determinants

of supply, Elasticity of supply, indifference Map - Price, Income and cross Elasticity.

UNIT II PROFIT VOLUME ANALYSIS 9

Effect of changes in volume, selling price, fixed cost and variable cost. Cost volume profit relationship –

relevant costs in decision making – profit management analysis – break even analysis – margin of safety –

angle of incidence and multi product break even analysis.

Tools for project planning, work break down structure, responsibility matrix, events and milestones, GERT

Network, Gantt charts, PERT/CPM.

UNIT III ELEMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY 7

Freudian Theory, Industrial Psychology : Definitions & Scope, Personality, self-esteem, socialisation –

environmental contexts influencing behaviour – role of information technology and globalization, Major

influences : Enthusiasm, motivation, boredom, fatigue, accidents, safety measures, Selection and recruitment

Job analysis, Performance evaluation, Job satisfaction, Stress management, Attitude

UNIT IV ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 12

Organisational Behaviour : Definition, nature and scope, individual in workplace, commitment and job

enrichment, organizational culture, Factors influencing Job satisfaction, work environment, social relationship

to increase productivity, withdrawal behaviour, training and development.

Group: Definition, types, effective communication, Team work: Process, barriers, determinants of group

cohesiveness, morale, professional behaviour,

Ethics in workplace: Formulation of ethical codes, code of discipline, encouraging and managing ethical

behaviour, ethical, dilemma, decision making. Values: Meaning, Gandhian thoughts, social responsibility.

71

UNIT V MANAGEMENT PROCESS AND PRINCIPLES 8

Principles, Process and Functions of Management – Evolution of Management Thought - contribution of F.W.

Taylor, Henri Fayol, Elton Ma’o– Nature of planning, decision making process, management by objectives.

Organization Theory and Process – Leadership – Motivation – Communication – Conflict Management in

Organization.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rajan Mishra,“Industrial Economics and Management Principles”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd, New

Delhi, 2008.

2. Aamodt M.G,“Industrial Organizational Psychology: An Applied Approach”, Wadsworth/Thompson:

Belmont, C.A, 5th Edition, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. V.L.Mote, Samuel Paul and G.S.Gupta, “Managerial Economics – concepts and cases”,TMH, 2009.

2. A.Ramachandra Aryasri and V.V.Ramana Murthy, “Engineering Economics and Financial

Accounting”, TMH, New Delhi, 2004.

3. Yogesh Maheshwari, “Managerial Economics”, second edition, PHI 2012.

4. T.R.Banga and S.C.Sharma, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 16th Edition

2011.

5. Herald Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private

Limited, 9th Edition,2012.

6. Aswathappa K., “Organisational Behaviour”, 8th Edition, Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.

7. Miner J.B,“Industrial/Organizational Psychology”, McGraw Hill NY, 1992.

8. Schneider Engnov, “Industrial Sociology” 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1979.

9. Mamoria C.B. and Mamoria S., “Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India”, Himalaya Publishing

House, 2010.

10. Maheshwari.K.L, Varshney.R.L “Managerial Economics”Sultan Chand & Sons, 2003.

11. Luthans, Fred, “Organizational Behaviour”, McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2013.

12. John M Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, Prentice Hall India Pvt Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2002.

15ME751 : INSTRUMENTATION AND METROLOGYLABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To supplement the principles learnt in Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery.

To get exposure on various industrial sensors used to measure the assorted process parameters.

To reinforce the students with an adequate work experience in the measurement.

To train the students in the measurement of displacement, force and torque etc.,

To expertise in handling the instruments involved.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to perform accurate measurements for any engineering system.

Able to identify basic metrology experiments.

Understand relative precision of measurement and source of measurement errors.

The students will equip with the knowledge on various instruments used for measurement.

Develop and reinforce measurements skills for project implementation.

INSTRUMENTATION 15

1. Measurement of speed using Stroboscope.

2. Temperature measurement using J, K, T Thermocouples and gas Thermometer.

72

3. Temperature measurement using radiation pyrometer.

4. Load Cell.

5. LVDT.

6. Torque measurements using Brake Dynamometer.

METROLOGY 15

1. Calibration of Vernier / Micrometer / Dial Gauge.

2. Checking Dimensions of part using slip gauges.

3. Measurements of Gear Tooth Dimensions.

4. Measurement of Taper Angle using sine bar / tool makers microscope.

5. Measurement of straightness and flatness.

6. Measurement of thread parameters.

7. Checking the limits of dimensional tolerances using comparators (Mechanical / Pneumatic /

Electrical).

8. Coordinate Measuring Machine.

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

LIST OFEQUIPMENTS

Micrometer - 5

Vernier Caliper - 5

Vernier Height Gauge - 2

Vernier Depth Gauge - 2

Slip Gauge Set - 1

Gear Tooth Vernier -1

Sine Bar - 2

Bevel Protractor - 1

Floating Carriage Micrometer - 1

Profile Projector - 1

Mechanical / Electrical / Pneumatic Comparator - 1

Temperature Measuring Setup - 1

Displacement Measuring Setup -1

Force Measuring Setup - 1

Torque Measuring Setup - 1

Vibration / Shock Measuring Setup - 1

Autocollimator - 1

Tool Makers Microscope - 1

Dial Gauge Calibration

15ME752 : COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS

LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide in depth knowledge in finite element simulations using commercially available softwares

like ANSYS®, SOLIDWORKS

®.

To offer understanding of one dimensional bar, beam, truss analysis; two Dimensional plate problems

including plane stress, plane strain and axi-symmetry with various types of elements using FEA

software.

To get exposed to 3D analysis, heat transfer analysis and modal analysis using FEA softwares.

To apply MATLAB®/SIMULINK for the model and simulation of simple mechanical problems like

beam, hydraulics, Cam/follower.

To design and analyse any Engineering Component using FEA softwares.

Review Topics: Deformable bodies, Finite Element Method (FEM), Exact Solution, and Approximate Solution.

73

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the basic pre-processor, solver and post-processor capabilities of FEA softwares like

ANSYS®, SOLIDWORKS

®.

Understand the basic principle of Finite Element Simulations in 1D structural and heat transfer

application.

Solve structural and non-structural problem using ANSYS® FEA software.

Model and simulate structural problems using MATLAB® /SIMULINK.

Equip them to effectively employ finite element Simulations using softwares in order to simulate and

launch a new engineering component to the market.

A ANALYSIS (Simple Treatment only. FEA solution has to be correlated

with analytical solutions.) 37

Stress Analysis of Plane Truss.

Stress Analysis of Spatial Truss.

Stress Analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, fixed ends) subjected to point loads,

UDL, UVL.

Stress Analysis of Pipes.

Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole.

Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket.

Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component.

Stress analysis of a 3D structure.

Modal analysis of beams.

Thermal stress analysis of a bar.

One Dimension Heat Transfer analysis.

Conductive Heat Transfer analysis of a 2D furnace.

B SIMULATION 8

Mathematical modelling of Beams using MATLAB®/SIMULINK/Mathcad.

Simulation of Hydraulic / Pneumatic cylinder using MATLAB® /SIMULINK/ Mathcad.

Modelling and Simulation of free vibration using MATLAB®/SIMULINK/ Mathcad.

Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using MATLAB®/SIMULINK/ Mathcad.

ANSYS Term Paper

Browse the extensive MIT, IIT, NPTEL Open Courseware’s, ANSYS Newsletters, FEA Case Studies,

Technical Journals etc., to read the FE Modeling & Simulation results produced by the leading organization for

solving real scientific problems. In addition, access the application notes written by the scientists/authors and

learn new methods in the field of FE Modeling &Simulation and prepare a Power Point Presentation. Your

term paper should emphasize on

Analysis Objectives

Analysis Assumptions

FEModel

FEAnalysis Results

Outcome of the FEAnalysis

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Paleti Srinivas, Krishna Chaitanya Saambana and Rajesh Kumar Datti, “Finite Element Analysis

using ANSYS®11.0”, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2012.

2. Shailendra Jain, “Modelling and Simulation Using MATLAB Simulink”, Wiley, 2011.

HELPFUL REFERENCES:

1. ANSYS Verification Manual.

74

2. Alberta University ANSYS Tutorial.

3. Cornell University ANSYS Tutorial.

4. Carnegie Mellon University ANSYS Tutorial.

5. Matlab Help Desk.

6. Tutorials by Ohio Computer Aided Engineering.

7. University of South Alabama – Tutorial.

8. University of Minnesota ANSYS Tutorials.

9. University of Texas Arlington – Examples.

10.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.ansys.com.

2. http://www.mathworks.com.

15ME753 : COMPREHENSIVE SKILL DEVELOPMENT** L T P C

0 0 2 1

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The objective of comprehension is to provide opportunity for the student to apply the knowledge

acquired during the earlier semesters to real life problems which he / she may have to face in future

as an engineer.

While learning as how to solve the real life problems, student will receive guidance from the faculty

and also review various courses learnt earlier.

Further this comprehension is to achieve an understanding of the fundamentals of contemporary

manufacturing systems including materials, manufacturing process, product and process control,

computer integrated manufacture and quality.

The students work in groups and solve a variety of problems given to them.

The problems given to the students should be of real like industrial problems selected by a group of

faculty members of the concerned department.

A minimum of three small problems have to be solved by each group of students.

The evaluation is based on continuous assessment by a group of Faculty Members constituted by the

professor in-charge of the course.

There will be three aptitude tests covering syllabus, general aptitude with GATE standard questions.

** Internal Assessment only

15ME851 : PROJECT WORK L T P C

0 0 12 6

COURSE OBJECTIVE:

The objective of the project work is to enable the students in convenient groups of not more than 4

members on a project involving theoretical and experimental studies related to the branch of study.

The aim of the project work is to deepen comprehension of principles by applying them to a new

problem which may be the design and manufacture of a device, a research investigation, a computer or

management project or a design problem.

EVALUATION METHODOLOGY:

Every project work shall have a guide who is the member of the faculty of the institution.

Six periods per week shall be allotted in the time table and this time shall be utilized by the students to

receive the directions from the guide, on library reading, laboratory work, computer analysis or field work

as assigned by the guide and also to present in periodical seminars on the progress made in the project.

The progress of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews.

The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department.

75

Each student shall finally produce a comprehensive report covering background information, literature

survey, problem statement, project work details and conclusion.

This final report shall be typewritten form as specified in the guidelines.

The continuous assessment shall be made as per MEPCO R2015.

CORE ELECTIVES

15MEC01 : ADVANCES IN I.C. ENGINES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide an advanced level of understanding of Spark Ignition, Compression Ignition Engines and

alternate fuels.

To update the knowledge in engine exhaust emission formation and control.

To enable the students to understand the recent developments in IC Engines.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course the students will

Be able to understand the concepts of Spark Ignition, Compression Ignition Engines and alternate

fuels in an advanced level.

Be able to update their knowledge in engine exhaust emission control.

Be able to understand the recent developments in IC Engines.

COURSE PREREQUISITE:

Injection systems, Basics of Automobile Engineering, Otto cycle, Diesel cycle, Carburettor.

Basics of Thermal Engineering related to I.C. Engines.

UNIT I SPARK IGNITION ENGINES 9

Air-fuel ratio requirements, Design of carburettor –fuel jet size and venture size, Stages of combustion-normal

and abnormal combustion, Flame velocity, Factors affecting knock, Combustion chambers, Introduction to

thermodynamic analysis of SI Engine combustion process, Lean burn combustion. Heat release correlations.

UNIT II COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES 9

Stages of combustion-normal and abnormal combustion – Factors affecting knock, Direct and Indirect

injection systems, air motion, swirl measurement. Combustion chambers, Turbo charging, Introduction

to Thermodynamic Analysis of CI Engine Combustion process, heat release correlations.

UNIT III ENGINE EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL 9

Formation of NOX , HC/CO mechanism , Smoke and Particulate emissions, Green House Effect ,

Methods of controlling emissions , Three way catalytic converter and Particulate Trap, Emission (HC,CO, NO

and NOX) measuring equipment, Smoke and Particulate measurement, Indian Driving Cycles and emission

norms. Effect of emissions on Environment and human beings, Noise measurement and control. National and

International emission standards.

UNIT IV ALTERNATE FUELS 9

Alcohols , Vegetable oils and bio-diesel, DEE, DME, Bio-gas, Natural Gas , Liquefied Petroleum

Gas,Hydrogen , Manufacturing, Storage and Safety Properties , Suitability, Dual fuelling , Engine

Modifications, Performance , Combustion and Emission Characteristics of SI and CI Engines using these

76

alternate fuels.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Homogeneous Charge Compression Ignition Engine, Lean Burn Engine, Stratified Charge Engine,

Surface Ignition Engine, Four Valve and Overhead cam Engines, Multi-valving, Tuned manifolding, camless

valve gearing, variable valve timing Electronic Engine Management, Common Rail Direct Injection Diesel

Engine, Gasoline Direct Injection Engine, Data Acquisition System –pressure pick up, charge amplifier PC for

Combustion and Heat release analysis in Engines.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publications, USA, 1998.

2. Ganesan V, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. John B Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.

2. Patterson D.J. and Henein N.A, “Emissions from combustion engines and their control,” Ann Arbor

Science publishers Inc, USA, 1978.

3. Gupta H.N, “Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engines”, Prentice Hall of India, 2ndEdition, 2013.

4. Ultrich Adler, “Automotive Electric / Electronic Systems”, Published by Robert Bosh GmbH, 1995.

5. Richard Stone, “Introduction to Internal Combustion Engines”, Palgrave Macmillan Limited, 2012.

15MEC02 : ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND ROBOTICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


To provide extensive knowledge in artificial intelligence and its applications in various fields.

To give understanding of Neural Networks and Fuzzy systems.

To give exposure to robotic programming techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


This course would make familiar of the basic concepts in Artificial Intelligence, its development and

applications.

Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind Neural Networks and Fuzzy

systems.

Students would be trained to find solutions for translational and rotational transformations of a robot.

Course would equip the students to effectively employ robotic programming skills for diverse

applications.


Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics.

Mechatronics.

Operations Research and Optimization Techniques.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 9

Representation in AI, Properties of internal representation- Predicate calculus- Predicates & arguments-

77

Connectives, variables & quantification- Inference Indexing- Pointers & alternative notations- The Isa

Hierarchy- Slot-assertion notation- Frame notation.

UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY SYSTEMS 9

Neural and fuzzy machine Intelligence- Fuzziness as multi - valence- Dynamical Systems approach to

machine intelligence- The brain as a dynamical system- Neural and fuzzy systems as function estimators-

Neural networks as trainable dynamical system.

UNIT III BASICS & COMPONENTS OF ROBOT 9

Major components of a Robot – Basic Links & joints –Control of actuators in Robots – Robot control

architecture – closed Loop control –effect of friction and gravity – Frequency domain – Robot Joint Control –

Adaptive control stepper Motors – Brushless DC motors – Direct drive actuators, Hydraulic and pneumatic &

actuators – Servo systems.

UNIT IV TRANSFORMATIONS AND KINEMATICS 9

Translational and rotational transformations – Co-ordinate reference framer –Homogeneous transformations –

Forward solution – Inverse solution.

UNIT V ROBOT PROGRAMMING & ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 9

Robot programming languages – characteristics of languages – Position specification–Motion specification.

Robot program synthesis– Programming solution using VAL Robot programming Language, Artificial

Intelligence – search strategies, Heuristic search, Rule based problem solving, Knowledge representation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Klafter R.D., Chemieleskio, T.A. & Negin, M., “Robotics Engineering an Integrated Approach”,


2. Eugene C., Drew M.D., “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence”, Addison-Wesley, 1985.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Fu K.S., Gonzalez R.C. and Lee C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,


2. Bekey G., Autonomous Robots, MIT Press, 2005.

3. Craig, J.J., “Introduction to Robotics” Addison Wesley Publishers, 2005.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php

2. http://www.ebookbrowsee.net/np/nptel-lecture-notes

15MEC03 : AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the various components of automobile and their working principles.

To have the practice for assembling and dismantling of engine parts and transmission system.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


78

Identify and distinguish different systems and components in an automobile, repair, troubleshoot and

maintain an automobile.

Recognize the role of forces, pressure and friction in vehicles, and their operations.

Understand the engine auxiliary systems such as fuel injection system, electrical system and ignition

system.

Explain the working principles of different types of transmission system and suspension systems.

Design and make an automotive device that addresses technological issues such as Hybrid, electric

and alternative fuels.


Basics of I.C. Engines

Design of Machine Elements.

Strength of Materials.

UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9

Types of Automobiles - Vehicle Construction – Chassis – Frame and Body –aerodynamics. Classification,

types and components of Engine –their forms, functions and materials - cooling and lubrication systems –

Emission Norms/Standards in India, Euro norms, Engine emission Control by 3–Way Catalytic Converter.

UNIT II ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9

Working principle of Carburettor and diesel pump– Types – Electronic fuel injection system for petrol and

diesel engines – supercharging and turbo charging – Ignition system – Firing order, Battery, Magneto coil and

Electronic type – Ignition timing- Electronic Engine Management System.

UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9

Clutch: Need – Dry and wet type – Single plate clutch – Diaphragm clutch –Fluid coupling.

Gearbox: Need, constant mesh, and synchromesh gearbox - Torque converters, gear selector & shifting

mechanisms.

Power Transmission: Propeller shaft – Universal joint - Slip joint – Types of drives – Hotchkiss drive – Torque

tube drive – Differential mechanism – Front and rear axle types –Four wheel drive.

UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 11

Wheels and Tyres – Wheel Alignment Parameters - Steering Geometry and Types of steering gear box–

Power Steering – Types of Front Axle – Suspension systems – Braking Systems – Forces onvehicles, tyre

grip, load transfer, braking distribution between axles, stopping distance, Types of Brakes – Diagonal Braking

System – Antilock Braking System.

UNIT V ALTERNATE FUELS AND ANCILLARY SYSTEMS 7

Use of Natural Gas, LPG, Biodiesel, Gasohol and Hydrogen in Automobiles - Electric and Hybrid Vehicles,

Fuel Cells.Head lamp – reflectors – Gauges – fuel, temperature & oil, wipers, Automobile air conditioning,

Safety – Commercial vehicles and race bikes and cars.

Note: Practical Training in dismantling and assembling of Engine parts and Transmission

Systems should be given to the students.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile EngineeringVol 1 & 2”, Standard Publishers, 13th Edition, 2011, New

Delhi.

2. Jain,K.K., and Asthana.R.B, “Automobile Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New Delhi,

79

2006.

3. Rajput.R.K, “A Textbook of Automobile Engineering”, Lakshmi Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “The Motor Vehicle”, Society of Automotive Engineers,13thRev. Edition,

2001.

2. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, East-West Press, 2ndEdition, 2004.

3. Martin W. Stockel and Martin T Stockel, “Auto Fundamentals”, Goodheart-Willcox Co;

11thEdition,2014.

4. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International Publications USA, 2003.

5. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Tata Mcgraw-Hill,4thEdition, 2012.

6. V.A.W. Hillier , “Hillier's Fundamentals of Motor Vehicle Technology”, Nelson Thornes ,

6thEdition,2012

7. Srinivasan, S., “Automotive Mechanics”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishers, 2nd Edition, Fourth reprint,

2006.

15MEC04 : COMPOSITE MATERIALS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the fundamentals, types and applications of composite materials and its mechanical

behavior.

To develop the knowledge in nano composites and its processing techniques.

To study composite mechanics and have the knowledge in analysis of composite materials using

FEM and optimization techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Students who successfully complete the course will demonstrate the following outcomes

An ability to identify the properties of various matrix composites.

Manufacturing techniques for various composites.

Basic understanding of composite mechanics for laminates.

An exposure to recent developments in nano composites, including metal polymer and ceramic

matrix composites.

An ability to use the ideas developed in the design and analysis of composites using FEM and

optimisation techniques.


Basics of Isotropic, orthotropic natures of materials.

Natural fibers, Synthetic fibers.

Polymers, ceramics.

Optimization, FEM.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9

Definition – Types - Need – General characteristics - Applications. Fibers – Glass - Carbon. Matrices – Metal,

ceramics, polymer, Graphite – reinforcements - Short fiber composites - Industrial applications.

UNIT II MANUFACTURING OF COMPOSITES 9

80

Metal Matrix Composites (MMC), Ceramic Matrix Composites (CMC), Polymer Matrix Composites (PMC),

hybrid composites - sandwich composites - characterisation, advantages, applications - manufacturing

processes for metal, ceramic and polymer matrix composites - Manufacturing defects & inspection - traditional

and novel approaches.

UNIT III MECHANICS OF COMPOSITES 9

Basic concepts, stiffness, strength, thermal and moisture expansion - Laminate theory – macro mechanical

behavior of a ply, out-of-plane effects - Generalized Hooke’s Law - Reduction to Homogeneous Orthotropic

Lamina – Isotropic limit case, Orthotropic Stiffness matrix (Qij), Commercial material properties - Rule of

Mixtures - Orthotropic Lamina – Transformation Matrix - Transformed Stiffness.

UNIT IV NANO COMPOSITES 9

Introduction - types - properties - preparation techniques and their new electrical and magnetic properties -

nanopolymers – super hard materials - Fractal based glass-metal - core-shell structure - di block copolymer

based nanocomposites – polymer-CNT based composites.

UNIT V RECENT APPLICATIONS 9

Advanced composites - applications in aircraft, defence, heavy machineries; Carbon, CNT, graphene based

applications – other nano tube application. Optimization of composites - Application of FEM for design and

analysis of composites.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mallick, P.K. and Newman, S., “Composite Materials Technology: Processes and Properties”,

HanserVerlag Publisher, 1990.

2. Koch C, “Nanostructured materials: Processing, properties and applications’, William Andrew

Publication, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. John C. Halpin “Primer on composite materials analysis”, Techomic Publishing Co., 1992.

2. Brent Strong. A “Fundamentals of Composites manufacturing: materials, methods, and applications”,

Society of Manufacturing Engineers, 2007.

3. Jack R. Vinson and R. L. Sierakowski, “The Behavior of Structures composed of composite

materials”, Kluwer, 2008.

EXTENSIVE READING

1. http://www.eng.buffalo.edu/Courses/mae482

2. http://www.aem.umn.edu/courses/aem4511/

15MEC05 : COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce Governing Equations of viscous fluid flows.

To introduce numerical modeling and its role in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer.

To enable the students to understand numerical modeling and its role in the field of fluid flow and

heat transfer.

81

To create confidence to solve complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer by using

high speed computers.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Have a fundamental understanding of Governing Equations of viscous fluid flows.

Be able to understand the finite difference method.

Familiarize the concepts of finite volume method for diffusion.

Recognize the significance of finite volume method for convection diffusion.

Acquire knowledge about the concepts of calculation flow field by finite volume method.


Thermodynamics.

Fluid Mechanics.

Heat Transfer.

Linear Algebra, Numerical methods and Partial Differential Equations.

Programming in C Language.

UNIT I GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 8

Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations of fluid dynamics – Continuity, Momentum

and Energy equations – Chemical species transport – Physical boundary conditions – Time-averaged

equations for Turbulent Flow – Turbulent–Kinetic Energy Equations – Mathematical behaviour of PDEs on

CFD - Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations. Numerical Errors, Grid Independence Test. Application to

simple control volumes.

UNIT II FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD 9

Derivation of finite difference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and second order

accuracy – solution methods for finite difference equations – Elliptic equations – Iterative solution Methods –

Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes – Example problems on elliptic and parabolic equations.

UNIT III FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR DIFFUSION 9

Finite volume formulation for steady state One, Two and Three -dimensional diffusion problems. One

dimensional unsteady heat conduction through Explicit, Crank – Nicolson and fully implicit schemes. Two-

dimensional Transient Problems, difference between the FDM and FVM methods.

UNIT IV FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION DIFFUSION 10

Steady one-dimensional convection and diffusion – Central, upwind differencing schemes-properties of

discretization schemes – Conservativeness, Boundedness, Transportiveness, Hybrid, Power-law, QUICK

Schemes.

UNIT V CALCULATION FLOW FIELD BY FINITE VOLUME METHOD 9

Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity equation – Staggered grid – Momentum equations

– Pressure and Velocity corrections – Pressure Correction equation, SIMPLE algorithm and its variants.

Turbulence models, mixing length model, Two equation (k-Є) models – High and low Reynolds number

models Prediction of fluid flow and heat transfer using standard codes.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. T.J. Chung, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University, Press, 2002.

82

2. John D. Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publisher, 2012.

3. Versteeg, H.K., and Malalasekera, W., “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The finite

volume Method”, Pearson education, New Delhi, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Patankar, S.V., “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 2004.

2. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa

Publishing House, NewDelhi, 2nd Edition, 2011.

3. Ghoshdastidar P.S., “Heat Transfer”, Oxford Unversity Press, 2ndRev.Edition, 2012.

4. Prodip Niyogi, Chakrabarty .S.K., Laha .M.K., “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”,

Pearson Education, 2005.

5. Anil W. Date, “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.

6. Ghoshdastidar, P.S., “Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Ltd., 2003.

15MEC06 : COMPUTER INTEGRATEDMANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop an understanding about the role of computer in manufacturing.

To provide an in-depth understanding of shop floor control and virtual organization and control of

manufacturing processes.

To introduce group technology and concurrent engineering and develop skill in the developing

automated process plans using variant and generative approaches.

Improve communications through documentation and to create a database for manufacturing.

To take up case studies on FMS and CIM systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

To introduce a computer aided inspection and manufacturing systems.

To apply the principles of operation of automated shop floor control and manufacturing process.

To reduce manual processing and linking computers to all the manufacturing machines.

To analyze, design, and build manufacturing and automation systems.

Implement group technology concepts in production to facilitate cellular and flexible manufacturing.

While implementing these designs, students will continually hone their interpersonal skills, creative

abilities and understanding of the design process.

Develop automated process plans using variant and generative approaches.

Take appropriate strategy to gradually migrate from conventional manufacturing to FMS and CIM.


Traditional Manufacturing Techniques.

Production Planning and Control.

Computer Networking and Communication Techniques.

Geometric Modeling, Optimization Techniques.

UNIT I COMPONENTS OF CIM 9

CIM Concept - Product design - planning, production, and materials control - Geometric Modeling - 2D, 3D

modeling - Computer Networking in Shop Floor Control - LAN, WAN - Computer Communication protocol –

83

OSI Model.

UNIT II GEOMETRIC MODELING AND DESIGN OPTIMIZATION 9

Geometric modeling - 2D Modeling - Entities - line, circle, ellipse, parabola, cubic spline, Bezier and B-spline -

3D Modelling - wireframe, surface, solid modeling - Solid Modeling Techniques - CSG, B-rep - Operations -

boolean, extrude, sweep, revolve - Engineering Analysis - General principles of optimization and concurrent

engineering.

UNIT III GROUP TECHNOLOGY 9

Group Technology - Role of Group Technology in CAD/CAM Integration - Part families - Methods of

developing part families - Classification and coding - Production Flow Analysis - Machine cell design -

Clustering methods - benefits of GT - Applications of G.T.

UNIT IV COMPUTER AIDED PLANNING AND CONTROL SOFTWARE 9

Production Planning and Control - Cost planning and control - Inventory management - Material requirements

planning (MRP) - Lean Manufacturing - Agile manufacturing - logical design of a process planning -

Implementation considerations - Types of software - Trends - Use of simulation software.

UNIT V SHOP FLOOR CONTROL 9

Shop Floor Control System - introduction, functions, order release, order scheduling, order progress -

Operation scheduling - Factory data collection system - Automated data collection system - Computer Process

Monitoring - Paperless factory.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mikell. P. Groover “Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, 4th

Edition, Prentice-hall of India,2014.

2. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM- Theory and practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mikell. P. Groover and Emory Zimmers Jr., “CAD/CAM”, prentice hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2003.

2. James A. Regh and Henry W. Kreabber, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson

Education, 2004.

3. Radhakrishnan.P,”CAD/CAM/CIM”, - New age international, 2009.

4. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne, “CAD CAM Principles, Practice and Manufacturing

Management”, Pearson Education 2nd Edition, 1999.

5. Ranky, Paul G., “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, prentice hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2005.

6. Yorem Koren, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, McGraw Hill, 2005.

7. Rao P N, “CAD/CAM Principles and Applications”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php.

2. http://www.ebookbrowsee.net/np/nptel-lecture-notes.

84

15MEC07 : CRYOGENICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide an advanced level of understanding of the processes of producing ultra-low temperatures

suitable for liquefaction of gases.

To understand the design and development of systems and components which produce, maintain

and utilize low temperature well below -150°C.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

After studying this course students will be able to

Have an advanced level of understanding of the processes of producing ultra-low temperatures

suitable for liquefaction of gases.

Understand the working principles of Cryogenic refrigeration system.

Design and develop the systems and components which produce, maintain and utilize low

temperature well below -150°C.

Learn the applications of cryogenics.


Basics of Semiconductors, Superconductivity, Liquid properties and Safety.

Thermodynamic Laws and Heat Transfer techniques.

Engineering materials and properties.

Energy storage and Thermal insulation.

UNIT I GAS-LIQUEFACTION SYSTEMS 9

System performance parameters – Ideal system, liquefaction systems – simple Linde Hampson, Claude

systems – Systems for Neon, Hydrogen and Helium.

UNIT II CRYOGENIC REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 9

Claude refrigerator – Philips refrigerator, Solvay, Gifford – MC Mahon refrigerators – magnetic cooling –

magnetic refrigerator systems.

UNIT III SEPERATION AND PURIFICATION SYSTEMS 9

Theoretical plate calculations of Air columns – air separation systems – Linde double column systems –

Argon, Neon, Hydrogen and Helium separation systems – Gas purification methods.

UNIT IV MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS 9

Temperature, pressure, flow rate, fluid quality, liquid level measurement systems.

UNIT V STORAGE AND APPLICATIONS 9

Cryogenic fluid storage systems – vacuum technology – applications of cryogenics.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Randall F. Barron. “Cryogenic Systems”, Oxford University Press, 1985.

2. Klaus D. Timmerhaus and Thomas M. Flynn., ‘Cryogenic Process Engineering’, Plenum Press, New

York, 1989.

85

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Peter Kittel. “Advances in Cryogenic Engineering”, Plenum Press, 1998.

2. Guy K White. “Experimental Techniques in Low Temperature Physics”, Clarendon Press, Oxford,

1987.

15MEC08 : DESIGN OF THERMAL SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To build up necessary background for the design of various types of thermal systems.

To learn the sizing of heat exchangers, thermal and mechanical stress analysis for various heat

exchange applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Have a fundamental understanding of engineering design.

Be able to get the necessary background for the modeling of thermal systems.

Understand the design of shell and tube type heat exchangers.

Familiarize thermal and mechanical stress analysis for various heat exchange applications.

Recognize the significance of safety measures in equipment design.

Acquire knowledge about the principles of condensers and cooling towers.


Basic knowledge in Engineering Design.

Thermal Engineering.

Heat and Mass Transfer.


Engineering design, design as part of engineering undertaking; Basic considerations in design: formulation of

the design problem, conceptual design, steps in the design process, computer aided design, Economic

analysis

UNIT II MODELING OF THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Types of models, mathematical modeling, curve fitting, linear algebraic systems, numerical model for a

system, system simulation, methods for numerical simulation. Acceptable design of thermal systems Initial

design, design strategies, design of systems from different application areas, additional considerations for

large practical systems.

UNIT III MECHANICAL DESIGN OF SHELL AND TUBE TYPE HEAT

EXCHANGERS

9

Thickness calculations, Tube sheet design using TEMA formula, Concept of equivalent plate for carrying out

perforated analysis, General design of evaporator and condenser, flow induced vibration risks including

acoustic issue and remedies, tube to tube sheet joint design, buckling of tubes, thermal stresses.

UNIT IV COMPACT AND PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS 9

Types - Merits and Demerits – Design of Compact heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers, Radiative

heat exchangers, performance influencing parameters, limitations. Performance enhancement of heat

exchanger.

UNIT V CONDENSORS AND COOLING TOWERS 9

Design of surface and evaporative condensers – cooling tower – performance characteristics, process

hazards, Safety measures in equipment design.

86

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. T.Taborek, G.F.Hewitt and N.Afgan, “Heat Exchangers, Theory and practice”, McGraw-Hill Book Co,

1983.

2. Walkers, “Industrial Heat Exchangers – A Basic Guide”, Mc Graw Hill Book Co, 1982.

3. W. F. Stoecker, design of thermal systems, McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Nicholas Cheremistoff, “Cooling Tower”, Ann Arbor Science Pub, 1981.

2. Arthur, P. Frass, “Heat Exchanger Design”, John Wiley and Sons 2nd Edition, 1989.

3. J.P.Gupta, “Fundamentals of Heat exchanger and pressure vessels technology”, Hemisphere

publishing corporation, springer –Verlag (outside NA), 1986.

4. Donald Q. Kern and Alban D. Karus, “Extended surface heat transfer”, Mc Graw Hill Book Co, 1972.

5. E.A.D.Sanders, “Heat Exchangers, Selection Design and Construction”, Layman Scientific and

Technical co Published with John Wiley & Sons, 1988.

15MEC09 : DESIGN OF JIGS, FIXTURES AND PRESS TOOLS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the functions and design principles of Jigs, fixtures and press tools.

To design jig or fixture for any component in manufacturing applications.

To gain proficiency in the development of different types of cutting and forming dies.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

This course will help to know the need for jigs, fixtures and press tools and their requirement in mass

production.

To understand the design principles of jigs, fixtures and press tools.

To find innovate solutions for designing of cutting dies and to learn to use standard practices and

standard data from design hand books.

To be able to design bending and forming dies for different components.

To keep abreast with the recent development in tool engineering.


Manufacturing Technology I & Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–I

Manufacturing Technology II & Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–II

UNIT I LOCATING AND CLAMPING PRINCIPLES 7

Tool design objectives - Advantages of Jigs and fixtures - Important Considerations while designing Jigs and

Fixtures-Materials used in Jigs and fixtures

Principles of location – Locating methods and devices – Redundant Location –Principles of clamping –

Clamping elements with mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic actuation.

UNIT II JIGS 8

Drill bushings – Materials for bushings-types of bushing-Renewable, Slip, Threaded, plate bushings

Types of Jigs – post, turnover, channel, latch, box, pot, angular post jigs – Indexing jigs-Linear indexing, Rotary

indexing devices. Design and development of Jigs for given components.

87

UNIT III FIXTURES 8

Milling Fixtures-types-special vice jaws, facing, slotting fixtures, Turning Fixtures-chucks, collets, mandrels,

Boring, broaching and grinding fixtures – Assembly, Inspection and Welding fixtures – Modular fixtures- Quick

change fixtures. Design and development of fixtures for given component.

UNIT IV PRESS WORKING TERMINOLOGIES AND ELEMENTS OF CUTTING

DIES

10

Press Working Terminologies - operations – Types of presses – press accessories –Computation of press

capacity – Strip layout – Material Utilization – Shearing action –Clearances – Press Work Materials – Centre of

pressure.

Functions of various elements of dies – Die Block – Punch holder, Die set, guide plates – Stops – Strippers –

Pilots – Selection of Standard parts – Design and development of blanking, piercing, compound and

progressive dies.

UNIT V BENDING FORMING AND DRAWING DIES 12

Difference between bending, forming and drawing – Blank development for the above operations – Types of

bending dies – Press capacity – spring back – knockouts – pressure pads – ejectors – variables affecting metal

flow in drawing operations – draw die inserts –ironing – Design and development of bending, forming, drawing

and combination dies- single and double action dies.

Bulging, Swaging, Embossing, coining, curling, hole flanging, shaving and sizing, assembly, fine Blanking dies

– recent trends in tool design- computer assisted metal forming- tooling for numerically controlled machines–

Single minute exchange of dies – Poka Yoke.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Joshi, P.H. “Jigs and Fixtures”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013.

2. Donaldson, Lecain and Goold. “Tool Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, third edition, 2000.

3. Hoffman. “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Thomson Delmar Learning, Singapore, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. K. Venkataraman, “Design of Jigs Fixtures & Press Tools”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.

2. Kempster, “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Hoddes and Stoughton, Third Edition 1974.

3. Joshi, P.H. “Press Tools – Design and Construction”, Wheels publishing, 1996.

4. ASTME Fundamentals of Tool Design, Prentice Hall of India.

5. Design Data Hand Book, PSG College of Technology, Coimbatore.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Albert Atkins Dowd & Frank W. Curtis. “Tool Engineering: Jigs and Fixtures,” McGraw-Hill, 2007.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.nptel.iitk.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/.../pdf/LM-33.pdf

2. http://www.learningace.com/.../lecture-33-jigs-and-fixtures-for-machine-shops

88

15MEC10 : ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to build up an integrated real-time view of core business processes.

To understand the status of business commitments.

To develop business management software - usually a suite of integrated applications.

To create an integrated software system to manage the business and automate back office functions.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

To gain knowledge on integrated business system.

To understand the modules of integrated software system.

To develop and create a system towards Information era.


Basics of Business Processes, Business Functions.

Software fundamentals -Database Management System.

Product Development, Production Planning and Control, Operations Management.

UNIT I CONCEPTS OF ERP 9

Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP); Definition of ERP – History of ERP – Material Requirement Planning

(MRP) – Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II) – Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP I and ERP II) –

Overview of ERP – Evolution of ERP.

UNIT II BUSINESS SYSTEM AND ERP 9

Evolution of Business system – Objectives of ERP system - Structure of ERP system – Functions of ERP

system – Integrated ERP solutions – ERP sub systems – Key Modules and operations - Advantages of ERP

packages.

UNIT III MODULES OF ERP 9

Modules of ERP – Accounting and Finance, Sales and Distribution, Production & Materials Management –

Human Resource management – Plant and Maintenance, Quality Management.

UNIT IV IMPLEMENTATION OF ERP 9

Implementation of ERP – Phases, Strategies and Approaches – Implementation Methodologies – Role of

vendors, consultants and user in ERP implementation – Critical Success factor – Return on investment.

UNIT V ERP TECHNOLOGY 9

Technologies related to ERP – Management information system (MIS), Decision Support System (DSS) –

Executive Information System (EIS) – Business Process Reengineering (BPR) – Supply Chain Management

(SCM) – Customer Relationship Management (CRM) – E – commerce.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Dimpi Srivastava, Aarti Batra,“ERP systems”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2010.

2. Alexis Leon, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, Tata McGraw Hill, Publishing Company Limited, New

Delhi,2nd Edition, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

89

1. Daniel E. O’Leary, “Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Systems”, Cambridge University Press,

2000.

2. Mary Summer, “Enterprise Resource Planning”,Pearson Education, 2005.

3. Sadagopan. S “ERP – A managerial Perspective”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,

New Delhi, 1999.

4. Rahul V. Altekar, “Enterprise Resource Planning, Theory and Practice:”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2004.

5. Vinoth Kumar Garg and Venkitakrishnan, “Enterprise Resource Planning, Concepts and Practice”, PHI

Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2003.

6. Vinoth Kumar Garg and Bharat Vakhana, “Enterprise Resource Planning, Strategy”, Jaisco Publishing

House, 1999.

7. Vinoth Kumar Garg and Venkitakrishnan, “ERPWARE, ERP Implementation Framework”, PHI

Learning Pvt. Ltd, 1999.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.inc.com/encyclopedia/enterprise-resource-planning-erp.html

2. http://www.openerp.com/

3. http://www.fcsiba.wikispaces.com/file/view/ERP Course Outline.pptx

4. http://www.me.iitb.ac.in/ subash/erp.pdf

5. http://eprints.mdx.ac.uk/6458/1/JOTIENO-THESIS.pdf

6. http://www.campus.murraystate.edu/academic/.../Introduction%20to%20ERP.ppt

15MEC11 : ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to realize the scope of an entrepreneur.

To enable the students to learn about various financial assistance rendered by the institutions.

To enable students to compare different forms of ownership structures.

To have knowledge about method of taxation and tax benefits.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course the students will be able

To understand the profile of the entrepreneur.

To assess themselves for the possibility of becoming successful entrepreneur.

To identify suitable business opportunities for their enterprise based on their capacity to invest in and

manage a business venture.

To prepare a project report for obtaining financial aid for their venture.

To identify various long term and short term sources of finance and support institutions for their

proposed company.

To carryout project activity planning and network analysis for their project.


Principles of Management

Financial Management

UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Entrepreneur – types of entrepreneurs – difference between entrepreneur and Intrapreneur – entrepreneurship

in economic growth, factors affecting entrepreneurial growth.

http://www.inc.com/encyclopedia/enterprise-resource-planning-erp.html

http://www.campus.murraystate.edu/academic/.../Introduction%20to%20ERP.ppt

90

UNIT II MOTIVATION 9

Majormotivesinfluencing an entrepreneur – achievement motivation training, Self rating, Ring toss

game,Tower building exercise, Boat building exercise- Thematic apperception test – stress management,

Entrepreneurship development programs – need, objectives- National and State level Institutes offering

Entrepreneurship development programs.

UNIT III BUSINESS 9

Small enterprises – definition, classification – characteristics, ownership structures –project formulation –

steps involved in setting up a business – identifying, selecting a good business opportunity, market survey and

research, techno economic feasibility assessment – preparation of preliminary project reports – project

appraisal – sources of information – classification of needs and agencies.

UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9

Need – sources of finance, term loans, capital structure, financial institution, management of working capital,

costing, break even analysis, network analysis techniques of PERT/CPM – taxation – income tax, excise duty

– sales tax.

UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9

Sickness in small business – concept, magnitude, causes and consequences, Corrective measures –

government policy for small scale enterprises – growth Strategies in small industry – expansion,

diversification, joint venture, merger and sub-contracting.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. S.S.Khanka “Entrepreneurial Development”, S.Chand & Company. Ltd. Ram Nagar New Delhi,

4thedition, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Hisrich.R.D, Peters M P and Dean A.Shepherd, “Entrepreneurship”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,

2009.

2. C.B.Gupta &N.P.Srinivasan, “Entrepreneurial Development”, Sultan Chand & Sons New Delhi,

Revised edition, 2010.

3. Mathew J Manimala,“Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads: Paradigms and Praxis”, Dreamtech

Press, 2nd edition, 2006.

4. Rabindra N. Kanungo, “Entrepreneurship and innovation”, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 1998.

5. P.C Jain,EDII, “Hand Book for New Entrepreneurs”, Oxford University Press, 2012.

6. Kuratko & Hodgetts, “Entrepreneurship – Theory, Process and Practice”, Cengage Learning,8th

edition, 2008.

15MEC12 : FRACTURE MECHANICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The student will learn to:

Define the near field equations to determine the stress-strain and load-displacement fields around a

crack tip for linear elastic cases.

Identify and formulate the stress intensity factor (k) for typical crack configurations.

Identify and formulate the strain energy release rate (G).

91

Identify and formulate J-integral and the stress and strain fields around a crack tip for non-linear and

elasto plastic materials.

Predict the fatigue life of structures using fracture mechanics approaches.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Acquire fundamental understanding of the fracture of solid materials.

Develop detailed understanding of fracture mechanics, creep and fatigue.

Acquire basic understanding of the techniques used to perform failure analysis.

Learn about large variety of fracture mechanisms and fracture modes associated with failure.

Become intimately familiar with macro fractographic and micro fractographic analysis of failures.

Apply understanding to relevant case studies.


Basics of Ductile Material, Brittle Material.

Rigid body Mechanics, Deformable body Mechanics.

Elasticity, Dynamics, Failure theory.


Ductile fracture - brittle fracture – cleavage – fractography - ductile-brittle transition - fracture mechanics

approach to design - energy criterion - stress intensity approach - time dependent crack growth and damage.

UNIT II LINEAR ELASTIC FRACTURE MECHANICS 9

Griffith theory - elastic stress field around a crack tip - modes of fracture - stress intensity factor - method of

complex potential for plane elasticity - airy stress function - energy release rate - instability and R-curve -

stress analysis of cracks - stress intensity factor - K-threshold - crack growth instability analysis - crack tip

stress analysis.

UNIT III ELASTIC PLASTIC FRACTURE MECHANICS 9

Irwin’s adjusted stress intensity factor approach - K resistance curve approach - crack tip opening

displacement criterion - crack tip opening angle criterion - K resistance curve approach - J integral -

relationship between J and CTOD.

UNIT IV DYNAMIC AND TIME-DEPENDENT FRACTURE 9

Dynamic fracture - energy concept - crack tip energy flux integral - steady crack growth - path independent

integral - elastic crack growth at constant speed - rapid loading of a stationary crack - rapid crack propagation

- dynamic contour integral - creep crack growth- C Integral - visco elastic fracture mechanics - viscoelastic J

integral.

UNIT V FAILURE ANALYSIS TOOLS 9

Reliability concept and hazard function - life prediction - life extension - application of Poisson - exponential

and Weibull distribution for reliability - bath tub curve - parallel and series system – MTBF – MTTR - FMEA

definition - Design FMEA - Process FMEA - failure cause analysis - modes - ranks of failure modes - fault

tree analysis - industrial case studies/projects on FMEA.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. C.T.Sun, Z.H.Jin, “Fracture Mechanics”, Elsevier India Pvt.ltd, 2012.

2. Michael F Ashby, “Material Selection in Mechanical Design”, Butterworth – Heinemann, 3rd Edition,

2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bahram Farahmand, “Fracture Mechanics of Metals, Composites, Welds, and Bolted Joints:

Application of LEFM, EPFM, AND FMDM Theory”, Springer, 2000.

2. T.L. Anderson, “Fracture Mechanics – Fundamentals and Applications”, 3rd Edition, CRC Press LLC,

92

2005.

3. Tribikram Kundu, “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2008.

4. Shigley and Mische, “Mechanical Engineering Design”, McGraw Hill Inc, New York, 9th Edition, 2010.

5. Dietmar Gross and Thomas Seelig, “Fracture Mechanics with an Introduction to Micromechanics”,

Springer - Netherlands, 2006.

15MEC13 : GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basic difference between incompressible and compressible flow.

To understand the phenomenon of shock waves and its effect on flow.

To gain some basic knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the principles of compressible and isentropic flow..

Understand the principle of flow through ducts.

Apply the principles of normal and oblique shocks.

Understand and analyze the phenomenon of jet propulsion.

Understand and analyze the phenomenon of Rocket Propulsion.

COURSE PREREQUISITE

Physics.

Mathematics.

Fluid Mechanics.

Thermodynamics.

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 6

Energy and momentum equations of compressible fluid flows – Stagnation states, Mach waves and Mach

cone – Effect of Mach number on compressibility – Isentropic flow through variable ducts – Nozzles and

Diffusers – Use of Gas tables.

UNIT II FLOW THROUGH DUCTS 9

Flows through constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow) and Friction (Fanno flow) – variation of

flow properties – Use of tables and charts – Generalised gas dynamics.

UNIT III NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 10

Governing equations – Variation of flow parameters across the normal and oblique shocks – Prandtl – Meyer

relations – Use of table and charts – Applications.

UNIT IV JET PROPULSION 10

Theory of jet propulsion – Thrust equation – Thrust power and propulsive efficiency – Operation, principle,

cycle analysis and use of stagnation state- performance of ram jet, turbojet, turbofan and turbo prop engines.

UNIT V SPACE PROPULSION 10

Types of rocket engines – Propellants-feeding systems – Ignition and combustion – Theory of rocket

propulsion – effective jet velocity, specific impulse- Performance study – Flow through rocket nozzles – mass

ratio and propellant mass fraction- Staging – Terminal and characteristic velocity – Vertical flight of a rocket:

powered flight and coasting flight – Rocket applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

93

1. Anderson, J.D., “Modern Compressible flow”, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition 2003

2. Yahya S.M. “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow”, New Age International (P) Limited New Delhi, 4th

Edition 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Hill P. and Peterson C., “Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion”, Addison – Wesley

Publishing company, 2nd edition 2011.

2. Zucrow N.J., “Aircraft and Missile Propulsion”, vol.1 & II, John Wiley, 1975.

3. Zucrow N.J., “Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines”, John Wiley, New York, 1970.

4. Sutton G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John, wiley, 7th edition, 2010 New York.

5. Shapiro A.H., “Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible fluid Flow”, John wiley, 1953, New

York.

6. Ganesan V., Gas Turbines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 3rd Edition 2010.

7. Somasundaram PR.S.L, “Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsions”, New Age International Publishers,

1996.

8. Babu V., “Fundamentals of Gas Dynamics”, ANE Books India, 2008.

WEB REFERENCES:

NPTEL Video lectures

15MEC14 : INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the various modes of wear: adhesive, delamination, fretting, abrasive, erosive,

corrosive, oxidational (mild and severe), melt, and the wear-mechanism maps.

To study about surface topography, physico-chemical aspects of solid surfaces, and surface

interactions.

To analyze the mechanics of solid elastic and elastoplastic contacts.

To recognize the laws of friction, mechanisms of friction, friction sp-ace, stick slip, and surface

temperature.

To identify types of lubrication: boundary, solid-film, hydrodynamic, and hydrostatic lubrication.

To explore the design of tribological surfaces and how to troubleshoot tribology problems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Describe surface topography, physico-chemical aspects of solid surfaces, and surface interactions.

Analyse the mechanics of solid elastic and elastoplastic contacts.

Recognize the laws of friction, mechanisms of friction, friction space, stick slip, and surface

temperature.

Identify types of lubrication: boundary, solid-film, hydrodynamic, and hydrostatic lubrication.

Examine applications/case studies: sliding contacts, rolling contacts, bearing design, coating

selection, and lubrication.

Explore the design of tribological surfaces and how to troubleshoot tribology problems.

Survey tribological testing devices and testing design.


Surface roughness and its measurement.

Viscous flow.

Corrosion and its prevention.

Low friction materials.

94

UNIT I SURFACES AND FRICTION 9

Topography of engineering surfaces- Contact between surfaces - Sources of sliding friction – Adhesion-

Ploughing- Energy dissipation mechanisms friction characteristics of metals - Friction of non-metals. Friction of

lamellar solids - friction of Ceramic materials and polymers - Rolling friction - Source of rolling friction – Stick

slip motion - Sources of measurement of friction.

UNIT II WEAR 9

Types of wear - Simple theory of Sliding Wear Mechanism of sliding wear of metals - Abrasive wear –

Materials for Adhesive and Abrasive wear situations - Corrosive wear - Surface Fatigue wear situations -

Brittle Fracture - wear - Wear of Ceramics and Polymers - Wear Measurements.

UNIT III LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION TYPES 9

Types and properties of Lubricants - Testing methods - Hydrodynamic Lubrication – Elasto-hydrodynamic

lubrication- Boundary Lubrication - Solid Lubrication- Hydrostatic Lubrication.

UNIT IV FILM LUBRICATION THEORY 9

Fluid film in simple shear - Viscous flow between very close parallel plates - Shear stress variation - Reynolds

equation for film Lubrication - High speed unloaded journal bearings - Loaded journal bearings – Reaction

torque on the bearings - Virtual Co-efficient of friction - The Sommerfield diagram.

UNIT V SURFACE ENGINEERING AND MATERIALS FOR BEARINGS 9

Surface modifications - Transformation Hardening, surface fusion - Thermo chemical processes – Surface

coatings - Plating and anodizing - Fusion Processes – Vapour Phase processes - Materials for rolling Element

bearings - Materials for fluid film bearings - Materials for marginally lubricated and dry bearings.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hutchings M., “Tribology Friction and wear of Engineering Materials”, Edward Arnold, London, 1992.

2. Williams.J.A, “Engineering Tribology”, Cambridge University Press, 2010.

3. A.Harnoy, “Bearing Design in Machinery”, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Majumdar, “Introduction of Tribology and bearings”, A.H. Wheeler Co, 2010.

2. Ncalc, Newncs, “Tribology Hand Book”, Butterworths, 1975.

3. Dudley D. Fuller, “Theory and practice of Lubrication for Engineers”, John Wiley and Sons, 1984.

4. Cameron A., “Basic Lubrication Theory”, Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1987.

5. Bharath Bhushan & Gupta B.K., “Hand book of Tribology”, Mc Graw Hill Inc., 1997.

6. E.P.Bowden and Tabor.D. “Friction and Lubrication ", Heinemann Educational Books Ltd., 1974.

7. M.M.Khonsari & E.R.Booser, “Applied Tribology”, John Willey & Sons, New York, 2001.

15MEC15 : MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the student to understand the principles, functions and practices adopted in industry for the

successful management of maintenance activities.

To explain the different maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance, condition monitoring

and repair of machine elements.

To illustrate some of the simple instruments used for condition monitoring in industry.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

The students will be able to understand the maintenance activities in industry and can build

95

successful management for maintenance activities.

The students can explain the maintenance strategies and the process of achieving them in various

industry sectors.

The students understand and apply the principles of temperature analysis for machinery condition

monitoring for predictive maintenance.


Total Quality Management.

Basic knowledge on functioning of various machineries.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING 9

Basic Principles of maintenance planning – Objectives and principles of planned maintenance activity –

Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliability and machine availability – MTBF, MTTR

and MWT – Factors of availability – Maintenance organization – Maintenance economics.

UNIT II MAINTENANCE POLICIES – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 9

Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance, maintenance

schedules, repair cycle - Principles and methods of lubrication – TPM.

UNIT III CONDITION MONITORING 9

Condition Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without Condition Monitoring – On-load testing and off- load

testing – Methods and instruments for Condition Monitoring – Temperature sensitive tapes – Pistol

thermometers – wear-debris analysis

UNIT IV REPAIR METHODS FOR BASIC MACHINE ELEMENTS 10

Repair methods for beds, slideways, spindles, gears, lead screws and bearings – Failure analysis – Failures

and their development – Logical fault location methods – Sequential fault location.

UNIT V REPAIR METHODS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 8

Repair methods for Material handling equipment - Equipment records –Job order systems -Use of computers

in maintenance.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sushil Kumar Srivastava, " Maintenance Engineering Principles, Practices & Management”, S.Chand

and Co Ltd., 1st Edition (reprint), 2012.

2. Bhattacharya S.N., "Installation, Servicing and Maintenance", S. Chand and Co., 2nd Edition, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Garg H.P., "Industrial Maintenance", S. Chand & Co., 1st Edition, 2010.

2. Higgins L.R., "Maintenance Engineering Hand book", McGraw Hill, 8th Edition, 2014.

3. Davies, "Handbook of Condition Monitoring – techniques and Methodology", 1st Edition, Springer

Science & Business Media, 1st Edition, 2012.

4. "Advances in Plant Engineering and Management", Seminar Proceedings - IIPE, 1996.

15MEC16 : MARKETING MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To acquire knowledge on

96

Customer needs and market a product successfully and profitably.

Customer behaviour based on geographic and psychological behaviour.

Product Pricing and marketing planning and strategy.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course the students are able to

Have a thorough knowledge about the marketing process.

Understand the needs of the customer.

Have a deep understanding about Product Pricing, Marketing planning and Research.

Understand the need for advertising and a good supply chain.


Basic knowledge on Production process and Process activities.

Cost analysis and Cost control.

UNIT I MARKETING PROCESS 9

Definition, Marketing process, dynamics, needs, wants and demands, marketing concepts, environment, mix,

types. Philosophies, selling versus marketing, organizations, industrial versus consumer marketing, consumer

goods, industrial goods, product hierarchy.

UNIT II BUYING BEHAVIOUR AND MARKET SEGMENTATION 9

Cultural, demographic factors, motives, types, buying decisions, segmentation factors - demographic -Psycho

graphic and geographic segmentation, process, patterns.

UNIT III PRODUCT PRICING AND MARKETING RESEARCH 9

Objectives, pricing, decisions and pricing methods, pricing management. Introduction, uses, process of

marketing research.

UNIT IV MARKETING PLANNING AND STRATEGY FORMULATION 9

Components of marketing plan-strategy formulations and the marketing process, implementations, portfolio

analysis, BCG, GEC grids.

UNIT V ADVERTISING, SALES PROMOTION AND DISTRIBUTION 9

Characteristics, impact, goals, types, and sales promotions- point of purchase- unique selling proposition.

Characteristics, wholesaling, retailing, channel design, logistics, and modern trends in retailing.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Govindarajan M. “Marketing management – concepts, cases, challenges and trends”, Prentice hall of

India, 2nd Edition 2007.

2. Philip Kolter, Koshy Jha. “Marketing Management”, Pearson Education, Indian adapted Edition, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ramasamy and Nama kumari. “Marketing Environment: Planning, implementation and control the

Indian context”, McMillan, 2012.

2. Czinkota & Kotabe. “Marketing management”, Thomson learning, Indian Edition, 2007.

3. Adrain palmer. “Introduction to marketing theory and practice”, Oxford university press, Indian

Edition, 2004.

4. Donald S. Tull and Hawkins. “Marketing Research”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.

97

5. Philip Kotler and Gary Armstrong. “Principles of Marketing” Prentice Hall of India, 2000.

6. Steven J.Skinner, “Marketing”, All India Publishers and Distributers Limited, 2007.

7. Graeme Drummond and John Ensor. “Introduction to marketing concepts”, Elsevier, Indian Reprint,

2007.

15MEC17 : MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To integrate the knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices.

To understand the rudiments of Microfabrication techniques.

To Identify and understand the various sensors and actuators.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course the students are able to

Apply MEMS to disciplines beyond Mechanical &Electrical engineering.

Describe the physical, chemical, biological, and engineering principles involved in the design and

operation of current and future micro devices.

Critically analyse the microsystems technology for technical feasibility as well as practicality.

Describe the limitations and current challenges in microsystems engineering.


Semiconductor Physics.

Mechanics of materials.

Micromachining.

Acoustics and Transducers.


MEMS and microsystems – miniaturization - typical products - micro sensors - micro actuation - MEMS with

micro actuators – micro accelerometers and micro fluids - MEMS materials - micro fabrication.

UNIT II MECHANICS FOR MEMS DESIGN 09

Elasticity – stress - strain and material properties - bending of thin plates - spring configurations - torsional

deflection - mechanical vibration – resonance – thermos mechanics – actuators - force and response time -

fracture and thin film mechanics.

UNIT III ELECTRO STATIC DESIGN 09

Basic theory - electro static instability - surface tension - gap and finger pull up - electro static actuators - comb

generators - gap closers - rotary motors - inch worms – electro-magnetic actuators - bistable actuators.

UNIT IV CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM ISSUES 09

Electronic interfaces – feed-back systems – noise - circuit and system issues - case studies – capacitive

accelerometer - Piezo electric pressure sensor - thermal sensor - radiation sensors - mechanical sensors -

bio-chemical sensors - modeling of MEMS systems - CAD for MEMS.

UNIT V OPTICAL AND RF MEMS 09

Optical MEMS, system design basics – Gaussian optics - matrix operations - resolution, case studies - MEMS

scanners and retinal scanning – display - digital micro mirror devices - RF MEMS- design basics - case study-

capacitive RF MEMS switch - performance issues.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Tai- Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsytems Design and Manufacture”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

98

2. Vijay Vardan, “MEMS”, Wiley Publication, 2002.

3. Nitaigour Mahalik, “MEMS”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.

4. Rai Chaoudhary, “MEMS and MOEMS Technology and Applications”, PHI Learning, 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Stephen D. Senturia, “Microsystem Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2005.

2. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC Press, 2011.

3. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson Education Inc, 2006.

15MEC18 : NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


To study and understand the various Non-Destructive Testing methods for the detection of

manufacturing defects.

To study the various mechanisms involved in NDT techniques.

To know the industrial applications of NDT and recent trends in NDT.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Remember the principles of various NDT techniques.

Understandthe equipment required for the NDT.

Analyze the mechanism involved in there NDT techniques.

Apply the recent trends in NDT.


Basics of Metallurgy.

Physical properties and characteristics of materials.

Joining process during fabrication.

Types of defects and Discontinuities.


NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the detection of

manufacturing defects as well as material characterisation. Relative merits and limitations, Various physical

characteristics of materials and their applications in NDT. Visual inspection – Unaided and aided.

UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTS 8

Liquid Penetrant Testing - Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants, developers, advantages and

limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of results. Leak testing standards, types and

industrial applications.

Magnetic Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials Magnetisation methods, Interpretation

and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of demagnetization, Residual magnetism.

UNIT III THERMOGRAPHY AND EDDY CURRENT TESTING (ET) 10

Thermography- Principles, Contact and non - contact inspection methods, Techniques for applying liquid

crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors, Instrumentations and methods,

applications.

Eddy Current Testing-Generation of eddy currents, Properties of eddy currents, Eddy current sensing

elements, Probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, Applications, advantages, Limitations,

Interpretation/Evaluation.

UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING (UT) AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION (AE) 10

Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmission and pulse-echo method, straight beam and angle

99

beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Array Ultrasound, Time of Flight

Diffraction.

Acoustic Emission Technique –Principle, AE parameters, Applications.

UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY (RT) 10

Principle, interaction of X-Ray with matter, imaging, film and film less techniques, types and use of filters and

screens, geometric factors, Inverse square, law, characteristics of films - graininess, density, speed, contrast,

characteristic curves, Penetrameters, Exposure charts, Radiographic equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xerox-

Radiography, Computed Radiography, Computed Tomography.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Jayamangal Prasad, C. G. Krishnadas Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials”, Tata

McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.

2. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, New Age International Publishers, 1st revised

Edition, 2010.

3. Barry Hull and Vernon John, “Non Destructive Testing”, MacMillan, 1988.

4. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu, “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”, Narosa Publishing

House, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. ASM Metals Handbook, “Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American Society of

Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 200, Volume-17.

2. Paul E Mix, “Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide”, Wiley, 2nd edition New Jersey,

2005.

3. Charles, J. Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive evaluation”, McGraw Hill, New York 2001.

4. ASNT, American Society for Non Destructive Testing, Columbus, Ohio, NDT Handbook, Vol. 1, Leak

Testing, Vol. 2, Liquid Penetrant Testing, Vol. 3, Infrared and Thermal Testing Vol. 4, Radiographic

Testing, Vol. 5, Electromagnetic Testing, Vol. 6, Acoustic Emission Testing, Vol. 7, Ultrasonic

Testing.

5. Progress in Acoustic Emission, “Proceedings of 10th International Acoustic Emission Symposium",

Japanese Society for NDI, 1990.

6. American Society of Metals, Metals Hand Book, 9th Edition, Volume 11 (1980).

7. Birchan, D, “Non Destructive Testing”, Oxford University Press, 1977.

8. Holler, P, “New Procedures in Non-Destructive Testing” Springer Verlag, 1983.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.metrologytooling.com

2. http://www.sisndt.com

3. http://www.iuk'tu-harburg.de

15MEC19 : NUCLEAR ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge about nuclear physics and nuclear fuels.

To understand the need for nuclear fuel reprocessing and methods for reprocessing.

To gain knowledge about various types of nuclear reactors and safe disposal of nuclear wastes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Students will be able to understand about nuclear physics, nuclear fuels and their importance.

Appreciate nuclear fuel reprocessing and methods for nuclear fuel reprocessing.

Gain an understanding about nuclear reactors and safe disposal of nuclear wastes.

100


Basics of Atom models.

Radiation techniques, Nuclear reactions and Nuclear waste.

Explosive and Non-explosive solid materials.

Heat Transfer techniques.

UNIT I NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND INTRODUCTION 9

Nuclear model of an atom-Equivalence of mass and energy-binding- radio activity-half life-neutron

interactions-cross sections. Introduction – World Energy Sources, Indian Power Scenario, Nuclear Power

Scenario in the World, Nuclear Power Scenario in India.

UNIT II NUCLEAR REACTIONS AND REACTION MATERIALS 9

Mechanism of nuclear fission and fusion- radio activity- chain reactions-critical mass and composition-nuclear

fuel cycles and its characteristics-uranium production and purification-Zirconium, thorium, beryllium.

Moderator, Coolant & Control materials, their material properties and irradiation effects.

UNIT III REPROCESSING 9

Reprocessing: nuclear fuel cycles-spent fuel characteristics-role of solvent extraction in reprocessing-solvent

extraction equipment.

UNIT IV NUCLEAR REACTOR 9

Nuclear reactors: types of fast breeding reactors-design and construction of fast breeding reactors-heat

transfer techniques in nuclear reactors- reactor shielding. Fusion reactors. .Heat transfer techniques in nuclear

reactors. Nuclear Reactor Thermal-Hydraulics.

UNIT V SAFETY AND DISPOSAL 9

Safety and disposal: Nuclear plant safety-safety systems-changes and consequences of accident-criteria for

safety-nuclear waste-types of waste and its disposal-radiation hazards and their prevention-weapons

proliferation. International convention on safety aspects.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Thomas J.Connoly, “Fundamentals of nuclear Engineering”, John Wiley, 1978.

2. Duderstadt, J.J. and L.J. Hamilton, “Nuclear Reactor Analysis”, John Wiley, 1976.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Collier J.G., and Hewitt G.F, “Introduction to Nuclear power”, Hemisphere publishing, New York.

2000.

2. M.M.Ei.Wakil, ‘Nuclear power Engineering’, McGraw hill book Company,New York, 1987.

3. Wakil M.M.El., “Power Plant Technology”, McGraw-Hill International, 1988.

15MEC20 : PLANT LAYOUT AND MATERIAL HANDLING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

101

To impart with the knowledge to create a plant layout at different locations and working conditions.

To expose the students about the work conditions such as ventilation, comfort, lighting and its effect

in diverse industrial situations.

To give a good exposure to manual material handling and lifting techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

The students will be able to identify equipment requirements for a specific process at different

locations and diverse working conditions.

The students will be able to understand the significance of an effective material handling system.

The students will be able to recognize the effect of process layout on the material handling system.


Basic knowledge about various Industries.

Safety Aspects.

Ergonomics.

Material handling systems.

UNIT I PLANT LOCATION 9

Selection of plant locations, territorial parameters, considerations of land, water, electricity, location for waste

treatment and disposal, Safe location of chemical storages, explosives and propellants.

UNIT II PLANT LAYOUT 9

General layout, equipment layout, safety system, fire hydrant locations, fire service rooms, facilities for safe

effluent disposal and treatment tanks, site considerations, approach roads, plant railway lines, security towers.

Layout for process industries, engineering industry, construction sites, pharmaceuticals, pesticides, fertilizers,

refineries, food processing, nuclear power stations, thermal power stations, metal powders manufacturing,

fireworks and match works.

UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9

Principles of good ventilation, purpose, physiological and comfort level types, local and exhaust ventilation,

hood and duct design, air conditioning, ventilation standards, application.

Purpose of lighting, types, advantages of good illumination, glare and its effect, lighting requirements for

various work, standards- Housekeeping, principles of 5S.

UNIT IV MANUAL MATERIAL HANDLING AND LIFTING TACKLES 8

Preventing common injuries, lifting by hand, team lifting and carrying, handling specific shape machines and

other heavy objects – accessories for manual handling, hand tools, jacks, hand trucks, dollies and wheel

barrows – storage of specific materials - problems with hazardous materials, liquids, solids – storage and

handling of cryogenic liquids - shipping and receiving, stock picking, dock boards, machine and tools, steel

strapping and sacking, glass and nails, pitch and glue, boxes and cartons and car loading – personal

protection – ergonomic considerations.

Fiber rope, types, strength and working load inspection, rope in use, rope in storage - wire rope, construction,

design factors, deterioration causes, sheaves and drums, lubrication, overloading, rope fitting, inspection and

replacement – slings, types, method of attachment, rated capacities, alloy chain slings, hooks and attachment,

inspection.

UNIT V MECHANICAL MATERIAL HANDLING 10

Hoisting apparatus, types - cranes, types, design and construction, guards and limit devices, signals, operating

102

rules, maintenance safety rules, inspection and inspection checklist – conveyors, precautions, types,

applications.

Powered industrial trucks, requirements, operating principles, operators selection and training and

performance test, inspection and maintenance, electric trucks, gasoline operated trucks, LPG trucks – power

elevators, types of drives, hoist way and machine room emergency procedure, requirements for the

handicapped, types- Escalator, safety devices and brakes, moving walks – man lifts, construction, brakes,

inspection.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Alexandrov. M.P. “Material Handling Equipment” Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1981.

2. Apple M. James “Plant Layout and Material Handling”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1977.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Spivakosky, “Conveyors and Related Equipment”, Vol.I & II Peace Publishers. Moscow, 1982.

2. Rudenko, N., “Material Handling Equipments”, Mir Publishers, 1981.

3. Reymond, A.Kulwice, “Material Handling Hand Book - II”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1985.

15MEC21 : PRESSURE VESSELS AND PIPING DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know the various components involved in Pressure vessels and piping.

To understand the different types of stresses and their effects in pressure vessel.

To understand the piping layout and the stresses acting on it.

To evaluate the geometry and dimensions of pressure vessels and piping design.

To identify and correct the design errors and create the safe working environment.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the specifications of different pressure vessel and apply appropriately according to the

standards.

Analyze columns and pressure vessels under various loadings.

Apply thin-walled pressure vessel formulas to determine transverse and longitudinal membrane

stresses in vessels of various configurations.

Develop an understanding of analytic methods used in connection with the structural design of

columns, long mechanical members under compression and pressure vessels.

Design of piping for various conditions of fluid flow and transmission.


Design of Machine Elements.

Theories of Failure.

Strength of Materials.

UNIT I DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS 9

Introduction - classification of pressure vessel - design considerations - material selection - factors influencing

of design of vessel - fabrication aspects - inspection-fault and failures in pressure vessel -Design of tall

cylindrical self - supporting process columns – supports for short vertical vessels – stress concentration at a

variable thickness transition section in a cylindrical vessel - about a circular hole, elliptical openings - theory of

reinforcement – ASME Standard.

103

UNIT II CYLINDRICAL SHELL AND VARIOUS CLOSURES 9

Membrane theory for thin shells - stresses in cylindrical, spherical and conical shells - dilation of above shells -

general theory of membrane stresses in vessel under internal pressure and its application to ellipsoidal and

torispherical end closures - bending of circular plates - determination of stresses in simply supported and

clamped circular plate - Introduction to ASME code and formulae.

UNIT III JUNCTION STRESSES, OPENING AND REINFORCEMENTS 9

Stresses in pressure vessels - discontinuity stresses – thermal stresses - methods for determining stresses -

stress concentration in plate having circular hole due to bi-axial loading - Theory of reinforced opening and

reinforcement limits

UNIT IV BUCKLING IN VESSELS 9

Buckling of vessels under external pressure - elastic buckling of long cylinders - buckling modes - collapse

under external pressure - design for stiffening rings - buckling under combined external pressure and axial

loading.

UNIT V PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS 9

Flow diagram - piping layout and piping stress analysis - Flexibility factor and stress intensification factor -

Design of piping system as per B31.1 piping code - Piping components – bends, tees, bellows and valves -

Types of piping supports and their behavior – Piping codes.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Harvey, John F. “Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels” CBS Publishers & Distributors, Daryaganj,

New Delhi (India), 2001.

2. Brownell. L. E & Young. E. H, “Process equipment design”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., India, 1983.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. ASME Pressure Vessel and Boiler code, Section VIII Div 1 & 2, 2003 American standard code for

pressure piping, B 31.1.

2. Henry H Bednar, “Pressure vessel Design Hand book”, CBS publishers and distributors, 1991.

3. Stanley M Wales, “Chemical Process equipment, selection and design, Butterworth’s, series in

Chemical Engineering”,1990.

EXTENSIVE READING

1. William.J, Bees,"Approximate methods in the Design and Analysis of pressure vessels and piping",

ASME Pressure vessels and piping conference, Orlando, Florida, 1997.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.onesmartclick.com/engineering/pressurevessel-design.html

2. http://www.learningace.com

15MEC22 : PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the concepts of flying, International standard atmosphere, structural aspects of

airplanes.

Brief description of systems, instruments and power plants used in airplanes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

The student will understand and get knowledge of the history of aviation.

The student will able to apply concepts from mathematics and physics to aviation scenarios.

Students will understand the progression of materials development and changes in structural designs

104

as they apply to aerospace vehicles.

Students will identify variation in physical, mechanical, and chemical properties of materials and how

these properties affect their use and application.


Mechanical behaviour of Solids and Structures.

Engineering Materials and properties.

Composite Materials.

Compressibility effects and viscous effects.

UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8

Balloon flight – Ornithopters - Early airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes, Developments in

aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.

UNIT II BASIC OF FLIGHT MECHANICS 9

Physical properties and structure of the atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude relationships,

Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics - Evolution of lift, drag and moment. Aerofoils, Mach number,

Manoeuvres.

UNIT III AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION 10

Different types of flight vehicles, classifications. Components of an airplane and their functions. Conventional

control, Powered control, Basic instruments for flying - Typical systems for control actuation.

UNIT IV AIRPLANE STRUCTURES AND MATERIALS 9

General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, Typical wing and

fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials, Use of aluminium alloy, titanium, stainless steel and

composite materials - Stresses and strains – Hooke’s law – Stress - strain diagrams - elastic constants.

UNIT V POWER PLANTS 9

Basic ideas about piston, turboprop, and turbojet engines - Use of propeller and jets for thrust production -

Comparative merits - Principles of operation of rocket - types and applications- Exploration into space.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Anderson, J.D., “Introduction to Flight”, McGraw-Hill, 7th Edition, 2011.

2. Stephen. A. Brandt, Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd Edition, AIAA Education

Series, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOK:

1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.

15MEC23 : PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the process planning concepts.

To provide the details of ergonomics in workplace as well as equipment and plant design.

To make cost estimation for various products after process planning.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course students will be able

To learn about work study as to improve the productivity of any plant.

To understand the importance of ergonomics in workplace as well as equipment and plant design.

To design the plant layout to increase the productivity.

105

To apply motion economy principles to improve productivity.

To plan and schedule various plant operations.

To estimate the project cost and take make or buy decision.


Basics of various process.

Computer Integrated Manufacturing.

Manufacturing Technology.

UNIT I WORK STUDY AND ERGONOMICS 9

Method study – Definition – Objectives – Motion economy - Principles – Tools and techniques – Applications –

Work measurements – Purpose – Use – Procedure – Tools and techniques – Standard time – Ergonomics –

Principles – Applications.

UNIT II PROCESS PLANNING 9

Definition – Objective – Scope – Approaches to process planning – Process planning activities – Finished part

requirements – Operating sequences – Machine selection – Material selection parameters – Set of documents

for process planning – Developing manufacturing logic and knowledge – Production time calculation –

Selection of cost optimal processes.

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9

Objective of cost estimation – Costing – Cost accounting – Classification of cost – Elements of cost. Types of

estimates – Methods of estimates – Data requirements and sources – Collection of cost – Allowances in

estimation.

UNIT IV ESTIMATION OF COSTS IN DIFFERENT SHOP 9

Estimation in foundry shop – Pattern cost - Casting cost - Illustrative examples. Estimation in forging shop –

Losses in forging – Forging cost – Illustrative examples. Estimation in welding shop – Gas cutting – Electric

welding - Illustrative examples. Estimation in sheet metal shop – Shearing and forming - Illustrative examples.

UNIT V ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIMES AND COSTS 9

Estimation of machining time for lathe operations - Estimation of machining time for drilling, boring, shaping,

planning, milling and grinding operations - Illustrative examples.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sinha B. P., "Mechanical Estimating and Costing", Tata McGraw-Hill, Publishing Co, 1995.

2. Technical Teachers Training Institute, Madras, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing", Tata McGraw -

Hill, Publishing Co, 1stEdition, 2002.

3. Adithan M. S, Pabla, “Production Engineering Estimating and Costing”, Konark Publishers Pvt., Ltd,

1990.

4. Chitale A. K, Gupta R. C., “Product Design and Manufacturing“, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 6th

Edition, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Phillip F Ostwalal, Jairo Munez, "Manufacturing Processes and Systems", John Wiley, 9thEdition,

2008.

2. Russell R. S, Tailor B.W., "Operations Management", Prentice Hall of India, 7th Edition, 2010.

3. Chitale A. V, Gupta R. C., "Product Design and Manufacturing", Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,

2002.

4. Nanua Singh, “System Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing’, John Wiley &

Sons, New York, 2011.

106

5. Joseph G. Monks, “Theory and Problems of Operations Management”, McGraw Hill Book Company,

New Delhi, 2nd Edition 2004.

6. Narang G. B. S, Kumar V., “Production and Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1995.

7. Banga T. R, Sharma S. C., “Estimating and Costing“, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 16th Edition

2011.

8. CharyS. N., “Theory and Problems in Production and Operations Management“, Tata McGraw - Hill

Education,1st Edition, 1995.

9. CharyS. N., “Production and Operations Management”, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 5th Edition.

15MEC24 : PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the various components and functions of production planning and control such as

work study, product planning, process planning, production scheduling, inventory control.

To know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement planning (MRP II) and enterprise resource

planning (ERP).

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the concepts of production planning and control, product analysis and production

systems.

Become familiar with work study methods.

Understand the principles ofproduct planning, process planning, production scheduling, Inventory

Control.

Solve the problems related to inventory, BEP, Machine capacity.

Know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource

Planning (ERP).


Process Planning and Cost Estimation.

Computer Integrated Manufacturing.

Basics of Sequencing and Scheduling.

Basics of Work study.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PPC 9

Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control - Types of production – job-

batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect - Functional aspects-Operational

aspect-Durability and dependability aspect- Aesthetic aspect. Profit consideration-Standardization,

Simplification & Specialization-Break even analysis-Economics of a new design.

UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Method study, Basic procedure – Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -

Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study - Work measurement - Techniques of work

measurement - Time study – Performance rating – Activity sampling - Production study - Work sampling -

Synthesis from standard data - Predetermined motion time standards.

UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESSPLANNING 9

Product planning - Extending the original product information - Value analysis - Problems in lack of product

planning - Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process planning - Steps in

process planning - Quantity determination in batch production - Machine capacity, Line balancing-Analysis of

process capabilities in a multi-product system.

UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems - Loading and scheduling - Master scheduling - Scheduling rules - Gantt charts -

107

Perpetual loading - Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance - Flow production scheduling - Batch

production scheduling - Product sequencing - Production control systems - Periodic batch control - Material

requirement planning – Dispatching - Progress reporting and expediting -Manufacturing lead time - Master

production schedule along with lead time and MRP - Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.

UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control - Purpose of holding stock - Effect of demand on inventories - Ordering procedures. Two bin

system - Periodic review system – Fixed order quantity system - Ordering cycle system - Determination of

economic order quantity and economic lot size - ABC analysis - Recorder procedure - Elements of JIT -

Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, S. Chand, 2nd Edition, 2006.

2. James B Dilworth, “Operations Management: Design, Planning and Control for Manufacturing and

Services”, McGraw Hill, 1992.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Samuel Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Macmillan, 3rd Reprint Edition, 2007.

2. Elwood S. Buffa and Rakesh K. Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, John Wiley

and Sons, 8th Edition, 2011.

3. Jain K. C, Aggarwal L. N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”, 6thEdition,

Khanna Publishers, 2004.

4. Nair N. G., “Production and Operations Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.

5. Chary S. N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw Hill,

1995.

6. Hajra Choudhury S. K, Nirjhar Roy, Hajra Choudhury A. K., “Production Management”, Media

Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd, 1998.

15MEC25 : PROJECT MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basic concepts of project management and cost estimation functions.

To enable the students to effectively plan and complete a project.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Remember the basics of project management.

Plan and schedule a project.

Estimate the cost of a project.

Understand the Project Management and Information System.

Construct the audit report and evaluate the project.


Operations Research.

Process Planning and Cost Estimation.

Production Planning and Control.

Engineering Economics.

UNIT I PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Need – goals – evolution – different forms – project management in manufacturing, service and government

108

sectors; systems development cycle – project life cycle – conception phase : proposal, contracting – definition

phase – execution phase: production/build, implementation - operation phase – case study; Tools for project

planning – work break down structure, responsibility matrix, events and milestones, Gantt charts.

UNIT II PROJECT SCHEDULING 9

Network diagram – critical path – late times – slack – float - calendar scheduling; Time estimates – probability

of finishing by target completion date – meeting the target – simulating PERT network – criticisms of PERT;

CPM – time-cost relationship – reducing project duration – shortest duration – total project cost – scheduling

with resource constraints – resource loading and levelling – constrained resources; Introduction to GERT

Network, Case studies in PERT/CPM.

UNIT III PROJECT COST ESTIMATION 9

Process – classification – expert opinion, analogy, parametric estimate; cost engineering – example;

contingency amount ; elements of budgets and estimates – direct labour, direct non-labour, overhead, general

and administrative expenses, profit and total billing; project cost accounting and management information

systems – cost summaries,cost schedules and forecasts - case study.

UNIT IV PROJECT CONTROL AND PMIS 9

Cost accounting systems – project control process,project control emphasis – scope, change control, quality

control, schedule control, time buffers; performance analysis – cost, schedule , work package analysis,

performance indices, updating time estimates, technical performance measurement; performance index

monitoring – variance limits, controlling changes, contract administration, control problems, case study;

Functions – computer based PMI systems – web-based project management.

UNIT V PROJECT EVALUATION 9

Construction and use of audit report, Project audit life cycle, Essentials of audit and evaluation, Varieties of

project termination, the termination process, project extensions, The Final Report – A project history, Case

Studies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. John M Nicholas, “Project Management for Business and Technology”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2003.

2. Parameshwar P Iyer, “Engineering Project Management- with Case Studies”, Wheeler Publishing,

2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Anastasia Pagnoni, “Project Engineering – Computer Oriented Planning and Operational Decision

Making”, Springer Verlag, 2012.

2. Dennis Lock, “The Essentials of Project Management”, Gower Publishing Ltd., 3rd Edition, 2007.

3. Vasant Desai, “Project Management”, Himalaya Publishing House, 2001.

4. Joseph Phillips, “IT Project Management:On Track from Start to Finish”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd

Edition, 2010.

15MEC26 : REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the principles of operation in different Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems and its

components.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

109

After studying this course, students will be able to understand

The thermal comfort conditions with respect to temperature, humidity, human clothing & activities and

its impact on human comfort, productivity, and health.

The psychrometry and its application in HVAC engineering & design and will practice or observe

psychrometric measurements.

The engineering and operation of vapor compression, heat-driven refrigeration systems and

evaporative cooling systems.

The contemporary issues of ozone depletion and global warming potential with respect torefrigeration

systems.


Thermodynamics.

Fluid Mechanics.

Thermal Engineering.

UNIT I REFRIGERATION CYCLE 7

Review of thermodynamic principles of refrigeration. Carnot refrigeration cycle – Vapour compression

refrigeration cycle – use of P.H. charts – multistage and multiple evaporator systems – cascade system – COP

comparison. Air Refrigeration cycles.

UNIT II REFRIGERANTS AND SYSTEM COMPONENTS 10

Compressors – reciprocating and rotary (elementary treatment), Types of condensers, evaporators, cooling

towers – Functional aspects. Refrigerants – properties – selection of refrigerants, Alternate Refrigerants,

Cycling controls.

UNIT III PSYCHROMETRY 10

Psychrometric processes use of psychrometric charts – Grand and Room Sensible Heat Factors – bypass

factor – air washers, requirements of comfort air conditioning, summer and Winter Air conditioning.

UNIT IV AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 9

Cooling load calculation, working principles of – Centralized Air conditioning systems, Split, Ductable split,

Packaged Air conditioning, VAV & VRV Systems. Duct Design by equal friction method, Indoor Air quality

concepts.

UNIT V UNCONVENTIONAL REFRIGERATION CYCLES 9

Vapor Absorption system – Ejector jet, Steam jet refrigeration, thermo electric refrigeration. APPLICATIONS –

ice plant – food storage plants – milk – chilling plants.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Manohar Prasad, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, New Age International Publishers, 3rd Edition.

2. Arora C.P, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Roy. J. Dossat, “Principles of Refrigeration”, Pearson Education 1997.

2. Jordon and Priester, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi,

1985.

3. Stoecker N.F. and Jones, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, TMH, New Delhi, 1981.

15MEC27 : RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To instruct the importance of renewable energy and its utilization for the thermal and electrical energy

110

needs and also the environmental aspects of these resources.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the student is expected to

Understand and analyze the pattern of renewable energy resources.

Suggest the methodologies / technologies for its utilization.

Economics of the utilization and environmental merits.


Basics of Solar radiation.

Photovoltaic conversion.

Principles of Turbines.

Fundamental of Fuel cells.

UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar Radiation – Measurements of solar Radiation and sunshine – Solar Thermal Collectors – Flat Plate and

Concentrating Collectors – Solar Applications – fundamentals of photo Voltaic Conversion – solar Cells – PV

Systems – PV Applications.

UNIT II WIND ENERGY 9

Wind Data and Energy Estimation – wind Energy Conversion Systems – Wind Energy generators and its

performance – Wind Energy Storage – Applications – Hybrid systems.

UNIT III BIO - ENERGY 9

Biomass, Biogas, Source, Composition, Technology for utilization – Biomass direct combustion – Biomass

gasifier – Biogas plant – Digesters – Ethanol production – Bio diesel production and economics.

UNIT IV OTEC, TIDAL, GEOTHERMAL AND HYDEL ENERGY 9

Tidal energy – Wave energy – Data, Technology options – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Small hydro,

turbines – Geothermal energy sources, power plant and environmental issues.

UNIT V NEW ENERGY SOURCES 9

Hydrogen, generation, storage, transport and utilization, Applications: power generation, transport – Fuel cells

– technologies, types – economics and the power generation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. G.D. Rai, “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2011.

2. S.P. Sukhatme, “Solar Energy”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition,

2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press, U.K.,

3rd Edition, 2012.

2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 2015.

3. G.N. Tiwari, “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Narosa Publishing

House, New Delhi, 2012.

4. L.L. Freris, “Wind Energy Conversion systems”, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.

111

15MEC28 : RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand optimization of LPP using simplex and other methods to be applied in the Industrial

situations.

To understand network analysis of a Project Management and find shortest path of a Project.

To understand different types of Inventory Management and apply it to appropriate environments.

To understand individual and group replacement policy of an existing machines.

To understand queue discipline in different situations and solving it optimally.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Able to analyze and apply optimization techniques and solve Industrial Problems.

Able to find shortest path of a Project to complete it in a shortest time.

Understand and analyze different types of optimum Inventory levels for the practical problems.

Conduct replacement analysis and replace the existing machine in the appropriate time optimally.

Able to understand various queue disciplines and apply it according to respective environments.


Engineering Mathematics.

Strong skills in Operations analysis.

Reasoning skills and critical thinking.

Deductive problem solving abilities.

UNIT I LINEAR MODEL 12

The phases of OR study – Formation of an L.P Model- Graphical solution – Simplex algorithm – Artificial

variables technique.

UNIT II SPECIAL LINEAR MODELS &NETWORKS 12

Transportation problems- Assignment problems – Project network- CPM and PERT network- Critical path

Method.

UNIT III INVENTORY MODEL 12

Types of Inventory- EOQ – Deterministic inventory problems – Price breaks - Stochastic inventory problems-

selective inventory control techniques.

UNIT IV REPLACEMENT MODELS 12

Replacement of items that deteriorate with time – value of money changing with time – not changing with time

– optimum replacement policy – individual and group replacement. Sequencing problem: models with n jobs

with 2 machines – problem with n jobs with m machines.

UNIT V QUEUING THEORY 12

Queuing models – queuing systems and structures – notation –parameter – single server and multi-server

models – Poisson input – exponential service – constant rate service – infinite population.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hira and Gupta, “Problems in Operations Research”, S.Chand and Co, 3rd Edition, 2010.

2. Taha H.A, “Operation Research”, Pearson Education, 9th Edition, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Frederick S.Hiller and GeraldJ.Lieberman, “Introduction to Operations Research”, TMH (SIE) 8th

Edition, 2005.

2. J.K.Sharma, “Operations Research Theory and Applications”, Macmillan India, 3rd Edition, 2009.

3. Wayne L.Winston, “Operations Research Applications and Algorithms”, Thomson learning, 4th

112

Edition, 2007.

4. Panneerselvam, R. “Operations Research” Prentice Hall of India, 2006.

5. Wagner, H. M. “Principles of Operation Research with Applications to Managerial Decisions”,

Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2010.

15MEC29 : THERMAL TURBOMACHINES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To instruct the importance of the principles of various turbo machines.

To understand the principles, operations and applications of different types of turbo machinery

components.

To design the components of various system in turbomachines.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Have a fundamental understanding of basic concepts and operating principles of turbo machines.

Be able to understand the design procedure of centrifugal fans and blowers.

Recognize the importance of various turbo machineries such as compressors and turbines.

Acquire knowledge about principles, operations and applications of different types of turbo machinery

components.


Fluid Mechanics and Machinery.

Basics of compressors, fan and Turbine.

Principle and operation of Gas turbine.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES 9

Introduction to turbo machines, Energy transfer between fluid and rotor-classification of fluid machinery-

dimensionless parameters-specific speed-applications-stage velocity triangles-work and efficiency.

UNIT II CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND BLOWERS 9

Types- stage and design parameters-flow analysis in impeller blades-design procedure of centrifugal

fans and blowers- volute and diffusers, losses, characteristic curves and selection, fan drives and fan noise,

fan testing, blower regulations, throttling control.

UNIT III CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR 9

Construction details, design procedure of centrifugal compressor, impeller flow losses, slip factor, diffuser

analysis, losses and performance curves.

UNIT IV AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR 9

Stage velocity diagrams, enthalpy-entropy diagrams, design procedure of axial flow compressor, stage losses

and efficiency, work done simple stage design problems and performance characteristics.

UNIT V AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 9

Stage velocity diagrams, reaction stages, design procedure of axial and radial flow turbines, losses and

coefficients, blade design principles, testing and performance characteristics.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. Yahya, S.M., “Turbines, Compressors and Fans”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 4th

edition, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bruneck, “Fans”, Pergamom Press, 1973.

2. Earl Logan, Jr., “Handbook of Turbomachinery”, Marcel Dekker Inc., 2003.

3. Dixon, S.I., “Fluid Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Turbomachinery”, Pergamon Press, 2014.

113

4. Shepherd, D.G., “Principles of Turbomachinery”, Macmillan, 1969.

5. Stepanpff, A.J., “Blowers and Pumps”, John Wiley and Sons Inc. 2015.

6. Ganesan, V., “Gas Turbines”, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co., 3rd edition, 2010.

7. Gopalakrishnan .G and Prithvi Raj .D, “A Treatise on Turbo machines”, Scitech Publications

(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2008.

15MEC30 : TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT AND RELIABILITY

ENGINEERING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the concept of Statistical Quality Control.

To understand about Total Quality Management.

To learn the concept of reliability.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the importance of quality and the means to control it using SQC.

Be able to manage quality products in manufacturing sector.

Able to find out the reliability of a system and the ways of improving it.


Probability and Statistics.

Usage of various charts and tables.

Basics of Failure analysis.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR VARIABLES 9

Introduction, definition of quality, basic concept of quality, definition of SQC, benefits and limitation of SQC,

Quality assurance, Quality control, Quality cost-Variation in process causes of variation –Theory of control

chart- uses of control chart – Control chart for variables – X chart, R chart - process capability –simple

problems. Six sigma concepts.

UNIT II PROCESS CONTROL FOR ATTRIBUTES 9

Control chart for attributes –control chart for non-conforming– p chart and np chart – control chart for

nonconformities– C and U charts, State of control and process out of control identification in charts, pattern

study.

UNIT III PRINCIPLES OF TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9

Basic concepts of TQM - Definition of TQM – TQM; Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby;

Leadership – Strategic quality planning, Quality statements - Customer focus – Customer orientation,

Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention - Employee involvement – Motivation,

Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal - Continuous process

improvement – PDSA cycle, 5s, Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier

Rating.

UNIT IV LIFE TESTING - RELIABILITY 9

Life testing – Objective – failure data analysis, Mean failure rate, mean time to failure, mean time between

failure, hazard rate – Weibull model, system reliability, series, parallel and mixed configuration – Maintainability

114

and availability – simple problems. Acceptance sampling based on reliability test – O.C Curves.

UNIT V DESIGN FOR RELIABLITY 9

Reliability: improvements – techniques- use of Pareto analysis – design– redundancy unit and standby

redundancy – Optimization in reliability – Product design – Product analysis – Product development – Product

life cycles.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Douglas.C.Montgomery. “Statistical Quality Control: A Modern Introduction”, John Wiley, 7thEdition,

2013.

2. Dale H. Besterfield, Carol Besterfield-Michna, Glen H. Besterfield, Mary Besterfield-Sacre, Hermant

Urdhwareshe, Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised

3rdEdition, Indian Reprint, 2012.

3. L.S.Srinath, “Reliability Engineering”, East west press, 4thEdition, 2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. John.S. Oakland. “Statistical process control”, A Butterworth-Heinemann Title, 6thEdition, 2007.

2. Connor P.D.T.O. “Practical Reliability Engineering”, John Wiley, 5th Edition, 2012.

3. Eugene L. Grant, Richard S. Leavenworth “Statistical Quality Control”, McGraw-Hill, 7thEdition 2008

4. Monohar Mahajan. “Statistical Quality Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 3rdEdition, 2012.

5. Gupta. R.C.. “Statistical Quality control”, Khanna Publishers, 8th Edition, 2008.

6. Besterfield D.H. “Quality Improvement”, Prentice Hall, 9thEdition, 2013.

7. Sharma S.C. “Inspection Quality Control and Reliability”, Khanna Publishers, 1998.

15MEC31 : UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn about the fundamental principles of unconventional machining processes.

To impart knowledge about the effect of various process parameters and their influence on

performance characteristics.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

This course would make familiar of basic concepts in unconventional machining processes, their

development and applications.

Course would be helpful to understand the working principle behind different types of unconventional

machining processes.

Students would be trained to find innovative solutions for manufacturing complex profiles of difficult-

to-machine materials.

One would be able to make use of a suitable modern manufacturing technique for a component after

analyzing its design requirements and manufacturing attributes.


Manufacturing Technology - I & Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–I

Manufacturing Technology - II & Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–II


Drawbacks of Conventional Machining Processes- Need for Unconventional machining processes–

115

Characteristics of Non-conventional machining-Classification – Brief overview of all the Processes-

Comparative Analysis of Unconventional machining processes-physical parameters, shape capabilities,

process capability and process economy-Limitations.

UNIT II MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10

Abrasive Jet Machining – Water Jet Machining – Abrasive Water Jet Machining - Ultrasonic Machining.

Working Principles – Equipment used – Modelling of material removal-Process parameters – Material Removal

Rate - Variation in techniques used – Applications.

UNIT III ELECTRICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 8

Electric Discharge Machining (EDM) - working principle- equipment description-Process parameters-Surface

finish and Material Removal Rate – Types of Electrodes- Metallic, Non-metallic, Combined electrodes – Power

and control circuits-Tool wear – Dielectric – Flushing Techniques- Pressure Flushing-Vacuum Flushing-Side

Flushing– Wire cut EDM – Applications.

UNIT IV CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO-CHEMICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10

Chemical Machining and Electro-Chemical Machining (CHM and ECM)-Etchants- Maskants - Techniques of

applying maskants-Process parameters – Surface finish and MRR-Applications. Principles of ECM-

Equipments-Surface roughness and MRR- Electrical circuit-Process Parameters- Electro-Chemical Grinding

and Electro-Chemical Honing- Applications.

UNIT V THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10

Laser Beam Machining and drilling (LBM)-Lasing Materials- Equipment-Process parameters-Applications,

Plasma Arc Machining (PAM)-Plasma torch-Transferred Arc mode- Non-transferred arc mode-Applications.

Electron Beam Machining (EBM)- Principles – Equipment –Types - Beam control techniques – Applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. Jain, Vijay.K. “Advanced Machining Processes” Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Benedict G.F. “Nontraditional Manufacturing Processes” Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1987.

2. Pandey P.C. & Shan H.S. “Modern Machining Processes” Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.

3. Mc Geough, “Advanced Methods of Machining” Chapman and Hall, London, 1998.

4. Paul De Garmo, J.T.Black & Ronald A Kohser. “Material and Processes in Manufacturing” Prentice

Hall of India, New Delhi (11th Edition), 2011.

5. Mishra P.K. “Non-Conventional Machining”, The Institution of Engineers (India), Text Book Series,

Narosa Book Distributors Pvt. Ltd., 2006.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Mikell P. Groover. “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems”

John Wiley & Sons, 2010.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/.../pdf/LM-35.pdf

2. www.iitg.ac.in/spal/ME412M_NTM.ppt

15MEC32 : VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the sources of vibration and noise in automobiles.

To Design modifications to reduce the vibration and noise and improve the life of the Components.

Analysing natural frequencies analysis, transmission noise, aerodynamic noise etc.

116

Different application of engine noise and energy absorption.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course the students will be able to:

Derive the equations and could solve various problems of vibration dynamics of mechanical systems.

Understand about the basis of vibration and noise and its measurement.

Understand, explain and apply the mechanism behind the automotive noise sources and its analysis.

Control the vibration and analysing the shock absorber mechanism.

Control the sources of noise and analysing the same in enclosure and transmission through barriers.


Theory of Machines.

Basic knowledge of Automobiles, especially engine and combustions.

UNIT I BASICS OF VIBRATION 9

Introduction- classification of vibration: free and forced vibration - undamped and damped vibration - linear

and non-linear vibration - response of damped and undamped systems under harmonic force - analysis of

single degree and two degree of freedom systems – torsional Vibration - determination of natural frequencies.

UNIT II BASICS OF NOISE 9

Introduction – amplitude – frequency - wavelength and sound pressure level - addition – subtraction and

averaging decibel levels - noise dose level – legislation - measurement and analysis of noise - measurement

environment – equipment - frequency analysis - tracking analysis - sound quality analysis.

UNIT III AUTOMOTIVE NOISE SOURCES 9

Noise Characteristics of engines - engine overall noise levels - assessment of combustion noise - assessment

of mechanical noise - engine radiated noise - intake and exhaust noise – engine necessary contributed noise -

transmission noise - aerodynamic noise - tire noise - brake noise.

UNIT IV SOURCES OF VIBRATION AND CONTROL 9

Vibration isolation - tuned absorbers - un-tuned viscous dampers - damping treatments - application of

dynamic forces generated by IC engines - engine isolation - crank shaft damping - modal analysis of the mass

elastic model shock absorbers.

UNIT V SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL 9

Methods for control of engine noise - combustion noise - mechanical noise - predictive analysis - palliative

treatments and enclosures - automotive noise control principles - sound in enclosures - sound energy

absorption - sound transmission through barriers.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. Singiresu S.Rao., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson Education, 5thEdition, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Benson H. Tongue., “Principles of Vibrations”, Oxford University, 2nd Edition, 2007.

2. David Bies and Colin Hansen, “Engineering Noise Control – Theory and Practice”, E and FN Spon,

Taylore& Francise e-Library, 4thEdition, 2009.

3. William T. Thomson, Marie Dillon Dahleh, Chandramouli Padmanabhan, “Theory of Vibration with

Application”, Pearson Education, 5th Edition, 2011.

117

4. Bernard Challen and Rodica Baranescu., “Diesel Engine Reference Book”, SAE International, 2nd

Edition, 1999.

5. Julian Happian-Smith., “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”- Butterworth Heinemann, 2004.

6. Rao J.S and Gupta K., “Introductory course on Theory and Practice of Mechanical Vibration”, New

Age International Publications, 2nd Edition, 2010.

7. A.A. Shabana., “Theory of vibrations – An introduction”, Springer, 2nd Edition, 2010.

15MEC33 : WASTE MANAGEMENT AND ENERGY RECOVERY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide in depth knowledge in Principles of industrial waste management.

To achieve an understanding of characterization of waste.

To expose the students to various processing technologies of hazardous waste.

To provide wide exposure to the students about various waste disposal methods.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course students will be able

To list out the sources of industrial waste.

To understand the various properties of industrial waste and its characterization.

To understand the need for segregation of waste at source.

To evaluate the different waste processing technologies.

To list out various types of waste disposal methods.


Basic knowledge on Conventional and Non-conventional energy methods.

Environmental Engineering.

UNIT I SOURCES, CLASSIFICATION AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK 9

Types and Sources of solid and hazardous wastes - need for solid and hazardous waste management –

elements of integrated waste management and roles of stakeholders - Salient features of Indian legislations on

management and handling of municipal solid wastes, hazardous wastes, biomedical wastes, lead acid

batteries, electronic wastes , plastics and fly ash –financing waste management

UNIT II WASTE CHARACTERIZATION AND SOURCE REDUCTION 9

Waste generation rates and variation – composition- physical, chemical and biological properties of solid

waste- moisture content chemical composition-heat value Bulk and material density-Mechanical properties -

biodegradability– hazardous characteristics – TCLP tests – waste sampling and characterization plan - source

reduction of wastes –waste exchange – extended producer responsibility - Recycling and reuse.

UNIT III STORAGE, COLLECTION AND TRANSPORT OF WASTES 9

Handling and segregation of wastes at source – storage and collection of municipal solid wastes – Analysis of

Collection systems - need for transfer and transport – Transfer stations Optimizing waste allocation–

compatibility, storage, labelling and handling of hazardous wastes – hazardous waste manifests and transport.

UNIT IV WASTE PROCESSING TECHNOLOGIES 9

Objectives of waste processing – material separation and processing technologies-Conveying –shredding –

pulping -crushing –Binary separators-trommel screens-Reciprocating and disc screens-Float / sink separators-

air classifiers-magnet and electromechanical separators -biological and chemical conversion technologies –

methods and controls of composting- thermal conversion technologies and energy recovery – incineration –

solidification and stabilization of hazardous wastes - treatment of biomedical wastes.

UNIT V WASTE DISPOSAL 9

Waste disposal options – Disposal in landfills - Landfill Classification, types and methods – site selection -

design and operation of sanitary landfills, secure landfills and landfill bioreactors – leachate and landfill gas

118

management – landfill closure and environmental monitoring – Rehabilitation of open dumps – landfill

remediation-Integrated waste management.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. William A.Worrell W, P.Aarne Vesilind and Christian Ludwig”, Solid waste Engineering”, CL

Engineering, 3rd Edition, 2016.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Theisen and Samuel A, Vigil, “Integrated Solid Waste Management”,

1993.

2. Michael D. LaGrega, Philip L Buckingham, and Jeffrey C. Evans “Hazardous waste

Management”,Waveland press, 2nd edition, Reissued, 2010.

3. CPHEEO, “Manual on Municipal Solid waste management, Central Public Health and Environmental

Engineering Organisation, Government of India, New Delhi,2000.

4. George Tchobanoglous and Frank Kreith,”Handbook of solid waste management” Mc-Graw Hill,

2ndEdition, 2002.

119

ALLIED ELECTIVES – SYLLABUS

Offered by Civil Department

15CEA01 INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concept of sustainability.

To know environmental regulations.

To realize the environmental pollution

To understand the air pollution control methods

To know the principles of water treatment

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the students will be able to

Identify the importance of sustainability and its indicators, strategies and barriers.

Implement the environmental regulations, policies and Regulations for clean environment

Familiarize the pollution and its regulating standards

Apply the different air pollution control methods gases and particulates

Apply the principles of water treatment and recovery methods.


Knowledge on Environmental Science

UNIT I SUSTAINABILITY 9

Industrial activity and environment - Industrialization and sustainable development - Indicators of sustainability-

Sustainability strategies - Barriers to sustainability - Pollution prevention in achieving sustainability

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS 9

Prevention vs. control of industrial pollution - Environment policies and Regulations to encourage pollution

prevention - Environment friendly chemical processes - Regulations for clean environment and implications for

industries

UNIT III POLLUTION 9

Definition of pollutant - Types of pollution - Air - Water - Land - Noise - Adverse effects of pollutants eco system

and human health - Need for effluent treatment and toxicity control - Standards for portable water - Agricultural

and left-off streams- Air standards for cities - Industrial areas and Resorts.

UNIT IV AIR POLLUTION CONTROL METHODS 9

Particulate Emission Control- Gravitational Settling Chambers- Cyclone separators - Fabric filters - Electrostatic

Precipitators - Wet scrubbers - Absorbers - Control of sulphur di oxide - Oxides of nitrogen - Carbon monoxide

and hydrocarbons - Noise pollution measurements and its control.

UNIT V PRINCIPLES OF WATER TREATMENT 9

Primary, secondary and tertiary treatments - Advanced waste water treatments - Recovery of metals from

process effluents

120

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Bishop.P, "Pollution Prevention: Fundamentals and Practice", McGraw Hill International, McGraw Hill Book

Co., Singapore, 2010

2. Freeman.H.M, "Industrial Pollution Prevention Hand Book", McGraw Hill, 1995

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rose.G.R.D, “Air pollution and Industry”, Van No strand Reinhold Co., New York 1972

2. Pandey.G.N and Carney.G.C, “Environmental Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1989

3. James. G. Mann and Liu.Y.A, "Industrial Water Reuse and Waste WaterMinimization", McGraw Hill, 1999

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Kapoor.B.S, “Environmental Engineering”, 5th Edition, Khanna publishers,2012

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/

15CEA02 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the basic knowledge about the Engineering Seismology

To create the awareness about the earthquake recording instruments and seismic records

To instruct the knowledge about the earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment

To understand the various seismic hazard analysis

To introduce the different types of risk and vulnerability assessment

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Categorize the various components of engineering seismology

Identify the different types of seismic recording instruments

Classify the various earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment

Do the various seismic hazard analysis

Analyze the types of risk and vulnerability


Knowledge on basics on earthquake

UNIT I ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY 9

Introduction to engineering seismology - Terminologies and definitions - Earthquake types - Overview of plate

tectonics - Earthquake source mechanisms - Source models - Types of faults - Activity and fault studies -

Concepts of seismic magnitudes and intensity -Earthquake size, different magnitude scales and relations, Theory

of wave propagation - Seismic waves, body and surface waves.

121

UNIT II EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTS 9

Earthquake recording instrumentations - Concept of seismograph - Seismic station - Sensors and data loggers -

Mechanical and digital sensors - Interpretation of Seismic Records -Acceleration, Velocity and Displacement -

Frequency and Time Domain parameters - Response Spectra and Spectral parameters - Epicentre and

magnitude determination.

UNIT III EARTHQUAKE HAZARDS AND SEISMIC HAZARD ASSESSMENT 9

Introduction to earthquake hazards -Strong ground motions and site effects - World great Earthquakes - Large

and Damaging Earthquakes of India - Instruction to seismic zones and codes - Global and National seismic

hazard assessment mapping programs - Safety of individual site - Concept of seismic micro zonation - Need for

Micro zonation - Types and Scale – Methodology.

UNIT IV SEISMIC HAZARD ANALYSIS 9

Introduction to Seismic Hazard Analysis- Methods - Deterministic and Probabilistic - Attenuation models and

Simulation of Strong Ground Motion - Introduction to Site characterization - Different methods and experiments -

Geotechnical properties - Site classification and worldwide code recommendation.

UNIT V RISK CLASSIFICATIONS AND MAPPING 9

Concept of site response - Local site effects and evaluation methods - Ground motion amplifications and

estimation - Development of response /design spectrum - Introduction to liquefaction - Mechanism and factors

causing liquefaction - estimation methods and procedures- Mapping - Earthquake induced landslide - Landslide

hazard mapping - Tsunami hazard and Consideration for Tsunami hazard mapping.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Stein, S., and M. Wysession, “An Introduction to Seismology, Earthquakes, and Earth Structure”, 1st edition,

Malden, MA: Blackwell, September 2003.

2. Steven L Kramer, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2003

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bozorgnia, Y. and Bertero, V.V., “Earthquake Engineering - From Engineering Seismology to Performance -

Based Engineering” CRC Press, Washington, 2004.

2. Leon Reiter, “Earthquake hazard Analysis - Issues and Insights”, Columbia University Press, New York,

1990.

3. Havskov, J. and Alguacil, G.,“Instrumentation in Earthquake Seismology”,Springer,Netherlands, 2004.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Science, 1999

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nisee.berkeley.edu/

2. http://www.ethiopians.com/earthquake_engineering_resources.htm

122

15CEA03 SOLAR ENERGY UTILIZATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to acquire knowledge of solar radiation data and its measurement.

To explain the concept of various forms of solar thermal systems.

To create basic knowledge on direct steam generation systems.

To learn the maintenance and implementation of solar photovoltaic.

To recognize the latest heat energy storages in buildings.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course the students will be able to,

Recognize the concepts of solar radiation data and its measurement.

Understand the working process of various solar thermal systems.

Appreciate the principles of solar parabolic concentrators and direct steam generation systems.

Know the importance of solar photovoltaic maintenance and their implementation.

Identify the orientation and design of buildings by using latest heat energy storages.


Knowledge on energy conservation

UNIT I SOLAR RADIATION 9

Sun and earth geometry- Solar radiation- Beam and diffuse radiations- Measurement of solar radiation –

Pyranometer-Pyrheliometer- Sunshine recorder-Solar collectors and applications.

UNIT II SOLAR THERMAL SYSTEMS 9

Flat plate and evacuated tube collectors- Domestic hot water and process heat systems- Solar cooker- Solar

dryer-Solar desalination and solar pond.

UNIT III SOLAR POWER PLANT 9

Principles of solar parabolic concentrators- Trough and dish types- Compound parabolic concentrators- Fresnel

lens collectors- Central receiver plant- Direct steam generation systems-Solar furnaces.

UNIT IV SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS 9

Solar photovoltaic theory- Mono and polycrystalline silicon technologies- PV modules and integrated systems-

implementation and maintenance.

UNIT V SOLAR-CONSCIOUS BUILDINGS 9

Orientation and design of buildings- Passive solar heat- Thermal capacity -Insulation- Solar cooling-refrigeration

and air-conditioning- Space heating- Sensible and latest heat energy storages in buildings.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

123

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Sukhatme.K, Suhas P. Sukhatme, “Solar energy: Principles of thermal collection and storage”, Tata McGraw

Hill publishing Co. Ltd, 8th edition, 2008.

2. Soteris A. Kalogiru, “Solar Energy Engineering: Processes and systems”, First edition, Academic press,

2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Duffie.J.A, &Beckman.W.A, “Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes”, 3rd

edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,

2006.

2. Martin A. Green, “Third generation Photovoltaics: Advanced energy conversion”, 1st edition, 2005.

3. Garg.H.P, Prakash.J, “Solar energy fundamentals and applications”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co. Ltd,

2006.

4. Yogi Goswami.D, Frank Kreith, Jan F.Kreider, “Principle of solar engineering”, 2nd edition, Taylor and

Francis, 2nd edition, 2000.

5. Tiwari.G.N, “Solar energy: Fundamentals, Design, Modeling and Applications”, CRC Press Inc., 2002.

15CEA04 ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the physics and chemistry of soil

To know inorganic and organic geochemistry.

To realize contaminant fate and transport in soil

To understand the soil remediation technologies

To find the principles behind site selection and methods of disposal

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Classify theIndex properties, classification and exchange capacity.

Analyse the inorganic and organic geochemistry and Distribution of metals in soils

Identify the contaminant fate and transport in soil

Apply the soil remediation technologies available in the affected soil

Procure idea in site selection and disposal methods


Knowledge on basic soil mechanics

UNIT I PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF SOIL 9

Soil formation - Composition - soil fabric - Mass volume relationship - Index properties and soil classification -

Hydraulic and consolidation characteristics - Chemical properties - Soil pH - Surface charge and point of zero

charge - Anion and Cation exchange capacity of clays - Specific surface area - Bonding in clays - Soil pollution -

Factors governing soil - Pollutant interaction.

124

UNIT II INORGANIC AND ORGANIC GEOCHEMISTRY 9

Inorganic Chemistry - Metal contamination - Distribution of metals in soils - Geochemical processes controlling

the distribution of the metals in soils - Chemical analysis of metal in soil - Organic geochemistry - Organic

contamination - Distribution of NAPLs in soils - Process controlling the distribution of NAPLs in soil - Chemical

analysis of NAPLs in soils.

UNIT III CONTAMINANT FATE AND TRANSPORT IN SOIL 9

Transport processes - Advection - Diffusion - Dispersion - Chemical mass transfer processes - Sorption and

desorption - Precipitation and dissolution - Oxidation and reduction - Acid base reaction - Complexation - Ion

exchange - Volatilization - Hydrolysis - Biological process - Microbial transformation of heavy metals.

UNIT IV SOIL REMEDIATION TECHNOLOGIES 9

Contaminated site characterization – Containment – Soil vapor extraction – Soil washing – Solidification and

stabilization – Electro-kinetic remediation – Thermal desorption – Vitrification – In-situ and Ex-situ Bioremediation

– Phytoremediation – Soil fracturing – Biostimulation – Bioaugumentation – Chemical oxidation and reduction.

UNIT V SITE SELECTION AND METHODS OF DISPOSAL 9

Criteria for sites for waste disposal facilities – Current practices for waste disposal – Sub surface techniques –

Passive contaminant system – Leachate contamination – Application of geo-membranes – Rigid and flexible

membrane liners

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Calvin Rose, “An introduction to the Environmental Physics of Soil, Water and Water Sheds”, Cambridge

University Press, 2004.

2. Paul Nathanail C. and Paul Bardos R., “Reclamation of contaminated Land”, John Wiley & Sons Limited,

2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Hari D. Sharama and Krishna R.Reddy, “Geo-Environmental Engineering: Site Remediation, Water

Contamination and Emerging Water Management Technologies”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2004.

2. Marcel Vander Perk, “Soil and Water contamination from Molecular to catchment Scale”, Taylor &Franncis,

2006.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. William J. Deutsch, “Groundwater Geochemistry: Fundamentals and Applications to Contamination”, Lewis

Publishers, 1997.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/

125

15CEA05 PRINCIPLES OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Introduce students to the basic principles of Global Positioning System

Familiarize with GPS signals and data

Impart knowledge on GPS data processing

Know about various errors in GPS data

provide students with the skills required to link locational data to certain projections and present same as

maps

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Acquaint with the fundamentals of Global Positioning System

Employ various methods to collect GPS data by receiving signals from receiver

Perform basic GPS receiver operation and data processing

Check the accuracy of GPS data and able to do necessary adjustments.

Produce a simple map from field data acquired using hand-held GPS


Knowledge on Surveying

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GPS 9

Components of GPS - GPS receivers - Reference coordinates systems - Datum, geoid, ellipsoid, WGS 84

system –Time and signal propagation through atmosphere- Their modelling and estimation - Satellite orbit

andEngineering Applications.

UNIT II GPS SIGNALS AND DATA 9

Navigational data - Collection methods - static positioning, kinematic positioning, Pseudo - Kinematic and stop

and go methods -Observation planning and strategy.

UNIT III GPS OBSERVABLES 9

Pseudo range and carrier phase parameters - Estimations, data handling, cycle slip detection and correction,

ambiguity resolution- GPS data processing -Single, Double and Triple differences.

UNIT IV ERRORS IN GPS DATA 9

Satellite geometry -Errors in different segments - Multipath errors - accuracy of GPS data and measures -

Network adjustments.

UNIT V DATUM TRANSFORMATION AND DIFFERENTIAL GPS 9

Reduction of observation -Transformation to various map projection systems - Real time kinematic GPS -Multiple

reference stations -Virtual reference stations.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

126

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Satheesh, Gopi, “Global Positioning System and its Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2005.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Leick, A., “GPS Satellite Surveying”, John Wiley, 2004

2. Kaplan, E.D. and Hegarty, C.J., “Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications”, Artech House, 2006

3. Gunter, S., „Satellite Geodesy“, 2nd

Ed., WalterbdeGruyter, 2003.

4.

15CEA06

NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of with various sources of Non-conventional energy

such as solar wind, small hydro, ocean & wave energy

To understand the working of solar thermal power plants

To know various aspects of geo-thermal energy

To have knowledge in wind and Thermo-electrical energy

To have exposure on biomass energy management

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the curse student will be able to

Learn fundamentals of solar radiation geometry, application of solar energy

Selection of sites for wind farm, different types of wind generators.

Realize the basic of small hydro, ocean & wave energy.

Have knowledge in geo-thermal energy

Appreciate bio mass energy management


Knowledge on alternate energy resources

UNIT I NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES 9

Various non-conventional energy resources- Introduction, availability, classification, relative Merits and Demerits -

Solar Cells - Theory of solar cells - Solar cell materials -Solar cell array -Solar cell power plant -Limitations.

UNIT II SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY 9

Solar radiation- Flat plate collectors and their materials - Applications and performance - Focussing of collectors

and their materials -Applications and performance -Solar thermal power plants - Thermal energy storage for solar

heating and cooling - Limitations.

UNIT III GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9

Resources of geothermal energy - Thermodynamics of geo-thermal energy conversion- Electrical conversion and

non-electrical conversion -Environmental considerations - Magneto-hydrodynamics (MHD) - Principle of working

of MHD Power plant - performance and limitations - Fuel Cells - Principle of working of various types of fuel cells

and their working, performance and limitations.

UNIT IV WIND ENERGY 9

Wind Energy - Wind power and its sources- Site selection- Criterion - Momentum theory- Classification of rotors-

127

Concentrations and augments- Wind characteristics- Performance and limitations of energy conversion systems -

Thermo-electrical and thermionic Conversions - Principle of working - Performance and limitations.

UNIT V BIO-MASS 9

Bio-mass - Availability of bio-mass and its conversion theory - Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC) -

Availability, theory and working principle -Performance and limitations -Wave and Tidal Wave - Principle of

working -Performance and limitations -Waste Recycling Plants.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. John Twideu and Tony Weir, “Renewal Energy Resources” BSP Publications, 2006.

2. M.V.R. KoteswaraRao, “Energy Resources: Conventional & Non-Conventional”, BSPPublications, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. D.S. Chauhan, “Non-conventional Energy Resources”, New Age International, 2002

2. C.S. Solanki, “Renewal Energy Technologies: A Practical Guide for Beginners”, PHI Learning, 2006

3. Raja, “Introduction to Non-Conventional Energy Resources”,SciTech Publications, 2008

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Peter Auer, "Advances in Energy System and Technology - Vol. 1 & 2", Academic Press, 2005.

15CEA07 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of energy conservation measures.

To understand conservation measures in steam systems

To know energy conservation aspects of fluid machinery

To have knowledge in electrical energy conservation in various industries

To have exposure on energy management

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course student will be able to

Have knowledge of energy conservation measures

Appreciate conservation measures in steam systems

Realize energy consumption and energy saving potentials

Have knowledge on electrical energy conservation

Practice energy management


Knowledge on energy conservation

UNIT I ENERGY CONSERVATION PRINCIPLES 9

Energy scenario - Principles of energy conservation - Resource availability - Energy savings - Current energy

consumption in India - Roles and responsibilities of energy managers in industries.

128

UNIT II ENERGY CONSERVATION IN STEAM SYSTEMS 9

Power plant components, conservation measures in steam systems - Losses in boiler - Methodology of upgrading

boiler performance - Blow down control - Excess air control - Pressure reducing stations - Condensate recovery -

Condensate pumping - Thermo compressors - Recovery of flash steam - Air removal and venting - Steam traps -

Cooling towers.

UNIT III ENERGY CONSERVATION IN FLUID MACHINERY 9

Centrifugal pumps - Energy consumption and energy saving potentials - Design consideration - Minimizing over

design - Fans and blowers -Specification - Safety margin - Choice of fans - Controls and design considerations -

Air compressor and compressed air systems - Selection of compressed air layout - Energy conservation aspects

to be considered at design stage.

UNIT IV ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Potential areas for electrical energy conservation in various industries - Conservation methods - Energy

management opportunities in electrical heating, lighting system - Cable selection - Energy efficient motors -

Factors involved in determination of motor efficiency - Adjustable AC drives - Variable speed drives - Energy

efficiency in electrical system.

UNIT V ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9

Organizational background desired for energy management persuasion -Motivation - Publicity role, Tariff analysis

- Industrial energy management systems - Energy monitoring - Auditing and targeting - Economics of various

energy conservation schemes – Energy policy and energy labelling.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Reay.D.A, “Industrial energy conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1st edition, 2003.

2. White.L.C, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilization”, Hemisphere Publishers, 2002.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Smith.C.B, “Energy Management Principles”, Pergamon Press, 2006.

2. Trivedi.P.R and Jolka.K.R, “Energy Management”, Common Wealth Publication, 2002.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Hamies, “Energy Auditing and Conservation; Methods, Measurements, Management and Case study”,

Hemisphere, 2003.

15CEA08 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concepts of sustainability and EIA

To expose the students to the need, methodology of EIA

To realize the documentation and application of Environmental Impact Assessment

To Understand the pollution control methods

To develop the skill to prepare Environmental Management Plan

129

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course student will be able to

Identify the impact on environment by the Infrastructural projects

Impart the knowledge in legal and regulatory aspect in India according to MoEF.

Comprehend the various components of EIA and its methods.

Appreciate the Methodologies, prediction and Assessment.

Prepare Environmental Management plan for Infrastructure engineering project.


Knowledge on environmental science

UNIT I BASIC FUNDAMENTALS COMPONENTS OF EIA 9

Historical Development of Environmental Impact Assessment - EIA in Project Cycle - Legal and Regulatory

Aspects in India - Types and Limitations of EIA - Cross Sectorial Issues and terms of references in EIA - Public

Participation in EIA.: EIA Process- Screening and Scoping - Setting - Analysis and Mitigation.

UNIT II METHODOLOGY 9

Matrices - Networks - Checklists - Connections and Combinations of Processes-Cost benefit analysis - Analysis

of Alternative - Software Packages for EIA - Expert Systems in EIA.

UNIT III PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9

Prediction tools for EIA - Mathematical modelling for impact prediction - Assessment of Impacts on Air, Water and

Soil - Assessment of Impacts on Biological Community - Cumulative Impact Assessment - Documentation of EIA

findings -Report Preparation.

UNIT IV SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT ASSESSMENT 9

Definition of Social Impact Assessment - Social Impact Assessment model and the planning process - Rationale

and measurement for SIA variables- Relationship between social impacts and change in community and

institutional arrangements - Individual and family level impacts - Communities in transition - Neighbourhood and

community impacts - Selecting, testing and understanding significant social impacts - Mitigation and

enhancement in social assessment - Environmental costing of projects.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9

Environmental Management Plan - Preparation - EMP - Implementation and Review - Mitigation and

Rehabilitation plans - Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes - Post Project Audit - Ethical

and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment - Case Studies - EIA related to infrastructure,

Construction and Housing - Mining - Industrial Projects - Thermal Power - River Valley and Hydroelectric- Coastal

Projects -Nuclear Power.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Petts, J., “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Vol., I and II”, Blackwell science, London, 1999.

2. Canter, L.W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Lawrence, D.P., “Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical Solutions to recurrent problems”, Wiley-

Interscience, New Jersey, 2003.

130

15CEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF SUPPLY CHAIN L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the fundamentals of the supply chain.

To provide knowledge on designing the supply chain network

To provide exposure on various types of facility location and network design

To impart knowledge on planning and managing of inventories in a supply chain.

To provide experience on sourcing, transportation and pricing products.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the students will be able to;

Comprehend the concepts behind the supply chain network.

Design the supply chain network.

Locate the facilities and design the network.

Plan and manage the inventories in a supply chain.

Do the sourcing, transportation and pricing products.


Knowledge on Engineering Economics & Cost analysis

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SUPPLY CHAIN 9

Supply chain systems -Stages and decision phases and process view of supply chain - Supply chain flows -

Examples of supply chains -Competitive supply chain strategies -Drivers for supply chain performance.

UNIT II DESIGNING THE SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK 9

Distribution Networking –Role, Design - Supply Chain Network - SCN – Role –Factors -Framework for design

decisions.

UNIT III FACILITY LOCATION AND NETWORK DESIGN 9

Models for facility location and capacity location - Impact of uncertainty on SCN -Discounted cash flow analysis -

Evaluating network design decisions using decision trees - Analytical problems.

UNIT IV PLANNING AND MANAGING OF INVENTORIES IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 9

Inventory concepts -Trade promotions -Managing multi-echelon cycle inventory -Safety inventory determination -

Impact of supply uncertainty aggregation and replenishment.

UNITV SOURCING, TRANSPORTATION AND PRICING PRODUCTS 9

Role of sourcing -Supplier- Scoring and assessment - Selection and contracts -Design collaboration -Role of

transportation -Models of transportation and designing transportation network - Revenue management.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Blanchard, D., “Supply chain management: Best practices”, John Wiley &Sons,New Jersey,2007.

2. Simchi-Levi, David, Xin Chen, and JulienBramel,“The Logic of Logistics: Theory, Algorithms, andApplications

for Logistics and Supply Chain Management” 2nd

edition. Springer, New York, 2004.

131

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Graves, S. C., and A. G. De Kok, “Handbook in operations research and management science” Vol.

11,Elsevier Publishing Company, 2003.

15CEA10 COASTAL ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide knowledge on various aspects of coastal engineering

To provide an overview of the analysis and design procedures used in the field of coastal engineering

To understand the various issues connected with coastal sediment transport

To familiarize with planning and design of various coastal protection works

To impart knowledge on various types of modeling aspects

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Acquire knowledge on wave theory

Apply these engineering principles to solve the problems

Understand the basic concepts of coastal sediment transport

Design shore defense structures

Develop site specific physical and numerical models


Knowledge on Water Resources Engineering

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COASTAL ENGINEERING 9

Introduction - Wind and waves - Sea and Swell - Introduction to small amplitude wave theory -Use of wave

tables- Mechanics of water waves - Linear (Airy) wave theory.

UNIT II WAVE PROPERTIES AND ANALYSIS 9

Introduction to non-linear waves and their properties - Waves in shallow waters - Wave Refraction - Diffraction

and Shoaling - Hinds east wave generation models -Wave shoaling -Wave refraction -Wave breaking - Wave

diffraction random and 3D waves- Short term wave analysis -Wave spectra and its utilities - Long term wave

analysis- Statistics analysis of grouped wave data

UNIT III COASTAL SEDIMENT TRANSPORT 9

Dynamic beach profile -Cross-shore transport -Along shore transport (Littoral transport) -Sediment movement

UNIT IV COASTAL DEFENSE 9

Field measurement -Models, groins, sea walls, offshore breakwaters and artificial nourishment -Planning of coast

protection works - Design of shore defence structures –Case studies

UNIT V MODELING IN COASTAL ENGINEERING 9

Physical modeming in Coastal Engineering - Limitations and advantages - Role of physical modelling in coastal

engineering - Numerical modelling - Modelling aspects -Limitations - Case studies using public domain models

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

132

TEXT BOOKS:

1. US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research

Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.

2. Kamphuis, J.W. “Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research

Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.

2. Kamphuis, J.W. “ Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2000

3. Dean, R.G. and Dalrymple, R.A. “ Water wave mechanics for Engineers and Scientists”, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,

Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1994

4. Sorenson, R.M. “Basic Coastal Engineering”, Wiley-Interscience Publication, New York, 1978.

15CEA11 MANUFACTURING COST ESTIMATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basics of cost estimation and different types of cost estimating methods.

To impart clear knowledge on cost and various factory expenses.

To gain knowledge on budget and measures of cost economics.

To compute the cost estimation in different shops.

To calculate machining time and cost for the different process.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Comprehend the different types of cost estimating methods.

Gain knowledge on calculating cost and expenses of various factory processes.

Acquire knowledge on measures of cost economics and able to create budget for the industry.

Calculate the process cost involved in different shops.

Work out machining time and cost for the different process.


Knowledge on Estimation

UNIT I COST ESTIMATION 9

Objective of cost estimation- Costing -Cost accounting- Classification of cost-Elements of cost- Types of

estimates -Methods of estimates -Data requirements and sources- Collection of cost- Allowances in estimation.

UNIT II COSTS AND EXPENSES 9

Aims of costing and estimation - Functions and procedure - Introduction to costs- Computing material cost- Direct

labor cost-Analysis of overhead costs - Factory expenses-Administrative expenses-Selling and distributing

expenses - Cost ladder - Cost of product.

UNIT III COST ECONOMICS 9

Budget -Need and Types - Budgetary control - Objectives and Benefits - Measures of cost economics - Make or

buy decision and Analysis - Depreciation - Causes of depreciation -Methods of Depreciation - Allocation of

overheads.

133

UNIT IV ESTIMATION OF COSTS IN DIFFERENT SHOPS 9

Estimation in Forging shop - Losses in forging - Forging cost-Estimation in welding shop - Gas cutting - Electric

welding-Estimation in foundry shop - Pattern cost - Casting cost - Illustrative examples.

UNIT V ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIMES AND COSTS 9

Estimation of machining time for lathe operations - Drilling, Boring, Shaping, Planning, Milling and Grinding

operations - Illustrative examples.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. R. Kesavan, C. Elanchezhian, B. VijayaRamanath, “Process Planning And Cost Estimation”, New Age

International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015

2. Chitale.A.K and Gupta.R.C, “Product Design and manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Sixth

Edition, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Adithan. M, “Process Planning and Cost Estimation”, New Age International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015.

2. Banga.T.R and Sharma.S.C, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing including contracting”, Khanna publishers,

New Delhi, 2012.

3. Joseph G. Monks, “Operations Management, Theory and Problems”, McGraw Hill Book Company, New

Delhi, 2001.

4. Narang.G.B.S and Kumar.V, “Production and Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Fourth edition 2010.

5. Adithan.M. and Pabla.B.S, “Estimating and costing for the Metal Manufacturing Industries”, CRC press,

1992.

Offered by EEE Department

15EEA01 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Measurement of force, torque and speed.

Measurement of industrial parameters like acceleration, Vibration and density.

Monitoring techniques for pressure in industrial process.

Advanced techniques for temperature and high temperature measurement.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze Instrumentation systems and explain their applications to various industries.

Measure the changes in pressure, temperature in an industry.

COURSE PREREQUISITES:

Basics of measurements standards – Instrumentation system – Basic knowledge on industrial process.

UNITI CHARACTERISTICS, ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS 9

Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Static and dynamic characteristics of measuring

instruments- Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in measurements - Statistical estimation of

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22R.+Kesavan%22

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22B.+Vijaya+Ramanath%22

134

measurements data (Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard deviation, Variance and Probable error of

mean) – Standards and calibration.

UNITII MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE 9

Accelerometers: - LVDT, Piezoelectric, Strain gauge and Variable reluctance type accelerometers - Seismic

instruments as accelerometer - Vibration sensor. Different types of load cells - Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain

gauge and Piezoelectric load cells

UNITIII PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9

Units of pressure – Manometers and their types,-McLeod Gauge-Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube,

bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure gauge – Piezo-resistive pressure sensor- Thermal

conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure gauges.Dead weight tester.

UNITIV LOW TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9

Definitions and standards - Primary and secondary fixed points - Calibration of thermometers - Different types of

filled in system thermometers - Bimetallic thermometers - RTD - characteristics and signal conditioning-3 lead

and 4 lead RTDs - Thermistors.

UNITV HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9

Thermocouples - Laws of thermocouple - Fabrication of industrial thermocouples – Compensating cable- Signal

conditioning for thermocouple - Radiation fundamentals - Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total

radiation pyrometers - Optical pyrometers.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Doebellin, E.O.and Manik D.N., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, Special Indian Edition,

Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2007.

2. Jones. B.E, "Instrument Technology”, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition, 2003.

3. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and

Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press, 2005

2. Patranabis,D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

3. Eckman D.P., “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003.

4. S.K.Singh., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 2008.

5. Jain, R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.

15EEA02 Illumination Engineering L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart in-depth knowledge on illumination and requirements of energy efficient lighting.

To make the students familiar with measurement of illumination.

To make the students design a lighting scheme.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course, students will be able to

135

Explicate the different types of lighting schemes.

Elucidate the measurement of light.

Explain the working of different lamps.

Demonstrate the ability to design illumination systems for desired specifications.

Demonstrate the awareness of impact of energy conservation approach to illumination systems.


Basics of Electrical Engineering, awareness about artificial lighting, Energy Conservation, Algebra, Trigonometry.

UNITI LIGHTING FUNDAMENTALS 9

Nature of light – Importance of lighting –sensitivity of eye – colour sensation – Quantum theory of light – Terms

used in illumination – Polar Curve – Laws of illumination – Illumination at a point – Types of reflection – Types of

lighting schemes – Requirements of good lighting – Stroboscopic effect – Factory lighting – Flood lighting –

Street lighting.

UNITII PHOTOMETRY 9

Grease Spot Photometer Head – Lummer - Brodhun Photometer Head – Flicker Photometer – Measurement of

MSCP by Integrating Sphere – Photovoltaic cell – Distribution photometry – Illumination Photometer.

UNITIII LAMPS AND FITTINGS 9

Filament lamps – Arc lamps – Fluorescent lamps – Mercury Vapour lamps – Sodium Vapour lamps – Halogen

lamps – Neon lamps – Induction lamps – Emergency Lamps –lighting for displays and signaling – neon signs,

Lamp fittings – Symmetrical fittings, Asymmetrical fittings.

UNITIV LIGHTING DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS 9

Basic design of illumination schemes for residential, commercial, street lighting, and sports ground. Selection of

lamps – Calculation of wattage, number and arrangement of lamps – Space height ratio – Calculation of

illumination level available.

UNITV ENERGY EFFICIENT LAMPS AND WIRING METHODOLOGY 9

Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) – Selection of CFL – Lumens output – Disposal of waste CFL – Limitations of

CFL – Cold Cathode CFL, LED – Terminologies – Choice of LED Lamps for different lighting requirements –

Benefits of LED lighting – CFL Vs LED lighting, 12V DC home wiring – Solar powered lamps – Importance –

Constraints in 12V DC wiring – Voltage Regulation devices – wiring and distribution, Necessary Appliances.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Joseph B. Murdoch, "Illumination Engineering from Edison's Lamp to the Laser, second edition, Visions

Comm., 1994.

2. Jack L. Lindsey, "Applied Illumination Engineering" The Fairmont Press Inc., 1991.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ronald N. Helms, M. Clay Beicher, "Lighting for Energy Efficient Luminous Environments", Prentice

Hall, 1991.

2. Marc Schiler, "Simplified Design of Building Lighting" John Wiley and Sons, 1992.

3. IES Lighting Handbook, 8th edition, 1993.

4. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.

Ltd, Third Edition 2015.

5. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition

2015.

136

6. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.

7. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,

Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://energy.gov/energysaver/articles/induction-lighting-old-lighting-technology-made-new-again

2. http://www.buildings.com/article-details/articleid/18718/title/led-vs-induction-lighting/viewall/true.aspx

3. http://www.edisontechcenter.org/InductionLamps.html

4. http://eartheasy.com/live_energyeff_lighting.htm

5. http://dreamgreenhouse.com/designs/12v/index.php

6. http://www.treehugger.com/sustainable-product-design/big-steps-in-building-change-our-wiring-to-12-

volt-dc.html

7. https://www.nelt.co.jp/english/products/ccfl/about.html

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Different types of power semi-conductor devices and their switching characteristics.

Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.

Operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.

Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand the harmonic

reduction methods.

Operation of AC voltage controllers

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Identify and select the switching devices for different power converter applications.

Design a suitable DC power supply for given load specification from AC or DC supply.

Design and analyze the single or three phase inverter.

Analyze the AC voltage controller


Semiconductor physics, Steady state operation of single phase AC circuits, Differentiation, Integration and

Fourier series

UNITI POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

Introduction to Power Electronics - Study of switching devices: structure, operation, static and switching

characteristics of SCR, TRIAC, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT-SCR: Two Transistor model, turn on circuits and

commutation circuits

UNITII PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9

1-pulse, 2-pulse converters - circuit, operation, waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage and average

load current for continuous current operation - Input power factor estimation for ripple free load current

UNITIII DC TO DC CONVERTER 9

Step-down and step-up chopper - Time ratio control and current limit control – Buck, boost, buck-boost

converter-Isolated Converters: Fly back and Forward converter

15EEA03 SWITCHED MODE POWER

CONVERTERS

137

UNITIV INVERTERS 9

Single phase and three phase inverters (both 1200

mode and 1800 mode) - PWM techniques: single, multiple,

sinusoidal PWM, modified sinusoidal PWM – Voltage and harmonic control

UNITV AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9

Single phase AC voltage controllers –Integral cycle control, phase angle control - Estimation of RMS load

voltage, RMS load current and input power factor - Single phase cycloconverter

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 4th

Edition, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mohan, Undeland, Robbins,”Power Electronics: Converters Applications and Design”, John Wiley &

Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003

2. Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science &

Business Media, 2nd

edition 2001.

15EEA04 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Power generation through various methods.

Importance of measuring devices in power plant.

Boiler control techniques and turbine control techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Demonstrate the measurement of various power plant parameters.

Implement various Control techniques in power generation process.


Basics of Measurements & instrumentation – Power plant working concepts - Knowledge on power plant

parameters controls – Fundamentals of control system.

UNITI MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - I 9

Importance of measurement and instrumentation in power plant. Measurement of water purity- Measurement of

dissolved oxygen in feed water- Measurement of PH value of water- Measurement of O2,CO2, and CO content in

the gases - Measurement of Smoke and Dust- Dosimeters.

UNITII MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - II 9

Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow – Drum level measurement – Steam pressure

and temperature measurement – Turbine speed and vibration measurement.

UNITIII BOILER CONTROL 9

Combustion of fuel and excess air – Firing rate demand – Steam temperature control – Drum level control –

138

Single, two and three element control – Furnace draft control–flue gas dew point control.

UNITIV BURNER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Burners for liquid and solid fuels – Burner management – Furnace safety interlocks – Coal pulverizer control –

Combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers – air/fuel ratio control.

UNITV CONTROL OF TURBINE 9

Types of steam turbines – impulse and reaction turbines – compounding – Turbine governing system – Speed

and Load control- Basics of Automatic Load Frequency Control- Free Governor Mode of Operation (FGMO) -

Restricted Governor Mode of Operation (RGMO).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. S.C.Arora,S. Domkundwar, “ Power plant Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai &Co (P)Ltd,2015.

2. Sam Dukelow, “Control of Boilers”, Instrument Society of America, 2009.

3. Everett Woodruff , Herbert Lammers, Thomas Lammers, “Steam Plant Operation”,9th Edition

McGraw Hill, 2012.

4. Rajput R.K., “A Text book of Power plant Engineering”. 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Liptak B.G., “Instrumentation in Process Industries”, Chilton Book Company, 2005.

2. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.

3. P.K.Nag, “Powerplant Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2007.

4. Tamilmani, “Power plant instrumentation”, Sams Publishers, 2011.

5. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New

Delhi, 2011.

15EEA05 Electrical Machines and Drives

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


The basic concepts of different types of electrical machines and their performance.

The different methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors.

Conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Demonstrate the concepts and different types of electrical machines.

Deliver the impact of starting D.C motors and induction motors.

Explain about conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.


Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO D.C. MACHINES 9

DC Machine – Construction – DC generator - Principle of operation – EMF equation – Self and separately excited

generators – Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators. DC motor–Principle of operation – Back

139

emf and torque equation – characteristics - applications.

UNITII A.C. MACHINES 9

Alternators – Construction – Types – Induced EMF – Voltage regulation – EMF and MMF methods. Three-phase

induction motors – Construction – Types – Principle of operation – slip-torque characteristics. Single-phase

induction motors – Construction–Types– Principle of operation.

UNITIII STARTING METHODS 9

Types of D.C Motor starters – Two point, three point and four point starter. Types of A.C Motor starters – DOL,

Auto transformer, Star-Delta and Rotor Resistance starter.

UNITIV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C.

DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)

9

Speed control of DC series and shunt motors – Armature and field control, Ward- Leonard control system - Using

controlled rectifiers and DC choppers (Circuit diagram and operation) –applications.

UNITV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL

OF A.C. DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)

9

Speed control of three phase induction motor – Voltage control, V/f control, slip power recovery scheme – Using

inverters and AC voltage regulators (Circuit diagram and operation)– applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. A K Theraja & B L Theraja “A Text Book of Electrical Technology Vol-2,” 23rd

Edition S.Chand

Publications, 2007.

2. Dubey G.K., “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, Second Edition, 2015.

.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. P.C.Sen.,“Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics”, Second Edition ,Wiley India Pvt.

Lt&Sons. 2013.

2. K. Murugesh Kumar, “Electric Machines”, Vikas publishing house Pvt Ltd, 2002.

3. M.D.Singh, K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

4. Vedam Subramanyam, “Electric Drives – Concepts and Applications”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,

2010.

5. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

15EEA06 Real Time Embedded Systems

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


The architecture and programming of ARM processor.

The embedded computing platform design and analysis.

The basic concepts of real time Operating system.

The fundamentals of filters.

The system design techniques and networks for embedded systems

140

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the students will be able to:

Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor..

Explain the basic concepts of real time Operating system design.

Use the system design techniques to develop software for embedded systems.

Model real-time applications using embedded-system concepts.


Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontrollers

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED COMPUTING AND ARM

PROCESSORS

9

Complex systems and microprocessors– Embedded system design process –Design example: Model train

controller- Instruction sets preliminaries – ARM Processor – CPU: programming input and output- supervisor

mode, exceptions and traps – Co-processors- Memory system mechanisms – CPU performance- CPU power

consumption.

UNITII EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM AND DESIGN ANALYSIS 9

CPU buses – Memory devices – I/O devices – Component interfacing – Design with microprocessors –

Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs – Assembly and Linking – Basic

compilation techniques – Analysis and optimization of execution time, power, energy, program size – Program

validation and testing.

UNITIII PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9

Multiple tasks and multi processes – Processes – Context Switching – Operating Systems –Scheduling policies -

Multiprocessor – Inter Process Communication mechanisms – Evaluating operating system performance – Power

optimization strategies for processes.

UNITIV SYSTEM DESIGN TECHNIQUES AND NETWORKS 9

Design methodologies- Design flows – Requirement Analysis – Specifications-System analysis and architecture

design – Quality Assurance techniques- Distributed embedded systems – MPSoCs and shared memory

multiprocessors.

UNITV CASE STUDY 9

Data compressor – Alarm Clock – Audio player – Software modem-Digital still camera – Telephone answering

machine-Engine control unit – Video accelerator.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computer System Design”, Morgan

Kaufmann Publisher, 2006.

2. Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as Components – Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”, Third

Edition “Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jonathan W.Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing”, Third Edition

Cengage Learning, 2012.

2. David. E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression, Addison-Wesley

Professional, 2007.

3. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, “An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From Design to

Networking with C/C ”, Prentice Hall, 1999.

4. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real-Time Systems”, International Editions, Mc Graw Hill 1997

5. K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming”, Dream Tech

141

Press, 2005.

6. Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.

15EEA07 Fundamentals of Electric Power Utilization

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Different types of lamps

Methods of heating and welding

Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Electrolytic processes and storage of electricity

Electric traction systems

Electrical energy conservation

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Elucidate the working of various electric lamps and the various types of electric heating, electric welding

and design a heating element

Explain the working principle of refrigerators and Air Conditioning System

Explain about electrolytic processes and storage of electricity

Explain about electric traction.

Explicate the importance of electrical energy conservation and apply various measures for economic

aspects of utilising electrical energy


Basics of Electrical Engineering, Effects of electric current, Chemical reactions in electrolyte, awareness about

artificial lighting, refrigeration and air conditioning, Characteristics and application of different electric motors,

awareness about traction, Algebra, Trigonometry.

UNITI ILLUMINATION, INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND WELDING 9

Different types of lamps - incandescent – fluorescent – mercury vapour lamps.

Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating – induction heating – dielectric heating -

electric arc furnaces.

Brief introduction to electric welding – welding generator, welding transformer and their characteristics.

UNITII REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9

Principle of a refrigerator – Vapour Compression System – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Voltage Regulator

– Water Cooler – Coefficient of Performance – Standard rating – Maintenance and trouble shooting of

refrigerators – Air conditioning system – Types – operation – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Cooling

capacity – Thermo-electric Refrigeration – Central Air Conditioning System.

UNITIII ELECTROLYTIC PROCESSES AND STORAGE OF ELECTRICITY 9

Electrolysis, Faraday’s laws of Electrolysis – Electroplating – Electrical Equipments – Agitation and Filtration

Plant – Extraction and refining of metals – Storage of Electricity – Lead Acid Battery – Characteristics –

Indications of a fully charged battery – Nickel iron and Nickel cadmium batteries – Applications –Capacity rating

of batteries – Charging and maintenance of batteries – Battery chargers.

142

UNITIV ELECTRIC TRACTION 9

Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems – traction motors – d.c.

series motor – mechanics of train movement – Speed Time curve –tractive effort – specific energy consumption.

UNITV ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY UTILISATION 9

Introduction to Energy conservation and Energy auditing - Tools for Energy auditing – Energy conservation in

Chemical industry, Pulp and Paper industry, Sugar industry, Cement industry, Textile industry, Iron and Steel

Industry – Energy Conservation in household and commercial sectors – Energy Conservation Legislation –

Tariffs - Influence of power factor – The most economic power factor - PF improvement.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.

Ltd, Third Edition 2015.

2. E. Openshaw Taylor, ‘Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units’, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, Eleventh

Edition 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. H. Partab, ‘Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, Third

Edition 2014.

2. J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition

2015.

3. G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.

4. A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,

Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.

5. N.V.Suryanarayana, ‘Utilisation of Electric Power: Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction’, New

Age International Publishers, Second Edition 2014.

6. V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, ‘Basic Electrical Engineering’, S.Chand Limited, 2008.

15EEA08 Soft Computing Techniques and Applications L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide an introduction to the emerging area of intelligent control and optimization.

To impart knowledge on expert systems, fuzzy logic systems, artificial neural networks and optimization

techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Explain the concept of intelligent control and their applications.

Analyze Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks through case studies.

Design Genetic Algorithms system through case study.


Basic understanding of problem solving, design and analysis of algorithms, Algebra, Elementary differential

Calculus, probability, basic knowledge on human nervous system and nervous cells.

143

UNITI INTRODUCTION 9

Approaches to intelligent control – Architecture for intelligent control – Symbolic reasoning system – rule-based

systems – the AI approach – Knowledge representation – Expert systems.

UNITII ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Concept of Artificial Neural Network and its basic mathematical model – McCulloch-Pitts neuron model – simple

perceptron – Adaline and Madaline – Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron – Learning and Training the neural

network – Hopfield network – Self-organizing network – Neural Network based controller.

UNITIII GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ANT-COLONY OPTIMIZATION

TECHNIQUE

9

Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detailed algorithmic steps – Flowchart – GA operators – adjustment of

GA parameters – Concept of ant-colony search technique for solving optimization problems.

UNITIV FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM 9

Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets – basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning – Introduction to

fuzzy logic modeling and control – Fuzzification – inferencing and defuzzification – Fuzzy knowledge and rule

bases.

UNITV APPLICATIONS 9

Applications of Neural Network to engineering problems – GA applications to engineering optimisation problems

– Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for non-linear systems.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Sivanandam S.N., Deepa S.N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2012.

2. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E., “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing: A Computational Approach

to Learning and Machine Intelligence”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jacek.M.Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.

2. Klir G.J., Folger T.A., “Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1993.

3. Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.

4. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H., Reinfrank M., “Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Narosa Publishers, 2001.

5. Goldberg D.E., “Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine learning”, Addison Wesley,

1989.

6. Padhy N.P., “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent System, Oxford University Press, 2005.

7. Allain Bonnet, “Artificial Intelligence – Promise and Performance, Prentice Hall International Publishers,

1985.

8. Sivanandam S.N., Paulraj M., “Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.

Ltd., First Edition, 2003.

9. Donald A. Waterman, “A Guide to Expert Systems”, Addison-Wesley Publishers, Second Edition, 1993.

15EEA09 FUNDAMENTALS OF POWER QUALITY

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


144

Various Power Quality issues.

Power quality problems and methods of control.

Various methods of power quality monitoring and suppression.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze the various power quality issues.

Analyze the power quality events and assessment.

Mitigate the power quality problems using relevant devices.



UNITI INTRODUCTION TO POWER QUALITY 9

Terms and definitions: Overloading, under voltage, sustained interruption; sags and swells; waveform distortion,

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve.

UNITII VOLTAGE SAGS ANDSWELLS 9

Sources of sags and interruptions, estimating voltage sag performance, motor starting sags, estimating the sag

severity, fast transfer switches- Sources of over voltages: Capacitor switching, lightning, ferro-resonance;

mitigation of voltage swells

UNITIII HARMONICS 9

Harmonic distortion: Voltage and current distortion, THD-TDD, harmonic sources from commercial and industrial

loads, locating harmonic sources- resonance-harmonic distortion evaluation, devices for controlling harmonic

distortion, passive filters, active filters

UNITIV Power Quality Benchmarking 9

Benchmarking Process-RMS voltage variation Indices-Harmonic Indices-Power Quality Contracts-Power Quality

Insurance

UNITV POWER QUALITY MONITORING 9

Monitoring consideration-Power quality measurement equipment: harmonic / spectrum analyzer, flicker meters,

disturbance analyzer- applications of expert system for power quality monitoring.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Roger.C.Dugan, Mark.F.McGranagham, Surya Santoso, H.Wayne Beaty, “Electrical Power Systems

Quality”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2013.

2. Math H.J.Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems-Voltage Sag & Interruptions”, (New York:

IEEE press, 2000).

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. C.Sankaran, “Power Quality”, CRC press, 2002.

2. Arindam Ghosh, “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices”, Springer International

Edition, 2002

3. PSCAD User Manual.

4. J.Arrilaga, N.R.Watson, S.Chen, “ Power System Quality Assessment”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.

145

15EEA10 WIRING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments

Different wiring methods

Estimation for electrical wiring

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Address Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments

Explain about different wiring methods

Estimate for a wiring system




Electrical supply system-Three-phase four wire distribution system-Types of domestic loads-Protection against

Electric shock-Earthing- Domestic Wiring Protection equipments: Fuse-Miniature Circuit Breaker – Residual

Current Circuit Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker-General requirements of Electrical Installations

UNITII TYPES AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS 9

Types of wires, Factors influencing the choice of wiring system, Types of wiring system, Conduit Wiring System,

Accessories, Advantages and Disadvantages of Conduit Wiring Systems, IE rules, 1956: rules 50, 56, 57, 58,

60,61 – Internal wiring systems – Looping-in system – Ring system – tree system - Position of switches, cutouts,

main switch board, sub-distribution boards

UNITIII DESIGN OF SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT 9

System of Connection of Appliances and accessories-Schematic diagram and Wiring diagram of Light and Fan

circuits-Wiring diagram of a single tube light controlled by a switch-Alarm circuits without relays-Alarm circuits

with relays

UNITIV ELEMENTS OF ESTIMATION 9

Introduction -Purpose of Estimating and Costing-Qualities of a good Estimator-Essential Elements of Estimating

and Costing-Tender-Guidelines for Inviting Tenders-Quotation-Other Important Factors of Estimating and Costing

UNITV DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATES 9

Estimation of load requirements-Estimation of connected load, Maximum demand, and type of supply required for

a domestic building and related problem- Determination of size of distribution boards – Different types of

commonly available distribution boards-Estimation of Accessories required, wiring materials and labour

requirement for a domestic building and related problem-Pre-commissioning tests for domestic wiring Installation:

Visual Inspection, Testing- Special features applicable for High-Rise apartment buildings

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Uppal S.L, “Electrical Wiring - Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 6th

Edition, 2011

2. Giridharan M.K., “ Electrical Systems Design”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2011

146

3. Raina K.B., Bhattacharya S.K., “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing”, New Age International Pvt.

Ltd., Publishers, 1991.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. J.B. Gupta, “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 9th

Edition, 2012

Offered by ECE Department

15ECA01 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce analog and digital communication techniques.

To impart knowledge on data and pulse communication techniques.

To introduce source and Error control coding.

To develop knowledge on multi–user radio communication

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course students will be able to

Apply analog and digital communication techniques.

Apply data and pulse communication techniques.

Analyze Source and Error control coding.

Utilize multi–user radio communication.

PRE REQUISITES:

Basic knowledge of Bessels function, Time domain and frequency domain signals representation, Basicelectronic circuits,

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION 9

Principles of amplitude modulation – AM envelope, frequency spectrum and bandwidth – modulation index

and percent – modulation, AM Voltage distribution, AM powerdistribution – Angle modulation – FM and PM

waveforms – phase deviation and modulation index – frequency deviation and percent modulation – Frequency

analysis of angle modulated waves – Bandwidth requirements for Angle modulated waves.

UNIT II DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9

Amplitude shift keying – frequency shift keying – FSK bit rate and baudrate – FSK transmitter – BW

consideration of FSK – FSK receiver – phase shift keying – binary phase shift keying – QPSK – Quadrature

Amplitude modulation – bandwidth efficiency – DPSK.

UNIT III DATA AND PULSE COMMUNICATION 9

Data Communication:History of Data Communication – Standards Organizations for Data Communication –

Data Communication Circuits – Data Communication Codes – Error Detection and Correction Techniques –

Data communication Hardware – serial and parallel interfaces.

Pulse Communication: Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) – Pulse Time Modulation (PTM) – Pulse code

Modulation (PCM) – Comparison of various Pulse Communication System (PAM – PTM – PCM).

UNIT IV SOURCE AND ERROR CONTROL CODING 9

Entropy – Source encoding theorem – Shannon Fano coding – Huffman coding – mutual information – channel

capacity – channel coding theorem – Error Control Coding – linear block codes.

147

UNIT V MULTI–USER RADIO COMMUNICATION 9

Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) – Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) – Code division

multiple access (CDMA) – Cellular Concept and Frequency Reuse – Channel Assignment and Hand off –

Satellite Communication – Bluetooth.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”, 6th

Edition, Pearson Education, 2009. 2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4

th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rappaport T.S, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice", 2nd

Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.

2. Martin S.Roden, “Analog and Digital Communication System”, 3rd

Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

3. B.Sklar,”Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications” 2nd

Edition PearsonEducation, 2007.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.wirelesscommunication.nl/reference/chaptr01/telephon/amps.html

2. http://ecee.colorado.edu/~liue/teaching/comm_standards/gsm/index.html

3. http://edu.eap.gr/pli/pli23/documents/Parallila_Keimena/GSM.pdf

4. https://www.eff.org/files/filenode/global_system_for_mobile_communication_technology.pdf

5. http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~jandrews/publications/cdma_talk.pdf

6. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M5L8.pdf

7. www.intel.com/education/.../lectures/lecture_06_80211bandBT.ppt

15ECA02 MICROPROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To apply knowledge of the architecture for programming of 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

To develop skills in interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Write assembly language program for 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

Interface peripheral devices with 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

Design 8085 and 8086 microprocessor based system.

PRE REQUISITES:

Digital logic circuits, binary and other number systems, electronic circuits, memory and interfacing concepts,

UNITI 8 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING 9

Microprocessor based system blocks – Number system – Address bus – data bus – control bus – Tristate bus –

Data Transfer Scheme – 8085 Microprocessor Architecture – Instruction set – Assembly Language Programming

– Interrupts

148

UNITII 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE 9

Intel 8086 Internal Architecture – signals– Minimum mode and Maximum mode operation and bus cycles –

Interrupts – Interrupt Service Routines – Memory Interfacing

UNITIII 16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTION SET AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE

PROGRAMMING

9

Programmer’s model of 8086 – operand types – operand addressing – assembler directives,instruction set –

Data transfer group – Arithmetic group – logical group – Flag manipulation group – control transfergroup –

Shift/rotate group – Machine or processor control group – 8086 Assembly Languageprogramming.

UNITIV MICROPROCESSOR PERIPHERAL CHIP INTERFACING

9

Introduction to I/O Ports – Architecture and interfacing of Programmable Peripheral Interface (8255) – Serial

Communication (8251) – Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254) – Keyboard and Display Controller

(8279)

UNITV SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROPROCESSORS 9

Switches and LEDs – Seven–segment Displays – D to A converter – A to D converter – Relay, Motor Control –

DC & Stepper Motor – Case studies – Microprocessor based Digital Scale system – Temperature controller –

Traffic Light control

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture – Programming and application with 8085”, 4th

Edition,Penram International Publishing, New Delhi, 2000.

2. Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” TMH, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Barry B. Brey, “Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing”, Pearson Prentice Hall,

2009.

2. M. Rafi Quazzaman, “Microprocessors Theory and Applications” Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India,

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.

3. A.K. Ray and K.M.Burchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals”, Tata McGraw–Hill Education,

2013.

4. Sunil Mathur, “Microprocessor 8086: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.

2011.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.zseries.in/embedded%20lab/

2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/pdf/Teacher_Slides/mod1/M1L3.pdf

3. http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/106108100/

15ECA03 MATLAB PROGRAMMING L T P C

2 0 2 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge of the MATLAB functions to manipulate complex values, arrays and matrices.

To develop skills in M File Programming and Elementary Solution Methods.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


149

Analyze the MATLAB Concepts and Debugging methods.

Create M–files using IF, SWITCH, FOR, WHILE statements.

Evaluate the results of Elementary Solution Methods.

PRE REQUISITES:

Familiarity with using Windows applications, calculus, Boolean laws, probability,arrays and vectors, use of a

scientific calculator,

UNITI MATLAB CONCEPTS 6+3

Directory and Defined Path – Menus and the toolbar – Saving & Loading Files – Using the command line to call

functions – Computing with MATLAB – Reading and Writing from a file: Reading and Writing data from/to a .mat

file, MATLAB Help System.

Lab Component: Get and Set values – Numerical computations

UNITII DATA STORAGE AND MANIPULATION 6+3

Rational Operators on Single Values – Boolean Operators on Single Values – MATLAB functions to manipulate

complex values – Arrays and Matrices – Declaring a vector – Dot product – Cross Product.

Lab Component: Matrix generators – Data conversion & Data Normalization.

UNITIII GRAPHICS 6+3

2D Graphics: XY– plotting functions, Subplots and Overlay plots – Special Plot types, Bar, Grid, Legend,

Lineseries properties, Semilogx, Regression – 3D Graphics – Mesh – Contour – Developing GUI.

Lab Component: Multiple data sets in one plot – Setting x and y axis limits to match the actual range of the

data using xlim and ylim.

UNITIV m FILE PROGRAMMING 6+3

m-files– syntax guidelines – Nested functions – Placing comments – Control Flow: IF statement, SWITCH

statement, FOR statement, WHILE statement – Program Flow: Arithmetic errors – Indexing errors, Assignment

errors, Struct array errors.

Lab Component: Histogram – Interpolation – Break and Continue – Fibonacci series

UNITV MATHEMATICAL MANIPULATIONS 6+3

Operations – Linear Algebraic Equations : Elementary Solution Methods, Statistics and probability, Special

Matrices– Row reduced echelon form – Inverse, Cofactor, minor

Lab Component: Differential equation solver – factorial finding – Eigenvalues and eigenvectors.

L : 30 ; P : 15 ; TOTAL:45 Periods

TEXTBOOK:

1. Linda Coulson, “MATLAB Programming”, Global Media, Delhi,2009

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. William J. Palm III,” Introduction to Matlab 7 for Engineers”, McGraw Hill, 2005.

2. G. H. Golub and C. F. Van Loan,” Matrix Computations”, 3rd

Editon, Johns Hopkins University

Press,1996.

3. Stephen J. Chapman, “MATLAB Programming for Engineers”, 4th

Edition ThomsonLearning,2007

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.mathworks.com/academia/student_center/tutorials/launchpad.html

2. http://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res–18–002–introduction–to–matlab–spring–2008/

15ECA04 ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

150

To introduce the working principles of various types of antenna.

To study various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas.

To know various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze the properties and parameters of antenna

Analyze the operation of different antennas

Design antenna array systems

PRE REQUISITES:

electromagnetic field theory, analog electronics, Maxwell's equations, electromagnetic wave propagation,

polarization

UNIT I ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS

9

Review of electromagnetic theory: Vector potential – Solution of wave equation – retarded vector and scalar

potential –Hertzian dipole. Antenna characteristics: Radiation pattern, Beam solid angle, Directivity, Gain, Input

impedance, Polarization, Beam width, Bandwidth, Reciprocity – Equivalence of Radiation patterns – Equivalence

of Impedances – Effective aperture – Effective length – Antenna temperature.

UNIT II WIRE ANTENNAS

9

EM radiation and working of Short dipole – Radiation resistance and Directivity – Half wave Dipole – Monopole –

Small loop antennas.

UNIT III ANTENNA ARRAYS

9

Linear Array and Pattern Multiplication – Two–element Array – Uniform Array – Polynomial representation –

Array with non–uniform Excitation – Binomial Array.

UNIT IV APERTURE ANTENNAS

9

Magnetic Current and its fields – Uniqueness theorem – Field equivalence principle – Duality principle –

Method of Images – Pattern properties – Slot antenna, Horn Antenna – Pyramidal Horn Antenna – Reflector

Antenna –Flat reflector – Corner Reflector

UNIT V SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS

9

Long wire – V and Rhombic Antenna –Yagi–Uda Antenna – Turnstile Antenna – Helical Antenna – Axial mode

helix, Normal mode helix –Biconical Antenna – Log periodic Dipole Array – Spiral Antenna –Microstrip Patch

Antennas.

Antenna Measurements: Radiation Pattern measurement – Gain and Directivity Measurements – Impedance

measurement and Anechoic Chamber measurement.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. John D.Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for all Applications”, 3rd

Edition, Tata

McGraw–Hill Book Company, 2012.

2. Constantine A. Balanis,”Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 2nd

Edition, John Wiley, 2011.

151

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, “Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems”, Pearson Education / PHI,

2006

2. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, “Antennas and Wave propagation”, Oxford University Press, 2007.

3. G.S.N.Raju, “Antenna Wave Propagation”, Pearson Education, 2004.

4. R.E.Collins, “Antenna and Radiowave propagation”,McGraw–Hill, 1985

5. W.L Stutzman and G.A. Thiele, “Antenna analysis and design”, John Wiley, 2000.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Ani_Kate–508171–wave–propagation/

2. http://classes.soe.ucsc.edu/cmpe123a/Fall07/doc/AntBrief123A12–6–07.ppt

3. http://muse.widener.edu/~rpj0001/courses/ENGR647/ClassNotes/LECT04.ppt

4. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/aSGuest125391–1319926–unit–antenna–engineering/

15ECA05 TELEVISION ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the construction details of TV Receiver Picture Tubes, Television Camera tubes and

Composite Video Signal details

To understand principles of operation of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems.

To study PAL Color Television system operation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyse the transmission of video signals and importance of television standards

Analyse the functioning of circuits related to broadcasting applications.

Apply the knowledge gained in digital video and television transmission.

PRE REQUISITES:

Electromagnetic spectrum, electromagnetic wave propagation, basic modulation theory, transducers, electronic

circuits, signals representation.

UNITI TELEVISION SIGNALSCOMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL 9

Audio and video transmission – scanning principle – TV broadcasting, system – Aspect ratio – Resolution –

Video bandwidth. Video signals – composite video signal – blanking signal – horizontal, vertical blanking and

sync pulses.

UNITII TELEVISION CAMERAS AND SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 9

Image orthicon –Vidicon–plumbicon– characteristics of camera tubes –video processing of camera pickup signal

–Picture signal transmission – positive and negative modulation – VSB transmission – Sound signal transmission

– Standard channel bandwidth

152

UNITIII TV TRANSMITTER & RECEIVER 9

TV standards – TV transmitter – Block diagram of TV Reciever – Receiver controls – RF tuners – Video

channel and picture tube – AGC and synchronization circuits – Deflection circuit (Horizontal and vertical ) –

video detector – Sound section

UNITIV COLOUR TV PRINCIPLES 9

Compatibility –colour fundamentals – chromaticity diagram –colour picture tubes (Delta – gun, P.I.L &trintron) –

purity and convergence. Colour Signal Transmission and Reception – modulation of colour difference signals –

formation of chrominance signal – NTSC, PAL and SECAM colour systems.

UNITV DIGITAL TV SYSTEMS 9

Cable TV – Cable Signal Sources – Cable Signal Processing, Distribution & Scrambling – DVB – Video

Recording – Video Disc recording and playback – Digital television –Transmission and reception –Projection

television – Flat panel display TV receivers – Digital TV – LCD and Plasma screen receivers – LEDTV – 3DTV

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. R.R.Gulati, “Monochrome Television Practice, Principles, Technology and servicing” , 3rd

Edition, New Age

International (P) Publishers, 2006

2. R.R.Gulati,”Monochrome & Color Television,” New Age International Publisher, 2003.

3. Bernard Grob, Charles Herndon, “Basic television and video systems” , McGraw–Hill, 1998

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. A.M Dhake, “Television and Video Engineering”, 2nd

Edition, TMH, 2003.

2. R.P.Bali, “Color Television, Theory and Practice,” 4th

Edition, Tata McGraw–Hill, New York, 1997.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://seminarprojects.net/q/principles–of–television–engineering–ppt /

2. www.focalpress.com/

3. www.hobbyprojects.com

15ECA06 REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To familiarize the principles of Remote Sensing

To gain fundamental knowledge on the physics of remote sensing

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the Electromagnetic Radiation principles for Remote Sensing Applications

Analyse various imaging systems

Interpret Multispectral and Hyperspectral data for Land cover/ Land use studies

Classify the data for application specific analysis

153

PRE REQUISITES:

fundamental principles of electromagnetic wave propagation and scattering, Optics, satellite communication

fundamentals, basics of communication engineering

UNITI PHYSICS OF REMOTE SENSING 9

Electro Magnetic Spectrum – Physics of Remote Sensing – Effects of Atmosphere – Scattering – Different types

–Absorption – Atmospheric window – Energy interaction with surface features – Spectral reflectance of

vegetation, soil ,and water –atmospheric influence on spectral response patterns.

UNITII REMOTE SENSING SYSTEMS 9

Satellites and orbits – Polar orbiting satellites – Spectral – radiometric and spatial resolutions – Temporal

resolution of satellites – Multispectral – thermal and hyperspectral Sensing. Remote Sensing platforms –

airborne and space borne sensors. Some remote sensing satellites, Radars and their features.

UNITIII IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR REMOTE SENSING 9

Geometric corrections – Co–registration of Data – Ground Control Points (GCP) – Atmospheric corrections –

Solar illumination corrections. Image Enhancement: Concept of color – Color composites – Contrast stretching –

linear and non–linear stretching – Filtering techniques – Edge enhancement – Density slicing –Thresholding –

Intensity–Hue–Saturation (IHS) images – Time composite images – Synergetic images.

UNITIV INFORMATION EXTRACTION FROM REMOTE SENSED DATA 9

Multispectral classification – Ground truth collection – Supervised and unsupervised classification – Change

detection analysis – Principal component analysis – Ratio images – Vegetation indices. Introduction to Image

Processing Softwares: MATLAB – Introduction to Multispectral classification algorithms.

UNITV REMOTE SENSING APPLICATIONS 9

Watershed management – Rainfall–runoff modeling – Irrigation management – Flood mapping – Drought

assessment –Environmental monitoring.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer R.W., “Remote Sensing and Image interpretation”, 6th

Edition, John Wiley

&Sons, 2000.

2. Jensen, J.R., “Remote sensing of the environment”, 2nd

Edition,Prentice Hall, 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. John A.Richards, “Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis”, Springer,1999.

2. John R.Jensen, “Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective”, 2nd

Edition,


3. Paul Curran P.J., “Principles of Remote Sensing”, ELBS, 1995.

4. Charles Elachi and Jakob J. van Zyl, “Introduction to the Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing”,

Wiley Series in Remote Sensing and Image Processing, 2006.

5. Sabins, F.F.Jr,” Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation”, W.H.Freeman& Co, 1978.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.itc.nl/~bakker/rs.html

2. rst.gsfc.nasa.gov

3. www.isprs.org

4. www.nrsa.gov.in

15ECA07 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

154

To introduce embedded systems, its hardware and software.

To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking.

To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Apply the knowledge applications

Develop an embedded product.

Validate the program for system development.

PRE REQUISITES:

Basics of Assembly Language, C, C++, Python, basic knowledge of electronics, digital electronics, knowledge of

microcontrollers, I/O, analog and digital interfacing, and peripherals.

UNITI EMBEDDED COMPUTING 9

Embedded system examples – Parts of Embedded System – Processor – Power supply – clock – memory

interface – interrupt – I/O ports – Buffers, Programmable Devices – ASIC – interfacing with memory and I/O

devices – Memory Technologies – EPROM,Flash, OTP, SRAM,DRAM, SDRAM

UNITII EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Embedded System product Development Life cycle (EDLC) – Hardware development cycles – Specifications –

Component selection – Schematic Design – PCB layout – fabrication and assembly. Product enclosure Design

and Development.

UNITIII EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 9

Reset Circuit – Brown–out Protection Circuit – Oscillator Unit – Real Time Clock – Watchdog Timer.

Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs– Assembly and Linking – Basic compilation

techniques– Program validation and testing.

UNITIV OPERATING SYSTEMS 9

Concept of firmware – Operating system basics – Real Time Operating systems – Tasks, Processes and

Threads – Multiprocessing and Multitasking – Task scheduling – Task communication and synchronization –

Device Drivers.

UNITV SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES 9

Design Example: Alarm Clock – Elevator Controller – Ink jet printer– Hardware Design and Software Design –

Set–top Boxes.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Shibu K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems “,Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.

2. Marylin wolf, “Computer as Components” Elsevier, 2013,

3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, 2nd

Edition, TMH, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, John Wiley,2001

2. Lyla, “Embedded System”, Pearson, 2013.

3. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real – Time Systems”, McGraw – Hill International Editions, 1997

4. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2007.

5. Rajib Mall, ”Real–time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2007

155

6. Philip.A.Laplante, “Real Time System Design and Analysis”, 3rd

Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102045/

2. http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-Engineering-Video-lectures-ltv118-Page1.htm

15ECA08 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basic elements of light sources, Wavelength and frequencies of light

To understand the different kind of fibers, losses, and fiber slicing and connectors

To learn different types of photo detectors and its operation

To learn the fiber optical receivers and its measurements

To learn, Optical networks, operational principles of WDM

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Analyze the different kinds of light sources and Detectors used in any applications

Design any optical communication system

Analyze the performance measure of the optical parameters

PRE REQUISITES:

Electromagnetic spectrum and its uses, Snells law, optical signal propagation methods and electromagnetic

theory

UNITI OPTICAL SOURCES 9

Light sources : Sunlight, Torch light, LED and Laser light – Optical frequencies and Wavelength – LED internal –

quantum efficiency –Relationship between speed of light, wavelength and frequency – light as an

Electromagnetic waves – comparison of LED and Laser diode

UNITII OPTICAL FIBER 9

Refractive Index –Ray theory of transmission – Total internal reflection – Acceptance angle – Numerical aperture

– Attenuation Fiber Bend losses and Dispersion – Structure of an optical fiber – Optical domain signal –

electrical domain signal Optical pulses for the digital data – Optical fiber connectors – Fiber alignment and Joint

Losses – Fiber Splices – Fiber connectors – Fiber couplers

UNIT III OPTICAL DETECTORS 9

Optical Detectors: PIN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes – construction, characteristics and properties –

Comparison of performance, Photo detector noise –Noise sources – Signal to Noise ratio – Detector response

time.

UNITIV FIBER OPTIC RECEIVER AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Fundamental receiver operation – Pre amplifiers – Error sources – Receiver Configuration – Probability of Error –

Quantum limit.

Fiber Attenuation measurements– Dispersion measurements –Optical Spectrum Analyzer–OTDR

UNITV OPTICAL NETWORKS 9

Basic Networks – Broadcast and select Networks – WDM Networks –Bus topology – Star topology –

Wavelength Routed Networks – Routing and wavelength Assignment – Different types of wavelength

Assignment

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

156

1. Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication" 5th

Edition, McGraw Hill International, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. J.Gower, “Optical Communication System”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

2. Rajiv Ramaswami, “Optical Network”, 2nd

Edition, Elsevier, 2004.

3. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber–optic communication systems”, 3rd

edition, John Wiley & sons, 2004.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/117101002/downloads/Lec19.pdf

2. www.ece466.groups.et.byu.net/notes/notes_source.ppt

15ECA09 MOBILE COMMUNICATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the fundamentals concepts of mobile communication systems.

To provide the student with an understanding of advanced multiple access techniques.

To give the student an understanding digital cellular systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

After the completion of this course, students will be able to

Analyze the cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse, handoff and how interference between

mobiles and base stations affects the capacity of cellular systems.

Apply the concepts on basic diversity, equalization and spread spectrum techniques in mobile

communication.

Analyze the current and future cellular mobile communication systems (GSM, IS95, WCDMA, etc.)

PRE REQUISITES:

Radio frequency propagation fundamentals,basics ofdigital communications, basic telephony

UNIT I CELLULAR MOBILE SYSTEMS 9

Historic perspective and overview of Mobile Communication Systems – A basic cellular system – operation of

cellular systems – overview of generations of cellular systems – concept of frequency reuse – co–channel

interference reduction factor – desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna system – co–

channel interference and Non–co–channel interference – design of antenna system – antenna parameter and

their effects – diversity receiver –Traffic theory – Erlang B system

UNIT II CELL COVERAGE, CELL SITE, FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT AND

HANDOFF

9

Cell coverage for signal and traffic – cell site and mobile antennas – frequency management and channel

assignment – Handoff – dropped calls and cell splitting

UNIT III MODULATION METHODS AND CODING FOR ERROR DETECTION AND

CORRECTION

9

Digital modulation methods in cellular wireless systems – OFDM – Block Coding – convolution coding and Turbo

157

coding.

UNIT IV SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES 9

Spread Spectrum Techniques – DSSS – FHSS – Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) – Time–division

multiple access (TDMA) – code division multiple access (CDMA) – CDMA capacity – probability of bit error

considerations – CDMA vs TDMA.

UNIT V SECOND And THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS SYSTEMS 9

GSM, IS–136 (D–AMPS), IS–95 – Third generation wireless systems – GPRS – EDGE – WCDMA – LTE.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. William, C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.

2. Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jerry D. Gibson, “Mobile Communication Hand Book”, 3rd

Edition, IEEE Press, 2012.

2. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles and Practice”, 2nd

Edition, Pearson

Education, 2010.

3. Lawrence Harte, “3G Wireless Demystified”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2001.

4. KavehPahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy”, Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall PTR,

2002

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://webmail.aast.edu/~khedr/Courses/Graduate/Wireless%20Communications_F08/Lecture%20four%

20channel%20II.pdf.

2. http://staff.neu.edu.tr/~fahri/wireless_chp6.pdf.

15ECA10 VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Objectives:

To understand the characteristics of CMOS systems

To discuss the delay models and interconnects in CMOS circuits

To study the HDL fundamentals

Course Outcomes:


Analyze the operation of various CMOS circuits

Apply the techniques for circuit characterization

Synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL

PRE REQUISITES:

Basic electronic devices and circuits, CMOS circuits, integrated circuits

158

UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode – forward and reverse bias characteristics – Bipolar Junction Transistors – Input and Output

characteristics of CE, CB& CC Configuration.

UNIT II FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR 9

JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics – Pinch off voltage and its significance – MOSFETCharacteristics –

DMOSFET – E MOSFET.

UNIT III IC FABRICATION 9

IC classification – fundamental of monolithic IC technology – epitaxial growth, masking and etching – diffusion of

impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging – Fabrication of diodes – capacitance, resistance and

FETs.

UNIT IV MOS DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS 9

Ideal I–V and C–V characteristics – non ideal I–V effects – DC transfer characteristics – Scaling of Devices.

UNIT V HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE 9

Verilog HDL fundamentals – Types of Modeling – HDL for Logic Gates – Half Adder – Full Adder – Half / Full

Subtractor – Comparators.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, 3rd

Edition, Tata McGrawHill Inc. 2007

2. D.RoyChoudhary, SheilB.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 2nd

Edition, New Age, 2003.

3. N.H.E.Westeetal, “CMOS VLSI Design”,3rd

Edition, Pearson, 2005

4. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson, 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA– based System Design”, Pearson, 2004

2. Mark Gordon Arnold, “Verilog Digital – Computer Design”, Prentice Hall (PTR), 1999.

3. MichealD.Ciletti, “Modeling, Synthesis and Rapid Prototyping with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall, 1999.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.eolss.net/sample-chapters/c05/e6-195-04.pdf

2. http://web.ewu.edu/groups/technology/Claudio/ee430/Lectures/L1-print.pdf

3. http://www.circuitstoday.com/integrated-circuits

4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_digital_system.htm

Offered by CSE Department

15CSA01 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To identify the basics of Internet and its protocol

To learn HTML5 controls for the creation of static web pages

To present HTML documents using Cascading Style Sheets (CSS).

159

To learn to create user interactive web pages using JavaScript and DOM

To handle the clients’ requests at the server end using PHP

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Exploit the basics of Internet and realize the significance of HTTP protocol in the WWW.

Develop website using HTML5

Design interesting and appealing HTML pages using CSS

Validate the users’ data using JavaScript

Access and process various elements of web pages using DOM

Generate dynamic response to client request using PHP

PREREQUISITES:

Programming Principles

UNIT I BASICS OF NETWORK AND WEB CONCEPTS 9

Types of Network – Reason for Networks – Communication between Computers – Serial and Parallel

Communication – Asynchronous and Synchronous Communication – Simplex, Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex

Communications – Data Rate, Bandwidth and Throughput – Switched Connections – Topologies used in

Networking – Basic Internet Protocols – The World Wide Web – HTTP Request Message – HTTP Response

Message – Web Clients – Web Servers

UNIT II HTML5 9

Introduction to HTML5 – Editing HTML5 – W3C HTML validation service – Headings – Linking - Images – Special

characters and horizontal rules – Lists – Tables – Forms – Internal linking - Meta elements – New HTML5 Form

input types – Input and datalist elements and auto complete attribute – Page structure elements – Introduction to

Canvas – Canvas Coordinate System – Rectangles – Drawing arcs and circles – Shadows

UNIT III CSS3, JAVASCRIPT 9

Types of CSS – Conflicting style sheets – Positioning Elements – Element Dimension – Box model and Text Flow

– Media types – Media Queries – Drop-Down Menus – Text shadows – Rounded corners – Color – Box

Shadows. Introduction to JavaScript – Syntax - Variables and Data types – JavaScript Control Statements –

Operators – Literals - Functions – Objects – Arrays – Built-in objects

UNIT IV DOCUMENT OBJECT MODEL 9

Introduction to the Document Object Model – Intrinsic Event Handling – Modifying Element Style – The Document

Tree – Properties of window – DOM Collections – Using Timer and Dynamic Styles to create animated effects –

JavaScript Event Handling – Reviewing the load, mousemove, mouseover, mouseout events – Form processing

with focus, blur, submit, reset – Event Bubbling – More Events

UNIT V PHP 9

Introduction – Converting Between Data Types – Arithmetic Operators – Initializing and Manipulating Arrays –

String Comparisons – String processing with regular expressions – Form Processing and Business Logic –

Reading from a database – Using Cookie – Dynamic Content

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. P.J. Deitel, H.M. Deitel, “Internet and World Wide Web – How to program”, Pearson Education

Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2009.

2. Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies - A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. John Cowley, "Communications and Networking An Introduction", Springer, Second Edition, 2013

2. Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.

3. Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., “Html5 Black Book: Covers CSS3, JavaScript, XKL, XHTML, AJAX,

160

PHP and jQuery”, Dreamtech Press, 2011.

4. Bates, “Developing Web Applications”, Wiley, 2006.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.ac.in

2. http://www.echoecho.com/javascript.htm

3. http://www.w3schools.com/php/

4. http://www.theshulers.com/whitepapers/internet_whitepaper/index.html

5. http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip2/#UDP

15CSA02

FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To explore the fundamental concepts of software engineering

To learn the requirements engineering process and planning for software development

To understand the software design principles

To know coding standards and different testing strategies

To learn the project management principles and quality assurance standards

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply software engineering principles for software development.

Formulate software requirement specification and plan for software development

Design software according to the specification

Code the software using guidelines / standards and conduct testing

Manage and maintain the software process by assuring the quality

PREREQUISITES:

Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques is preferred

UNIT I SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 8

The Nature of Software - Software Engineering - Software Myths – Process Models: Prescriptive Process

Models, Specialized Process Models, Personal and Team Process Models – Overview of Agile Process -

Overview of CMMi

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ENGINEERING AND PLANNING 10

Requirements Engineering: Establishing the Groundwork - Eliciting Requirements - Negotiating Requirements -

Validating Requirements - Requirements Analysis using scenario based modeling. Process and Project Metrics:

Software Measurement - Metrics for Software Quality. Estimation: The Project Planning Process – Resources -

Software Project Estimation - Decomposition Techniques - Empirical Estimation Models - Project Scheduling

UNIT III MODELLING AND DESIGN 9

Modelling: Data Modeling Concepts - Class-Based Modeling - Flow-Oriented Modeling - Creating a Behavioral

Model Design Concepts - Architectural Design: Software Architecture, Architectural Styles, Architectural Design,

Architectural Mapping Using Data Flow - User Interface Design: The Golden Rules, User Interface Analysis and

Design, Interface Analysis

UNIT IV CODING AND SOFTWARE TESTING 9

Coding standards and guidelines - Testing: Strategic approach to Software Testing - Test Strategies for

Conventional Software - Validation Testing - System Testing – Debugging – White-box Testing - Basis Path

Testing - Control Structure Testing - Black-box Testing

UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND SOFTWARE QUALITY 9

161

Project Management Concepts: The Management Spectrum, People, Product and Process – Software

Configuration Management – Risk Management - Quality Management: Software Quality, Achieving Software

Quality - Elements of Software Quality Assurance - The ISO 9000 Quality Standard

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. Roger S. Pressman and Bruce R. Maxim, “Software Engineering – A practitioner’s approach”, McGraw

Hill Publications, Eighth Edition, 2014

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Pankaj Jalote, ”An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering”, Springer, Third Edition, 2005

2. Ian Sommerville, “Software engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, Seventh Edition, 2007.

3. Watts S.Humphrey, ”A Discipline for Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2007.

4. James F.Peters and Witold Pedrycz, ”Software Engineering, Engineering Approach”, Wiley-India, 2007.

5. Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

6. S.A.Kelkar, ”Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt, 2007

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.mhhe.com/pressman

2. www.rspa.com/spi/

3. http://www.comp.lancs.ac.uk/computing/resources/IanS/

4. http://www.ee.umanitoba.ca/~cilab/main.html

5. http://www.wiley.com/college/comp/peters189642

15CSA03

INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To correlate the role of database management systems in information technology applications

To structure data using relational model

To explore the features of structured query language

To reduce the anomalies using Normalization

To manage transaction and concurrency control techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Draw the ER Diagram for enterprise applications

Design databases using relational model

Query the database using SQL

Apply normalization techniques on the databases

Perform transaction and concurrency control techniques.

PREREQUISITES:

Knowledge of Data Files is preferred

UNIT I DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS 9

Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data - Database System Architecture – Database Users and

Administrators – Data Models – Structure of Network Model – Structure of Hierarchical Model – Entity

Relationship Model – Constraints – Removing Redundant Attributes in Entity Sets – E-R Diagrams - Design

Issues – Extended E-R Features – Introduction of Relational Model – E-R Reduction to Relational Schemas

UNIT II RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL 9

Structure of Relational Databases – Database Schema – Schema Diagrams – Relational Query Languages -

162

Relational Algebra – Tuple Relational Calculus -– Domain Relational Calculus

UNIT III STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE 9

Overview of SQL query language – SQL Data definition – Basic Structure of SQL Queries – Additional Basic

Operations – Set Operations – Null values – Aggregate Operations – Nested Subqueries – Joins – Views –

Integrity Constraints – Authorization. Introduction to Advanced SQL: Functions and Procedures – Triggers

UNIT IV NORMALIZATION 9

Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – Dependency Preservation - First, Second, Third Normal

Forms – Boyce Codd Normal Form

UNIT V TRANSACTION AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL 9

Transaction Model – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability - Conflict serializability – View

Serializability – Testing Serializability. Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks – Multiple

Granularity – Time Stamp Based Protocols – Validation Based Protocols

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw Hill, Sixth

Edition, 2011.

2. C.J. Date, A. Kannan and S. Swamynathan, ”An Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson

Education, Eighth Edition, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education/Addison Wesley,

Sixth Edition, 2010.

2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,

Implementation and Management”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.

3. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGraw Hill, Third Edition

2004.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.ac.in

2. http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html

3. http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf

4. http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp

5. http://sqlzoo.net/

6. http://www.service-architecture.com/database/articles/ acid_properties.html

15CSA04

INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the basics of problem solving techniques and analysis of algorithms

To learn the various searching and sorting techniques

To impart knowledge on ADTs such as List, Stack, Queue

To explore the binary trees and priority queues

To get exposure on hashing techniques and graphs

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze recursive and non recursive algorithms for complexity

Apply various searching / sorting algorithms for solving real-world problems

Implement List, Stack and Queue with appropriate data structures

Work with binary trees and heap based priority queue

163

Exploit the hashing technique and graph algorithms

PREREQUISITES:

Knowledge of Memory Organization, Fundamentals of C Programming

UNIT I ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS 9

Introduction to Algorithms and algorithmic problem solving – Problem types. Analysis of Algorithms: Analysis

Framework - Asymptotic Notations – Best case, worst case and average cases - Mathematical analysis of

non-recursive algorithms - Recurrence equations – Solving recurrence equations - Mathematical analysis of

recursive algorithms.

UNIT II SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9

Search Algorithms: Linear search - binary search - Analysis of Search algorithms. Sorting Algorithms: Bubble

sort - Exchange sort - Insertion sort – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap sort - Analysis of Sorting Algorithms.

UNIT III LISTS, STACKS AND QUEUES 9

Abstract Data Types – The List ADT – Singly Linked List – Doubly Linked List – Circular Linked List –

Applications and analysis of List. The Stack ADT – Applications and Analysis of Stack. The Queue ADT –

Applications and Analysis of Queues.

UNIT IV TREES AND HEAPS 9

Preliminaries – Binary Trees – Expression Trees- Traversals. The Search Tree ADT – Binary Search Trees –

Applications of BST. Priority Queues – Binary heap – Heap operations - Applications of heaps.

UNIT V HASHING AND GRAPHS 9

Hashing – Closed hashing: Separate Chaining – Open Addressing - Linear probing. Graph ADT – Representation

of graph – Graph Traversals: DFS and BFS. Applications of Graph - Finding Shortest Path - Connected

components.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education Asia, 2003.

2. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education Asia, Second

Edition, 1997.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson

Education, New Delhi, 2006

2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”, Orient

Longman, Second Edition, 2008.

3. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Second Edition, 1991.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106101059/

2. http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/algorithm.html

3. http://www.mif.vu.lt/~algis/dsax/DsSort.pdf

4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf

5. www.cs.cornell.edu/courses/cs312/2005sp/lectures/rec19.html

15CSA05

FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To acquire basic knowledge of operating system structures and its functioning

To study the concept of process management

164

To learn the basics of memory management

To understand the structure of file systems

To familiarize with different operating systems

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the components of operating system and their functionalities

Analyze the various process management algorithms

Evaluate the performance of various memory management techniques

Design a simple file system and analyze the performance

Work with some popular operating systems like Linux, Windows

PREREQUISITES:

Working Principles of Computers

UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW 9

Introduction to operating systems – Computer system organization - architecture – Operating system structure -

operations – Process, memory, storage management – Open source operating systems – OS services – User

interface – System calls – System programs – Process concept - scheduling – Operations on processes –

Cooperating processes – Inter-process communication – Threads

UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 9

Basic concepts – Scheduling algorithms – Algorithm evaluation – The critical section problem – Synchronization

hardware – Semaphores – Classic problems of synchronization – Deadlocks – Deadlock characterization –

Methods for handling deadlocks – Deadlock prevention – Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery

from deadlock.

UNIT III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9

Memory management – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation – Paging – Segmentation - Virtual memory:

Background – Demand paging – Copy on write – Page replacement – Allocation of frames – Thrashing

UNIT IV FILE MANAGEMENT 9

File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File-system mounting – Protection – Directory

implementation – Allocation methods – Free space management – Disk scheduling – Disk management

UNIT V CASE STUDY 9

The Linux system – History – Process management – Scheduling – Memory management – File systems – Inter

Process Communication

Windows OS - History – Design principles

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts Essentials”, John

Wiley & Sons Inc., 8th Edition, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.

2. Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education,

1996.

3. D M Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,

Second Edition, 2007.

4. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition,

2011.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.nptel.ac.in

165

2. http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/classes/fa06/cse120/lectures/120-fa06-l13.pdf

3. http://www.cs.kent.edu/~farrell/osf03/oldnotes/

15CSA06

FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basics and challenges of Cloud Computing

To introduce the virtualization concepts and cloud file system

To get an exposure on third-party cloud solutions

To understand the cloud security and efficiency issues

To explore the possibilities of applying cloud solutions in various applications

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the challenges in Cloud Computing adoption

Implement virtualization and work with cloud file system

Identify the various cloud-based solutions available with different providers

Secure and optimize the cloud for delivering better performance

Identify and provide cloud-based solution for the problem under consideration

PREREQUISITES:

Knowledge of Computers, Networking is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING 9

Overview of Distributed computing - Introduction to Cloud Computing: Definitions - Central idea - Properties and

Characteristics - Benefits - Cloud service and deployment model - Organizational scenario - Architecture -

Vocabulary - Challenges - Supporting services - Management and administration of Cloud services

UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION AND FILE SYSTEM 9

Virtualization Techniques: Virtualization Technology - Overview of x86 virtualization - Types of virtualization -

Virtualization products - VLAN - SAN - VM Migration - VM Consolidation and Management - Cloud interoperability

standards

Cloud File System: Distributed file system - GFS - HDFS

UNIT III CLOUD SOLUTIONS 9

Different Cloud Providers and service comparison: Infrastructure service providers - Comparison between

infrastructure service providers - Identification of business requirement - Cloud infrastructure setup procedure -

Platform service providers - Comparison between platform service providers - Identification of business

requirement - Cloud platform setup procedure - Cloud application development - Software service providers -

Comparison between software service providers

Cloud Database - Cloud programming model - Private cloud computing platforms

UNIT IV CLOUD SECURITY - MIDDLEWARE AND TESTING 9

Cloud Security: Fundamentals - Cloud Risk - Division - Security Architecture - VM Security Challenges -

Vulnerability assessment tool for cloud - Open source security solution products

Cloud Middleware: Need for Cloud Middleware - QoS issues in cloud - Data migration and Streaming -

Performance monitoring tools in cloud - Best practices

Cloud Testing: Types - Testing strategy

UNIT V CLOUD APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Advanced Cloud Applications - Sharing and Collaborative services in cloud - Outside the cloud services - Cloud

Analytics - Software plus services - Cloud Content Delivery Network services (CDN) - Mobile cloud computing -

Sky computing - Cloud governance

166

Case Study: Cloud infrastructure adoption case study - Cloud platform adoption case study - Cloud software

services adoption case study - Cloud simulation tools - Future of cloud computing

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Rishabh Sharma, “Cloud Computing Fundamentals, Industry Approach and Trends”, Wiley India, 2015.

2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing from Parallel

Processing to the Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vines, “Cloud Security – A comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud

Computing”, Wiley – India, 2010.

2. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and

Security”, CRC Press, 2010.

3. George Reese, “Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the Cloud”

O'Reilly

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://whatiscloud.com/basic_concepts_and_terminology/cloud

2. http://www.vmware.com/in/virtualization/overview

3. http://www.csoonline.com/article/2125258/cloud-security/cloud-security--the-basics.html

4. http://thecloudtutorial.com/cloudvendors.html

5. http://thecloudtutorial.com/freecloudcomputingapplications.html

15CSA07

PRINCIPLES OF MULTIMEDIA

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the basic concepts related to Multimedia

To explain the basic multimedia building blocks and application development tools.

To demonstrate online multimedia application creation tools

To understand computer animation basics and needs

To demonstrate various computer animation techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the architectural components for multimedia applications.

Work with various elements of multimedia.

Develop audio, video, and images using multimedia tools.

Identify issues and solutions in implementing security for multimedia applications.

Model and render the 3D objects using animation tools.

Develop interactive animations using multimedia tools

PREREQUISITES:

Fundamental Knowledge of Graphics, Data is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA 9

Multimedia overview: Components , Hypermedia ,File formats – Color models – Digital Audio representation –

Digital music making – MIDI - Digital Video: Video compression techniques – Multimedia for portable devices

UNIT II MULTIMEDIA BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Multimedia building blocks: Text, Graphics, Video Capturing, Sound capturing and editing - Introduction to 2D &

3D graphics – Surface characteristics and texture – Lights – Animation: key frames & tweening – Techniques –

Principles of animation – 3D animation – File formats

167

UNIT III MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS 9

Databases: Properties of MMDBMS, Multimedia queries, Management of continuous data, document modeling,

Media Servers- Security: Digital Signatures, steganographic methods: single images, motion pictures, audio data,

3D scenes, copyright protection.

UNIT IV COMPUTER ANIMATION BASICS 9

History of Computer Animation - Modeling digital objects : Modeling Concepts - Modeling Techniques –

Rendering Concepts : Lights, Camera and Materials - color- Rendering Process - Hidden surface removal - Z-

Buffer - Ray tracing

UNIT V COMPUTER ANIMATION TECHNIQUES 9

Principles of animation - Computer Animation techniques: keyframe Techniques, camera animation, light

animation, animation file formats - Advanced Computer Animation techniques: Motion Capture, Facial animation,

crowd animation - Visual effects techniques: Crowd replications, 3-d morphing, motion control.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. John F. Koegel Bufend, “Multimedia systems”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2002

2. Parekh R, “Principles of Multimedia”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.

3. Isaac V.Kerlow, “The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects”, Wiley Publications, 4th Edition,2009

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Mohammed Dastbaz, “Designing Interactive Multimedia”, McGraw Hill Publication, 2002.

2. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Applications”, Springer, 2007

15CSA08

INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the fundamental concepts of genetic algorithms

To solve optimization problems using advanced GA operators

To understand the multi objective optimization concepts

To learn the significance of evolutionary algorithms

To study the applications of genetic algorithms

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore the basics of genetic algorithms

Solve real world problems using advanced operators of GA

Work with multi objective optimization problems

Identify the different evolutionary algorithms for solving problems

Apply genetic algorithms to solve real-world domain problems

PREREQUISITES:

Knowledge of Problem Solving Techniques towards Optimization is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Introduction - Comparison of Biological and GA terminology – Mutation – Selection – Elitism – Crossover -

Initialization

UNIT II ADVANCED OPERATORS OF GA 9

Combinatorial optimization – Constraints - Multicriteria optimization - Hybrid algorithm - Alternative selection and

crossover methods - Meta Gas – Mutation - Parallel GA

UNIT III MULTIOBJECTIVE OPTIMIZATION 9

168

Multi objective optimization problem - Principles of Multi objective optimization problem - Difference with single

objective optimization - Dominance and Pareto optimality - Optimality conditions

UNIT IV EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS 9

Difficulties with classical optimization algorithms - Genetic algorithms - Evolution strategies - Evolution

programming - Genetic programming – Multi-model function optimization

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Image registration - Recursive prediction of night light levels - Estimation of the optical parameter of liquid

crystals - Design of energy - efficient buildings - Multi objective network rehabilitation of Messy GA

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. David A Coley, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms for Scientists and Engineers”, World Scientific

Publishing Company,1997.

2. Kalyamoy Deb,” Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms”, John Wiley & Sons, First

Edition, 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Melaine Mitchell “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, First MIT Press paperback edition, 1998.

2. S.N. Sivanandam, S.N. Deepa “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, Springer, 2008.

3. David E. Goldberg “Genetic Algorithms”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2009.

4. Koza, John, Wolfgang Banzhaf, Kumar Chellapilla, Kalyanmoy Deb, Marco Dorigo, David Fogel, Max

Garzon, David Goldberg, Hitoshi Iba, and Rick Riolo(Eds.), "Genetic Programming", Academic Press.

Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1998.

5. John R.Koza, Forrest H Bennett III , David Andre, Martin A Keane, "Genetic Programming III: Darwinian

Invention and Problem Solving" Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1999.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol1/hmw/article1.html

2. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/

3. http://intelligence.worldofcomputing.net/machine-learning/genetic-algorithms.html#.VtVvblLlwgQ

4. http://epubs.siam.org/doi/abs/10.1137/0202009

5. http://study.com/academy/lesson/genetic-algorithms-examples-lesson.html

6. http://www.csbdu.in/pdf/Practical_Genetic_Algorithms.pdf

7. http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/ga-basic-description.php

8. https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt

15CSA09

XML PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basics of markup languages and CSS

To acquire knowledge on XML and its DTD structure.

To understand XML schema creation.

To familiarize with DOM-based and SAX-based parsers.

To study XSLT documents and different custom markup languages.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Construct / design web pages using HTML and CSS

Experiment XML document validation using DTD

Validate XML documents using schemas

Conduct experiments on XML documents using DOM / SAX parsers

Transform XML documents to HTML using XSLT and review other custom markup languages

PREREQUISITES:

https://www.cs.wmich.edu/~elise/courses/cs6800/Genetic-Algorithms.ppt

169

Basic Principles of Programming is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKUPS AND CSS 9

History of WWW – History of SGML – History of XML – Review of HTML tags: Lists – tables – links – images -

frames. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS): Inline styles – creating CSS with style, element – external CSS.

UNIT II XML MARKUP CREATION AND DTD 9

XML Markup introduction – Parsers, well-formed and valid XML documents – Parsing XML document with msxml

– characters – markup – XML namespaces - Document Type Declaration - Element Type Declarations - Attribute

Declarations – Simple DTD creation.

UNIT III XML SCHEMAS 9

Schema versus DTDs - Microsoft XML Schema: Describing elements - Describing attributes – Data types –

Simple XML schema creation.

UNIT IV DOM AND SAX PARSERS 9

DOM with JavaScript – DOM components – Traversing the DOM – SAX-based parsers – Events – Simple SAX

program – DOM versus SAX

UNIT V EXTENSIBLE STYLESHEET LANGUAGE TRANSFORMATION (XSLT) 9

Templates – Creating elements and attributes – Iteration and sorting – Conditional processing – Combining

stylesheets – Variables.

Introduction to Custom Markup Languages: Mathematical Markup Language (MathML) - Chemical Markup

Language (CML) - Wireless Markup Language (WML) - NewsML.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:

1. H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, T.R. Nieto, T.M. Lin, and P. Sadhu, “XML How to program”, Pearson Education

India, 2001.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Heather Williamson, “XML: The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2001.

2. Cliff Binstock, “The XML Schema Complete Reference”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2003.

3. Steven Holzner, “Inside XML”, New Riders, 2001.

4. Erik T. Ray, “Learning XML”, Second Edition, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2003.

5. Elliotte Rusty Harold, W. Scott Means, “XML in a Nutshell”, O'Reilly Media Inc., 2004.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp

2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/xml/

3. http://www.xmlmaster.org/en/article/d01/

4. http://www.javatpoint.com/xml-tutorial

15CSA10

INTRODUCTION TO UML

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce object oriented modelling concepts and the role of UML

To learn to model the requirements and work flows

To explore the ways to model logical structure

To know how to how to represent dynamic behavior in UML

To understand the representation of behavior modelling in UML

COURSE OUTCOMES:

170

Model a scenario using Object Oriented Modelling

Identify use cases and draw Use case and activity diagrams

Represent logical design using class and object diagrams

Represent dynamic behavior using sequence and collaboration diagrams

Model the behaviors using state transition diagram

PREREQUISITES:

Knowledge of Modelling, Object Oriented Principles is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND OBJECT ORIENTED MODELLING 9

Introduction to UML - UML and Process - Perspectives of UML - Object Oriented Paradigm-Models - Object

Modelling - Models and Diagrams - Views of a Model

UNIT II MODELLING REQUIREMENT AND WORKFLOW 9

Modelling Requirements as Use cases - Use Case Diagrams – Relationships - Levels of Use Cases - Use cases

and features. Activity Diagrams: Basics – Activities and Action - Decisions and merges - Swim lanes -

Concurrency

UNIT III MODELLING LOGICAL STRUCTURE 9

Classes – Objects – Class relationship - Class Diagram – Multiplicity - Types – Implementation classes –

Interfaces – packages and subsystems – Object diagrams.

UNIT IV MODELLING ORDERED INTERACTION 9

Sequence Diagrams – Participants - Time-event, signals and messages - Use case and sequence diagram -

Collaboration Diagram

UNIT V BEHAVIOUR MODELLING 9

State Diagrams: States, Transitions, Advanced state diagrams. Component and Deployment Diagrams -

Extension using stereo types and properties

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK:

1. Kim Hamilton and Russell Miles, “Learning UML 2.0”, O'Reilly, 2006

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sinan Si Alhir, “Learning UML”, O'Reilly, 2003.

2. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled”, Addison Wesley, Third Edition, 2004.

3. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified Modeling Language User Guide”,

Addison-Wesley, 2005.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.uml.org/

2. http://www.omg.org/ocup-2/coveragemap-found.htm#FoundationRefs

3. https://www.gliffy.com/uses/uml-software/

4. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/

15CSA11

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ORGANIZATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To have a knowledge on basic digital principles.

To understand the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.

To explore the basic processing unit

To study the hierarchical memory system.

To learn the pipelining architecture concepts.

http://www.uml.org/

http://www.omg.org/ocup-2/coveragemap-found.htm#FoundationRefs

https://www.gliffy.com/uses/uml-software/

http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/

171

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply digital principle concepts to design logical circuits

Design the arithmetic circuits for faster operations

Analyze the main processing units of a computer.

Analyze memory hierarchy and its impact on computer cost/performance.

Design a pipeline for consistent execution of instructions with minimum hazards

PREREQUISITES:

Knowledge in Working Principles of Computers is preferred

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PRINCIPLES 9

Boolean functions – Simplifications of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map- Implementation of Boolean

functions using logic gates - Decoders and encoders - Multiplexers and demultiplexers

UNIT II BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS 9

Functional units – Basic operational concepts – Performance – Instructions and instruction sequencing –

Addressing modes – RISC and CISC Styles – Arithmetic: Design of fast adders – Multiplication of unsigned and

signed numbers – Fast Multiplication – Floating point numbers and operations.

UNIT III BASIC PROCESSING UNIT 9

Fundamental concepts – Instruction Execution – Hardware Components - Instruction Fetch and Execution Steps

– Control Signals – Hardwired control

UNIT IV MEMORY SYSTEM 9

Basic concepts – Memory hierarchy - Semiconductor RAM – Read-only Memories – Direct Memory Access –

Cache memories – Performance considerations – Virtual memory

UNIT V PIPELINING 9

Basic concepts – Pipeline organization and issues – Data dependencies – Memory and branch delays –

Performance evaluation

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and

Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Sixth Edition, 2011.

2. M.Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The

Hardware/Software interface”, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2005.

2. “Computer Organization”, ISRD Group, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

3. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for Performance”, Pearson

Education, Sixth Edition, 2003.

4. Charles H.Roth, Jr. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, Cengage Earning, 4th

Edition, 2005.

5. Donald D.Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.ics.p.lodz.pl/~dpuchala/CompArch/Lecture_6.pdf

2. http://www.dauniv.ac.in/downloads/CArch_PPTs/

3. www.nptel.ac.in

4. http://cse.iitk.ac.in/users/karkare/courses/2011/cs220/html/notes.html

172

Offered by IT Department

15ITA01 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the output primitives like line, circle and ellipse using algorithms.

To study the 2-D and 3-D viewing and transformations.

To understand various, color models modeling and animation techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply the line, circle and ellipse drawing algorithms

Apply the two dimensional geometric transformations and clipping

Apply the three dimensional geometric transformations

Work with color and illumination models

Apply different methods for Modeling COURSE PREREQUISITES:

C Programming


Introduction-Applications-Graphics systems-Output Primitives-representing Image-Straight Line-Line drawing

Algorithms-DDA Algorithm-Bresenhams’ Line Algorithm-Circle Generating Algorithm- Bresenhams’ Circle Algorithm-

Midpoint Circle Algorithm-Ellipse Generating Algorithm-Midpoint Ellipse Algorithm.

UNIT II TWO DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATIONS 9

Introduction-Representation of points-Matrix Algebra and Transformation-Transformation of points- Straightlines-

Midpoint Transformation-Transformation of parallel lines-Intersecting lines- Rotation - Reflection and scaling of

straight lines-Combined Transformations-Translation and Homogeneous Coordinates-Rotation about Arbitrary point-

Reflection about Arbitrary line-Windowing and clipping

UNIT III THREE DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATION 9

Introduction-3D Transformation-Rotation about an axis parallel to coordinate Axis-Reflection about an arbitrary axis in

space-Reflection through an arbitrary plane-3D Modeling schemes-Projection-Orthographic-Isometric-oblique-

perspective-3D clipping

UNIT IV COLOR AND ILLUMINATION MODELS 9

Introduction –colors-Illumination model and light sources-specular Reflection-Intensity Attenuation-Shadow-

Reflectivity and refractivity- Radiosity Model-Texturing-Surface-Bump mapping-Environment Mapping-Shading

Methods

UNIT V MODELLING CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Introduction - structures and Hierarchical Modeling-Advanced Modeling Techniques-Procedural Models-Fractals-

Grammar based Models-Physical based Modeling-Animation-Devices-Computer assisted-video formats-Frame by

Frame animation-Real Time Animation Techniques

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Amarendra N Sinha, Arun D Udai, ”Computer Graphics”,Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2008

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes ,”Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”, Addison Wesley,2004 2. D Hearn and P M Baker ,”Computer Graphics”, Prentice Hall of India Second Edition,2008 3. F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Second edition, Pearson Education 2003

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-837-computer-graphics-fall-2003/

173

2. http://www.moshplant.com/direct-or/bezier/

3. http://www.cs.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs3621/NOTES/spline/B-spline/bspline-curve-prop.html

4. http://nptel.ac.in/

15ITA02 RICH INTERNET APPLICATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To create websites combining HTML/CSS

To develop an understanding in the basics of html like forms, lists, frames etc

To develop a design with CSS

To increase the quality of website design by formatting with styles

To evaluate a web page design and consider the issues

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design a website in HTML

Apply concepts of element header in HTML

Design a webpage using frames, forms, images etc..

Create styles for the HTML document

Apply presentation techniques for webpage with CSS COURSE PREREQUISITES:

NIL

UNIT I INTRODUCTION : MARKUP WITH HTML 9

HTML & XHTML – markup instructions & Language – Rules of XHTML - HTML Values and Units – Tag

Attributes- Text and Comments – Uniform Resource Indicators - Document Structure – Head & Body – Styles

Definition – Block Elements – Inline Elements – Organisational Elements – Link – Images - Comments

UNIT II ELEMENT HEADER 9

Head – Document Title – Script & Style sections – Document background color and image – Text Structuring –

Character Formatting – Lists – Ordered – Unordered – Definition Lists – Links to a web page – Tables – Borders

and Rules – Rows and Cells – Formatting with Tables

UNIT III FRAMES, FORMS AND MULTIMEDIA 9

Framesets – frame – links to frames – nested framesets – Forms – GET and POST – Form attributes – Textbox –

checkbox – radiobutton – listbox – Buttons – Hidden fields – Images - Insert a Image – sizing – image maps –

multimedia – animated images & videos – embedding media

UNIT IV PRESENTATION WITH CSS 9

Styles and HTML – defining styles – cascading styles – style definitions – understanding selectors –

understanding style inheritance – pseudo-class – pseudo-elements – CSS value and units – inheritance and

cascade

UNIT V FORMATTING WITH CSS 9

CSS Inheritance and cascade – Font properties – Text Formatting – CSS lists – Padding, margin and borders –

CSS layouts – CSS positioning – Pseudo-elements and generated content – Dynamic HTML with CSS

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Steven M.Schafer, “HTML, XHTML and CSS”, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Fifth edition 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy, “HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly, 6th Edition, October 24, 2006

http://www.amazon.com/Chuck-Musciano/e/B000APEZS8/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.com/Bill-Kennedy/e/B000APEZTC/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_2

174

2. Thomas A. Powell, “Web Design: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, June 2000

3. Jeffrey C.Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006

4. Thomas Powell,”HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, Mar 2010

5. Jon Duckett ,”Beginning Web Programming with HTML, XHTML, and CSS”, Wrox Publications, 2008

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.codecademy.com

2. http://www.w3schools.com/html/

3. http://www.w3schools.com/css/

4. https://www.khanacademy.org/computing/computer-programming/html-css

5. http://tutorialehtml.com/en/

6. http://www.alternetwebdesign.com/htmltutorial/lesson1.htm

7. http://www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/

15ITA03 INTRODUCTION TO JAVA L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.

Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in Java, including defining classes, invoking methods, using class libraries, etc

Have the ability to write a computer program to solve specified problems

Be able to use the Java SDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write basic programs using fundamental structures.

Create basic programs using object oriented concepts.

Create classes that can handle exception and various errors handling mechanism.

Create Simple applications with GUI

Develop applications using applet and graphics.

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

Object Oriented Programming using C++

UNITI JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9

Overview of JDK framework – Identifiers – variables – Assignment statements and Expressions – Constants -

Numeric data types, operations and conversions – String Type – Scanner class – if switch statements – while – do

while – for loop – nested loop- Defining a method- Calling a method – Passing parameters by values – Overloading

methods.

UNITII OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS 9

Class Fundamentals-Using predefined classes--Constructors-Access control-Modifiers -Methods-Dealing with Static

Members and Methods-Method Overloading-Interfaces-Importing Packages-Understanding Class Path-Implementing

Packages-Java Doc Comments-Inheritance-Polymorphism.

UNITIII EXCEPTION / ERROR HANDLING 9

Garbage Collection-Finalize () Method-Exceptions & Errors-Types of Exception-Control Flow In Exceptions-Use of try

-catch-finally-throw-throws in Exception Handling -In-built and User Defined Exceptions-Checked and Un Checked

Exceptions

UNIT IV APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH GUI 9

http://www.amazon.in/Thomas-A.-Powell/e/B000AP7P76/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Thomas+Powell&search-alias=stripbooks

175

Event-Driven Programming- Event and Event Sources – Listeners, Registration and handling events – Mouse events

– Key events -Introduction to Swings-Frame-Components-Text Input-Choice Components-Menus-Dialog Box-Layout

Management

UNIT V APPLETS AND GRAPHICS 9

Applet class – JApplet class – Enabling applets to run as application – Passing string to applets – Html file and applet

tag- Graphics class – paint component method – Drawing graphics on panels – Drawing strings , lines, Rectangles,

and Ovals, Polygons , Polylines, FontMetrics class.

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOK

1. Y.Daniel Liang “ Introduction to Java Programming” 7th

Edition, Pearson Education,2013

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. P.J.Deitel & H.M.Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.

2. Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference“,Tata McgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.

3. E.BalaGurusamy, “Programming with java A Primer”, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html

2. http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html

3. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/ -

4. http://horstmann.com/corejava

5. www.deitel.com

6. http://www.kodejava.org/

7. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java

15ITA04 PERL L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To teach how to do programs in Perl

To study the basics of Perl syntax and constructs

To introduce list, arrays and hashes implementation in Perl

To read and write subroutines and data files

To parse and manipulate text with Perl regular expressions

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Devise Perl programs using scalar data and control structures

Develop simple programs in Perl using lists, arrays and hashing

Implement Perl Input Output programming

Apply and match regular expressions using Perl

Validate data using regular expressions

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

C Programming

UNITI SCALAR DATA 9

Perl programming introduction– Simple Perl program – Scalar data: Numbers – Strings – Variables – Operators–

Output with print – Getting user input – - The undefined value – Defined functions control structure - if – elseif - while

– unless – until – for control – loop control – conditional operator – logical operator

176

UNITII LIST, ARRAYS AND HASHES 9

Array elements – indices – List literals – Assignment – Interpolating arrays into strings – For each control structure –

Scalar and list context – Hash – Hash Element Access – Hash Assignment – Hash Functions – Use of Hash - %Env

Hash

UNITIII SUB ROUTINES AND IO 9

Sub routines definition– invoking sub routines – return variables – arguments – private variables – variable length

parameter list – lexical variables – non-scalar return values – persistent private variables – Standard input output –

formatted output – opening and using file handle

UNITIV REGULAR EXPRESSION 9

Regular expression definition – using simple patterns – character classes – matching with regular expression –

anchors – match variables - precedence

UNITV PROCESSING REGULAR EXPRESSION 9

Substitution – split operator – join operator - list context – powerful regular expression – Perl Modules – finding

modules – installing modules – using modules – strings and sorting

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Tom Christiansen, Randal L. Schwartz, Larry Wall, “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Sixth Edition, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Tom Christiansen, brian d foy, Larry Wall, Jon Orwant “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Fourth Edition, 2012.

2. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Tem R. Nieto, D. C. McPhie, “Perl How to Program”, Prentice Hall, First edition, 2001.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/perl/

2. https://www.perl.org

3. http://www.cs.cf.ac.uk/Dave/PERL/

15ITA05 FUZZY SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems

To choose various fuzzy inference systems and approximate reasoning for decision making

To understand the impact of fuzzy system for group decision making

To understand how to evaluate the criteria in structured situations

To learn to hybrid fuzzy with decision making methods

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the decision making problems in fuzzy environments

Identify the suitable FIS for decision making

Implement fuzzy concepts for multi-person decision making

Solve complex problems using multi-criteria decision making

Integrate fuzzy with decision making methods for ranking


NIL


177

Introduction – The Logic of Decisions, Behavioral Decision Theory and Decision Technology – Optimization –

Outranking – Evaluation – Basics of Fuzzy Set Theory – Individual Decision Making in Fuzzy Environments

UNITII DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS 9

Knowledge Based Vs Data based Systems – Linguistic Variables – Fuzzy logic – Approximate Reasoning – An

Interactive Decision Support System – Fuzzy and Semi Fuzzy Multi Objective Problems – Expert Systems and Fuzzy

Sets

UNITIII MULTI-PERSON DECISION MAKING IN FUZZY ENVIRONMENTS 9

Basic Models – Fuzzy Games – Fuzzy Team Theory – Fuzzy Group Decision Making – Fuzzy Mathematical

Programming - Fuzzy Linear and Non Linear Programming – Fuzzy Multi Stage Programming

UNITIV MULTI CRITERIA DECISION MAKING IN STRUCTURED SITUATIONS 9

Fuzzy Multi Criteria Programming – Multi Attribute Decision Making – Fuzzy Outranking – Operators and

Membership functions in Decision Models

UNITV DECISION MAKING WITH FUZZY INFORMATION 9

Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation – Fuzzy Ordering – Non Transitive Ranking – Preference and Consensus – Multiobjective

Decision Making – Fuzzy Bayesian Decision Method – Decision Making under Fuzzy States and Fuzzy Actions

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012 2. S. N. Sivanandam & S. N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley - India, 2007. 3. S. Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis and

Applications” Prentice Hall of India ,2003

WEB REFERENCES:

1. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/lect2.ppt

2. www.clei.org/cleiej/papers/v13i3p4.pdf

3. www.math.ucdenver.edu/~wlodwick/m4-5779/lecture3fuzzylogic.ppt

15ITA06 GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To explore the basic Primitives and attributes in OpenGL

To study the geometric objects and transformations

To Understand the various lighting and shading effects

To gain a proficiency with OpenGL by applying Modeling techniques, curves and surfaces

COURSE OUTCOMES:

178

Apply basic Primitives and Attributes for 2D transformations

Work with 3D transformations using OpenGL

Implement Lighting and shading effects

Apply various Modeling Techniques

Apply various Curves and Surfaces for different objects

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

C Programming

UNITI GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction-Sierpinski Gasket-Programming 2D Applications-OpenGL Application Programming Interface-Primitives

and Attributes-Color-Viewing-Control Functions-Gasket program-Polygons and Recursions-3D Gasket-Adding

Interaction-Menus

UNITII GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS 9

Scalars points and Vectors-3D primitives-Coordinate systems and Frames-Frames in open GL-Modeling a colored

cube-Affine Transformations-Translation - Rotation and scaling-Transformation in homogeneous coordinates-

Transformation matrices in OpenGL-spinning of the cube-Interface to 3D applications- quaternion-classical and

computer viewing-parallel, Perspective Projections with OpenGL-Hidden surface Removal

UNITIII LIGHTING AND SHADING 9

Light and Matter-Light sources-The Phong Reflection Model-computation of vectors-Polygonal Shading-specifying

Light Parameters-Implementing a Lighting Model-Shading of the sphere Model-Per Fragment Lighting-Vertices to

fragments-Clipping-Line Segment Clipping-Polygon Clipping-Clipping in 3D-Rasterization-Bresenhams Algorithm-

Polygon Rasterization-Hidden Surface Removal

UNITIV MODELING AND HIERARCHY 9

Symbols and Instances-Hierarchical Models-A Robot Arm-Trees and Traversal-Animation –Graphical objects-Scene

Graphs-Open Scene Graphs-Graphics and Internet-Procedural Methods-Algorithmic Models-Newtonion Particles-

Constraints-A Simple Particle System-Language Based Models-Recursive Methods and fractals-Procedural Noise

UNITV CURVES AND SURFACES 9

Representation of curves and surfaces-Design Criteria-Parametric cubic Polynomial Curves-Interpolation-Hermite

curves and surfaces-Bezier curves and surfaces-Cubic B Splines-General B Splines-Rendering curves and surfaces-

Utah teapot-Advanced Rendering-Parallel-volume-Direct Volume-Image Based Rendering

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Edward Angel,Dave Shreiner ,”Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach with Shader-Based OpenGL” ,Sixth Edition,2011

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sumanta Guha Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, CRC Press, Second Edition, 2014

2. Tom McReynolds, David Blythe,”Advanced Graphics Programming Using OpenGL”Morgan Kauffmann,2005

3. Clayton Walnum,”3-D graphics programming with OpenGL,” Que, 1995

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://learnopengl.com/ 2. http://www.videotutorialsrock.com/

179

3. http://www.cs.uccs.edu/~ssemwal/indexGLTutorial.html 4. http://www.opengl-tutorial.org/ 5. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~cs4204/lectures/opengl_basics.pdf

15ITA07 PHP PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce web development with PHP

To work with various operations in PHP

To model the design in a web environment

To develop a webpage with database

To test and work with a PHP application

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Create simple basic PHP programs

Create programs using functions and strings

Explore the usage of arrays and objects

Implement graphics, security and web techniques in designing

Implement database connectivity with PHP

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

NIL

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO PHP 9

PHP – History and Evolution – Installation – Language Basics – Lexical Structure – Data types – Variables –

Expression & Operators – Flow Control statements – embedding PHP in web pages

UNITII FUNCTIONS & STRINGS 9

Calling a function – Defining a function – Variable scope – function parameters – return values – variable functions –

Strings – Quoting string constants – Printing string – cleaning strings – encoding and escaping – comparing strings –

manipulating and searching strings -

UNITIII ARRAYS & OBJECTS 9

Indexed versus Associative Arrays – Identifying elements of an array – Storing data in arrays – Multidimensional

arrays –Extracting multiple values – Conversion between arrays and variables – Traversing arrays – Sorting –

Working with arrays – Objects – Creation – Accessing Properties and methods – Declaration of class – Introspection

UNIT IV WEB TECHNIQUES, GRAPHICS & SECURITY 9

HTTP basics – Server Information – Processing Forms –Setting Response Headers – Maintaining State – SSL –

Graphics – Embed an image – Create and draw images – Images with text – Dynamic buttons – Color handling –

Security – Cross site scripting – File uploads and Access

UNIT V DATABASE ACCESS &APPLICATION 9

PHP to access a database – Relational databases and SQL – MySQL object interface – Connectivity – Direct file

level manipulation – Application techniques – code libraries – handing output - error reporting and suppression –

performance tuning

TOTAL: 45 Periods

180

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kevin Tatroe, Peter MacIntyre & Rasmus Lerdorf, “Programming PHP”, Creating Dynamic

Web Pages, O'Reilly Media, 3rd Edition, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Steven Holzner ,”PHP: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education,2008

2. Timothy Boronczyk , Martin E. Psinas,”PHP and MYSQL: Create - Modify – Reuse”, Wiley India Private Limited ,2008

3. Matt Doyle,”Beginning PHP 5.3”, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://php.net/

2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/php/

3. http://www.toves.org/books/php/ch03-first/index.html

4. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/php

5. http://www.w3schools.com/php/

15ITA08 ANDROID APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To build your own android application for you mobile devices

To understand how android application works.

To utilize the power of background services, thread and notifications

Secure, tune, package and deploy android applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Use Android SDK for simple applications

Create Graphical user interfaces for Android application.

Create Android application for data processing and management

Create location based services using android

Test the Android application

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

Java Programming

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO ANDROID 9

Introduction to Android Architecture: Introduction, History, Features and Android Architecture. Android Application

Environment, SDK, Tools: Application Environment and Tools, Android SDK. Programming paradigms and Application

Components Intents, Content providers, Broadcast receivers, Services

UNITII USER INTERFACE DESIGN 9

User Interface Design Views &View Groups, Views : Button, Text Field, Radio Button, Toggle Button, Checkbox,

Spinner, Image View, Image switcher, Event Handling, Listeners, Layouts : Linear, Relative, List View, Grid View, Table

View, Web View, Adapters. Menus, Action Bars, Notifications: Status, Toasts and Dialogs, Styles and Themes, Creating

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Steven+Holzner&search-alias=stripbooks

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Timothy+Boronczyk&search-alias=stripbooks

http://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Martin+E.+Psinas&search-alias=stripbooks

http://www.amazon.com/Matt-Doyle/e/B0028OLTMY/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

181

Custom Widgets, Focus, Touch Mode, Screen Orientation. Designing for Tablets – Working with tablets: Developing for

the Honeycomb and Ice Cream Sandwich platforms, Manipulating objects with drag and drop, Optimizing applications for

high screen resolution, combining fragments into a multilane UI. Resources, Assets, Localization: Resources and

Assets, Creating Resources, Managing application resources and assets, Resource-Switching in Android. Localization,

Localization Strategies, Testing Localized Applications, Publishing Localized Applications

UNITIII DATA STORAGE 9

Content Providers: Contents provider, Uri, CRUD access, Browser, CallLog, Contacts, Media Store, and Setting. Data

Access and Storage: Shared Preferences, Storage External, Network Connection. SQLite - SQLite Databases

UNIT IV NATIVE CAPABILITIES 9

Camera, Audio, Sensors and Bluetooth: Android Media API: Playing audio/video, Media recording. Sensors - how

sensors work, listening to sensor readings. Bluetooth. Maps & Location: Android Communications: GPS, Working with

Location Manager, Working with Google Maps extensions, Maps via intent and Map Activity, Location based Services.

Location Updates, location-based services (LBS), Location Providers, Selecting a Location Provider, Finding Your

Location, Map - Based Activities, Load maps, Map API key.

UNIT V TESTING 9

Testing: Testing and Commercializing Applications - Basics of Testing, Testing from an IDE (Eclipse), Activity testing,

Service testing, Content provider testing, Test Classes, Debugging using DDMS.

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Reto Meier, “Professional Android 4 Development”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012 2. W. Frank Ableson, RobiSen, Chris King and C. Enrique Ortiz, “Android in Action”, Third Edition, 2012

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Wei-Meng Lee, “Android Application Development Cookbook”, John Wiley and Sons, 2013. 2. Grant Allen, “Beginning Android 4, Apress, 2011.

WEB REFERENCES:

1. W1. https://developer.android.com 2. W2. http://www.androidcentral.com/apps 3. W3. https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course

15ITA09 PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution, methods, etc.

Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in python, including defining classes, invoking methods, using class libraries, etc.,

Have the ability to write a program to solve specified problems

COURSE OUTCOMES:

https://developer.android.com/

http://www.androidcentral.com/apps

https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course

182

Develop basic programs using fundamental structures.

Create programs using various collection data types.

Apply appropriate Python control flow structure.

Implement user defined python functions.

Design classes and use them

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

NIL


Python object types – Numeric Type Basics – Numeric Literals –Built in Numeric Tools – Python Expression operators –

Numbers in action – Other numeric types – String Literals – Strings in action – String methods – String formatting

expressions – String formatting method calls – General type categories

UNITII LISTS AND DICTIONARIES 9

Lists in action – Basic list operations – List Iteration and comprehensions – Indexing, Slicing and Matrixes – Changing

list in place – Dictionaries – Dictionaries in action – Basic dictionary operations – Changing Dictionaries In place –

Dictionary methods – A language table – Dictionary usage notes – Other ways to make dictionary – Tuples – Files –

Python Type Hierarchies

UNITIII STATEMENT AND SYNTAX 9

Introducing Python statements- A Tale of Two ifs – Assignment statements – Expression statements – Print operations –

if statements – Python syntax rules – while loops – for loops – Loop coding techniques – Iterators – List comprehension -

UNIT IV FUNCTIONS 9

Coding functions- Scope basics – scope rules – global statement – Scopes and nested functions – Nonlocal statement –

Argument Passing Basics – Special Argument Matching modes – function design concepts- Recursive functions –

function objects – Anonymous functions – mapping functions

UNIT V CLASSES AND OOP 9

Class coding basics – Class Statement – Methods – Inheritance – Attribute tree construction – specializing Inherited

methods – Class Interface Techniques – Abstract super classes -Namespaces –simple names – Attribute names –

Namespace dictionaries – Operator overloading – Designing with classes

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mark Lutz , “Learning Python” , Fifth Edition, O,Reilly, 2013

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jason Cannon, “Python Programming for Beginners” O,Reilly, 2010

2. David Beazley , Brain K Jones “Python CookBook” Third edition,2013

3. CHUN, WESLEY J ”Core Python Programming”, Pearson Education 2012

4. GUTTAG, JOHN V ”Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014

WEB REFERENCES:

1. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/ 2. http://www.learnpython.org/ 3. http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python

183

4. http://www.pyschools.com/ 5. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1 6. http://www.python-course.eu/python3_course.php

15ITA10 DECISION MAKING METHODS L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the logic of MCDM Methods

To learn how to do pairwise comparison

To learn to do normalization of attributes

To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems

To understand various MCDM methods to choose the best alternative

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore various MCDM methods for decision making

Apply quantification methods for decision making problems

Evaluate using relative weights for the attributes in order of relative importance

Apply fuzzy with MCDM methods for decision making

Evaluate the results of fuzzy with MCDM to choose the best alternative

COURSE PREREQUISTE:

NIL


Multi- Criteria Decision Making – A General Overview – Classification of MCDM Methods – WSM – WPM – AHP –

Revised AHP – TOPSIS

UNITII QUANTIFICATION 9

Qualitative data for MCDM problems – Scales for Quantifying Pair wise Comparisons – Evaluating different scales –

Simulation – Analysis of the Computational Results

UNITIII EVALUATION OF WEIGHTS 9

Deriving Relative Weights – Sensitivity Analysis – Evaluation of methods – Process a decision matrix – Ranking

abnormalities

UNITIV FUZZY MULTI- CRITERIA DECISION MAKING 9

Fuzzy Operations – Ranking of Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy WSM method – Fuzzy WPM method – Fuzzy AHP method –

Fuzzy Revised AHP method – Fuzzy TOPSIS method

UNITV FUZZY EVALUATION CRITERIA 9

Testing the methods – First Evaluative Criterion – Second Evaluative Criterion - Computational Experiments - Analysis

TOTAL: 45 Periods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Evangelos Triantaphyllou, “Multi-criteria Decision Making Methods: A Comparative Study”, Kluwer Academic

184

Publishers, Springer 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Witold Pedrycz, Petr Ekel, Roberta Parreiras, “Fuzzy Multicriteria Decision-Making: Models, Methods and Applications” , Wiley 2010

2. Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987

3. Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012

WEB REFERENCES:

1. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/.../Multi-Criteria%20Decision%20Making.ppt

2. www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/~duffuaa/download/Courses/.../TOPSIS.ppt

3. https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/ahp.ppt

Offered by Bio-Tech Department

15BTA01 BASIC CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand the basics of cellular structure and function.

Gain knowledge about the genetic basis of life.

Understand the regulation of gene expression at transcript and protein level.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon the completion of the course students will be able to

Know the basic structure and function of cell and its organelles and its significance for proper functioning

of the cell.

Be aware of the nature of the genetic materials, mechanism of replication and expression.

Be able to appreciate and analyse the basic differences between the cellular organization and

regulation of genes between eukaryotes and prokaryotes.


Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.

UNITI CELL STRUCTURE 9

Structural Organization: Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell - Cell wall: Primary and Secondary structure model and

function - Plasma membrane: Channels, pumps and receptors - Plasmodesmata - Cell organelles: structure and

functions - Ultra structure and semi autonomous nature of chloroplast and mitochondria.

UNITII CELLULAR ORGANELLES 9

Structure and function of Organelles: Nucleus, ER, golgi complex, ribosome, lysosome, chromosome-

Lampbrush, polytene - Microscopy – light microscope, compound microscope, electron microscope, dark field

microscope, phase contrast microscope - Cell cycle and cell division.

UNITIII GENETIC MATERIAL 9

Identification of DNA as genetic material – Watson and Crick model of DNA - Structure of DNA and RNA - DNA

replication: Semi conservative Nature of replication - DNA polymerases in prokaryotes- the processes of DNA

185

replication- Replication in eukaryotes - Mitochondrial DNA replication.

UNITIV GENE EXPRESSION 9

Transcription – RNA polymerase, sigma factors - Difference between prokaryotic and eukaryotic transcription -

Regulation of gene expression - Operon concept.

UNITV THE GENETIC CODE AND PROTEIN SYNTHESIS 9

Genetic code - Codons - Anticodons - Wobble hypothesis - Protein synthesis- the stages of protein synthesis -

the process of translation in prokaryotes, factors involved in translation - the triplet nature of genetic code - an

overview of comparisons with eukaryotic translation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. De Robertis, E.D.P. and Robertis, E.M.C., “Cell and Molecular Biology”. Lippincott William & Wilkins, NY,

8thEdition, 2010.

2. Freifelder, D. “Molecular Biology”. Narosa Publishing House, 2nd Edition, 2008.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Benjamin L., “Gene VII” Oxford University Press: 2000.

2. Watson J. D., Hopkins N. H., Roberts J. W., Steitz J. A., Weiner A. M., “Molecular biology of the Gene”, The

Benjamin/Cumming Publishing Company Inc., 4th Edition 1992.

3. Snyder L & Wendy W., “Molecular Genetics of Bacteria”, ASM press, Washington DC, 2nd Edition, 2003.

15BTA02 BASIC MICROBIOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


History of microbiology and techniques used in microbiology.

Characteristic features of prokaryotes, eukaryotes and viruses.

Impact of microbes on environment, health and disease.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the diversity of microbes.

Have knowledge of culturing and controlling the microbes.

Become familiarized with the significance of microbes in daily life.


Basic understanding of Biological sciences

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9

History & Development of microbiology - Microscopy: Simple, Compound Microscopy - Staining: Principle and

technique of simple & differential staining, (Gram, Acid-fast & Endospore staining).

UNITII STRUCTURE OF MICROORGANISMS 9

Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Virus; Bacteria: Bacterial morphology & subcellular structures (General

morphology of bacteria, shapes & sizes) - Slime layer & capsule, Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram

186

negative cells - General account of Ribosome, Flagella & Fimbriae - Chromatin materials, plasmids and

episomes - Endospore: Detailed study of endospore structure & its formation - Basis of resistance.

UNITIII BACTERIAL GROWTH AND NUTRITION 9

Cultivation of microbes: Growth rate and generation time - Nutritional types of microbes - Culturing bacteria

Media, Sterilization – Physical and chemical sterilizing agents – Principle, Mode of action and application -

culturing techniques.

UNITIV ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY 9

Role of microorganisms in biogeochemical cycles (N, P and C cycles) – Biodegradation of xenobiotics

(pesticides) – Microbes in waste treatment: solid and liquid wastes – sewage treatment (Primary, secondary &

tertiary treatments) – COD & BOD – pollution indicating microbes – Biofertilizers.

UNITV MICROBES IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 9

Human Normal Microflora: Skin, stomach, Small Intestine, Large Intestine, Genitourinary tract - Relationship

between normal microbiota and the host - Principles of Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology, Infectious Disease

cycle - Pathogen transmission - control of epidemics – Case study, disease caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi

and protists, food borne and water borne diseases - an overview.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Pelczar M.J., Chan E.C.S., Krein N.R., “Microbiology”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 5th Edition, 2008.

2. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein D.A., “Microbiology”, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 9th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Black, J.G., Black, L.J. “Microbiology-Principles and Explorations”, Wiley 9th Edition, 2014.

2. Murray R., “Manual of Clinical Microbiology: Illustrations”, American Society for Microbiology, 9th Edition,

2007.

15BTA03 BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart basic knowledge of chemistry of biomolecules.

To understand the structure, function and metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.

To learn the biochemistry of the genetic material.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the chemical nature of biologically significant molecules.

Correlate the function and significance of the biomolecules with their chemical structure.

Appreciate the chemical nature of biological processes.


Basic understanding of Biological sciences.

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9

187

Water and Life – pH and Buffers - Law of Thermodynamics: Entropy and enthalpy - Chemical bonds in

biochemistry-molecular structures, Biomolecules and their functional groups - Biochemical evolution.

UNITII CARBOHYDRATES 9

Structure of monosaccharides, sterioisomerism and optical isomerism of sugars - Reactions of aldehydes and

ketone groups - Ring structure and anomeric forms – mutarotation - Structure, occurrence and biological

importance oligosaccharides and polysaccharides - Carbohydrate metabolism: glycolysis, gluconeogenesis -

TCA cycle.

UNITIII PROTEINS 9

Structure and Function - Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Quaternary structures - Enzymes and their

classifications - General properties of enzymes (pH, Temperature, Substrate concentrations) - 3-D structure of

proteins - amino acid sequencing - Metabolism of amino acids - Metabolism of aromatic amino acids – Inborn

errors of metabolism.

UNITIV LIPIDS 9

Definition and classification - Fatty acids: Introduction, classification, nomenclature, structure and properties of

saturated and unsaturated fatty acids - Essential fatty acids - Triacylglycerols: nomenclature, physical properties,

chemical properties and characterization of fats - hydrolysis, saponification - rancidity of fats - Biological

significance of fats.

UNITV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Chemical nature of nucleic acids - Double helical structure - Nucleic acid denaturation - Classes of nucleic acids-

Metabolism of nucleic acids - Synthesis of purines and pyrimidines.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Nelson, D.L., M.M. Cox, “Lehninger’s Principles of Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2012.

2. Stryer L., “Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 7th Edition, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Voet D., Prat W.C., Voet J., “Principles of Biochemistry”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition 2012.

2. Wilson K., Walker J., “Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology”, Cambridge

University Press, 7th Edition, 2010.

15BTA04 BASIC IMMUNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge about the organization of immune system.

To familiarize students with basic components in innate immunity.

To introduce students to the critical role of adaptive immune system and vaccination concepts.

To familiarize students with immune system disorders.

To make students understand the importance of transplantation and immunotherapy.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to understand the various types of cells and organs involved in immune system.

Able to illustrate the various barriers of innate immunity and importance of complement system.

188

Able to understand the various concepts and molecules of adaptive immunity and methods involved in

vaccine designing.

Able to analyze the reason behind the various autoimmune disorders.

Able to apply the concepts of immunology immunotherapy of infectious diseases and transplantation.


Basic knowledge in microbiology, genetics, and cell biology.

UNITI ORGANIZATION OF IMMUNE SYSTEM 9

History - Hematopoiesis - Primary & Secondary lymphoid organs - Myeloid cells, Lymphoid cells, Dendritic cells

and Natural killer cells.

UNITII INNATE IMMUNITY 9

Innate immunity: Anatomical, Physiological, Phagocytic and Inflammatory barriers - The complement system:

Overview - Induced innate responses to infections.

UNITIII THE ADAPTIVE IMMUNE AND INFECTION 9

Cell-Mediated Immune response: T cell mediated response, Humoral Immune Response - Antibodies:Structure

of Immunoglobulins, Immunoglobulin subtype - T cell receptor - Cytokines: functions, Infectious agents and how

they cause disease: Bacterial (Tuberculosis), viral (Influenza) and parasitic infection (helminthes) - vaccines:

history, principle of vaccination - Conventional and recombinant vaccines.

UNITIV IMMUNE DISORDERS 9

Inherited immunodeficiency diseases: SCID, DiGeorge’s syndrome, X-linked agammaglobulinemia - Acquired

Immune Deficiency Syndrome: AIDS - Hypersensitivities: Type I, II, III and IV - Autoimmune responses: Graves

disease, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Diabetes Mellitus Type I, II - Myesthenia gravis.

UNITV TRANSPLANTATION AND IMMUNOTHERAPY 9

Tissue typing and matching transplantation: Heart, Liver, Kidney – Immunosuppression - Transplant rejection -

Immunotherapy: Infections, Cancer.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kuby J., “Immunology”, WH Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2000.

2. Roitt I., Brostoff M., “Immunology”, Mosby Publication, 8th Edition, 2012.

3. Immunobiology by Janeway , Travers, Walport, Sclomchik, Garland Science; 7th edition, 2007.

4. Abbas, K.A., Litchman, A.H., Pober, J.S., “Cellular and Molecular Immunology”, W.B. Saunders Co.,

Pennsylvania, 7th

Edition, 2011.

5. William E.P., “Fundamental Immunology”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 7th Edition, 2012.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ashim K.C., “Immunology and Immunotechnology”, Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2006.

2. Christine D., “Clinical Immunology and Serology: A laboratory Perspective”; F.A. Davis Co., 3rd revised

Edition, 2009.

189

15BTA05 CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Define the major sources and types of environmental agents and discuss the transport and fate of these

agents in the environment.

Identify the carriers or vectors that promote the transfer of these agents from the environment to the

human.

To understand the procedures and requirement for hazardous waste management and gain the

knowledge on the policies, legislations.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand the relationship between environment and human health.

Able to understand the impact of hazardous waste on environment and human health.

Acquire the knowledge about the Environmental Management Policies and Practices.


Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.

UNITI ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTH 9

Human impact on the environment - Environment-human interaction - Environmental impact on humans - Indoor

and outdoor air - Water & Soil pollution - Exposure, dose and Response - Food and water-borne disease.

UNITII IMPACT OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE 9

Non Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes: Metals, chemical, drugs, leather, pulp, electroplating, dye, rubber -

Hazardous wastes on environment and human heath: case studies (chemical accumulation in plants - Cadmium

in rice, Hexachlorobenzene in seed grains : Cancer, neurological disorder, acute lung diseases, behavioural and

mental effects - Carbamate pesticide in watermelons: Gastrointestinal, skeletal, muscle, autonomic and central

nervous system effects, , Lead in paint) - Food adulterants and their impact on human health.

UNITIII IMPACT OF BIOMEDICAL WASTES 9

Characteristics & sources – BMW: Segregation, collection, transportation, disposal - Liquid BMW - Radioactive

waste - Metals / Chemicals / Drug waste - Modern technology for handling BMW Monitoring & controlling of cross

infection - Health and Environmental effect: case studies.

UNITIV IMPACT OF NUCLEAR WASTES 9

Sources - Types of Nuclear waste - Nuclear power plants and fuel production Waste generation from nuclear

power plants - Disposal options, Defining risk and environmental risk - Methods of risk assessment - Measures

and health effects: case studies.

UNITV ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT POLICIES AND PRACTICES 9

Environment and pollution - definition as per Environmental law - General powers of Central and state

Government under EPA - Important Notification in EPA 1986 - Constitution of Pollution Control Boards - Powers,

functions, Accounts, Audit etc. - Equitable remedies for pollution control - Solid waste management – Hazardous

Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998, Biomedical Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

190

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Rodricks J.V., “Calculated Risks- The Toxicity and Human Health Risks of Chemicals in Our Environment”,

Cambridge University press, 2nd Edition, 2007.

2. Lippmann M., “Environmental toxicants: Human exposures and their health effects”, New York: Van

Nostrand Reinhold, 1992.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Philp, R. B., “Environmental hazards and human health”, Boca Raton: Lewis Publishers, 1995

2. Eckenfelder Jr. W .W., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2000.

3. Michel, Mckinney, Robert, Logan, “Environmental Science – Systems & Solutions”, Jones & Barlett

Publishers, Canada, 2007.

15BTA06 BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


Hazardous wastes and its effects.

Disposal of biological wastes.

Safe handling and management of biological wastes.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


To understand about hazardous wastes, its origin and effects on public health.

To impart knowledge about sources of biohazardous wastes, risks associated and regulatory aspects of

health care wastes.

To understand the methods of treatment, disposal and management of biological wastes.


Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.

UNITI INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9

Hazardous waste - Classifications of hazardous waste and its sources - Effects on public health and

environment.

UNITII BIO HAZARDOUS WASTE 9

Biological, Biomedical and Healthcare wastes – Sources - Bio hazardous wastes classification - Risks associated

with bio hazardous waste - Need for control.

UNITIII LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND POLICY ASPECTS OF HEALTH-

CARE WASTE

9

National policies and its five guiding principles - Available guidance – World health organization (WHO), The

International Solid Waste Association (ISWA) and its policy document.

UNITIV BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL 9

Segregation, storage and transport of healthcare and biological wastes - Treatment and disposal method

191

healthcare waste - Disposal of biological and sharp wastes - Health and safety practices for health-care

personnel and waste workers.

UNITV MANAGEMENT OF BIO HAZARDOUS WASTES 9

Healthcare waste - Management planning - Infectious waste management plans - Healthcare waste minimization,

reuse and recycling.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Blackman W. C., “Basic Hazardous Waste Management”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2001.

2. Henry J. G., Heinke G. W., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Pretice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,

2004.

3. Cheremisinoff, N. P., Cheremisinoff P. N., “Hazardous Materials and Waste Management: A Guide forthe

Professional Hazards Manager”, Noyes Publications, 1995.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Panda H., “The Complete Book on Biological Waste Treatment and their Utilization”, NIIR Project

Consultancy Services, 2013.

EXTENSIVE READING:

1. Safe Management of Wastes from Health-Care Activities, 2nd Edition, WHO, 2014.

2. Biomedical waste (Management and Handling) Rules, Ministry of Environment & Forests, 1998.

15BTA07 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide the knowledge in basics of Nanobiotechnology.

Understand the application of nanomaterials in biotechnology and acquire the knowledge about the

DNA, proteins, amino acids, drug delivery, biomedicine etc.,

To make the students understand about the functional principles of bionanotechnology.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to understand physicochemical properties of nanomaterials and the unique changes that happen at

nanoscale.

Able to understand nanoscale view of the natural biomolecular processes, synthesis, modification, and

characterization of nanomaterials.

Able to understand the application of nanomaterials to biological problems including nanomedicine.



UNITI NANOSCALE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY 9

Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology - Milestones in Nanotechnology - Overview of

Nanobiotechnology and Nanoscale processes - Physicochemical properties of materials in Nanoscales - Lessons

from Nature on making nanodevices.

UNITII NANOMATERIALS 9

192

Types and synthesis of Nanomaterials: Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,

Nanotubes - Gas, liquid, and solid phase synthesis of Nanomaterials - Lithography techniques (Photolithography,

Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography) - Thin film deposition – Electrospinning - Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.

UNITIII PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance - Methods for the measurement of Nanomaterials -

Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM - Confocal and TIRF imaging.

UNITIV PROTEIN AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 9

Protein based nanostructures: building blocks and templates – Proteins as transducers and amplifiers of

biomolecular recognition events – Nanobioelectronic devices and polymer nanocontainers – Microbial production

of inorganic nanoparticles –Magnetosomes .DNA based nanostructures – Topographic and Electrostatic

properties of DNA and proteins – Hybrid conjugates of gold nanoparticles – DNA oligomers – Use of DNA

molecules in nanomechanics and Computing.

UNITV APPLICATIONS 9

Nanoparticles as carrier for genetic material – Nanotechnology in agriculture – Nanomedicine - Drug delivery -

DNA computing - Molecular design using biological selection - Harnessing molecular motors - Artificial life -

Hybrid materials – Biosensors - Future of Bionanotechnology - Health and environmental impacts of

nanotechnology.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Christof M. Niemeyer and Chad A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”,

Wiley VCH, 1st Edition, 2004.

2. Oded Shoseyov and Ilan Levy “NanoBiotechnology: BioInspired Devices and Materials of the Future”,

Humana Press; 1st Edition 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sandra J Rosenthal and David W. Wright, “NanoBiotechnology Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology)”,

Humana Press; 1st Edition, 2005.

2. Clarke. A.R. and Eberhardt C. N. (Editors), “Microscopy Techniques for Material Science”, CRC Press. 1st

Edition, 2002.

15BTA08 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:


The basic architecture of human body.

Organization of human organ systems.

Physiological significance of the human organ system.

COURSE OUTCOMES:


Understand basic human anatomy.

193

Know the functions of different organs and their significance.

Implement the knowledge for up-keeping good health.



UNITI GENERAL ANATOMY OF THE BODY 9

Introduction to basic concepts of: Body planes, Tissues (Types, origin & function) organs.

UNITII BLOOD 9

Composition of blood – Haemopoesis - Structure and function of hemoglobin - Haemostasis (all types of clotting

mechanisms) - Blood groups and introduction to basic concepts of transfusion.

UNITIII NERVE PHYSIOLOGY 9

Origin of resting membrane potential and action potential - Electrophysiology of ion channels - Structure and

function of neuron - Conduction of nerve impulse in a neuron - Synapse, its types and synaptic transmission -

Neurotransmitters, types and functions.

UNITIV MUSCULAR SYSTEM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY 9

Types of muscles - Functional anatomy of muscular system - Concepts of degeneration and regeneration of

muscle - Neuromuscular transmission - Muscle excitation and contraction - Types of contraction and its

properties - General mechanism of hormone action - Glands and their hormone, structure, function, regulation.

UNITV CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 9

Structure and function of heart - Cardiac cycle - Basic concepts of electrocardiogram (ECG) - Circulatory system

and hemodynamic - Lymph and lymphatic circulation - Blood pressure (causes and factors affecting it).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Stuart I. F H., “Human Physiology” McGraw- Hill, 13th

Edition, 2012.

2. Guyton and Hall, “Text book of Medical Physiology”, W B Saunders and Company, 13th Edition, 2015.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gerad J. T., Sandra R. G., “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology - Control systems of human body, Vol-3”,

Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, 2006.

2. Barett K.E., Barman S.M., Boitans S., Brook H., “Ganong’s Review of Medical physiology”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 23rd Edition (Lange basic science), 2009.

Offered by MBA Department

15BAA01 ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop an understanding of business related finance.

To have an understanding of finance in order to contribute to the organization’s success.

To improve the financial skills in order to make critical business decisions involving budgets, cost savings

and growth strategies.

194

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:

understand financial terms

interpret financial statements

make decision on budgeting and investment

communicate with financial experts

UNITI Introduction to Finance 9

Role for Finance for Individual and Organization – Goals and Functions of Finance - Time Value of Money –

Significance

UNITII Financial Planning and Decisions 9

Financial Planning – Decisions – Investment Decision – Financing Decision - Dividend Decision - Evaluation of

Investment Projects and Financing – Working Capital

UNITIII Funds Management 9

Funds Mobilization – Sources – Internal and external

UNITIV Financial Statements 9

Financial Statements - Balance Sheet – PL account - Cash/Fund Flow - Analysis

UNITV Overview of Indian Financial Markets 9

Financial System – Bank and Financial Institutions – Capital Market - Money Market

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. I. M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, (10th

ed.), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management”, (7th

ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. Khan M Y and Jain P K, “Financial Management”, (6th

ed.), McGraw Hill, 2013.

15BAA02 ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basics of Marketing Management as a functional area of an organisation.

To understand the basic elements that makes up the marketing function.

To understanding the functions of a marketing department.

To understand the importance of marketing to an organisation.

COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course students will be able to:

Describe a Marketing Department and the functions of a marketing department.

Choose and understand the needs of the customers.

Combine the four Ps of marketing to design a marketing model

195

Have a basic ideas on how a market segmented and customers are targeted.

Have a basic understanding on the elements of the marketing mix

UNITI Understanding Marketing Management – an overview 9

Introduction, Marketing department functions, Selling vs Marketing, Marketing concepts (Marketers and

Prospects, Needs, Wants, and Demands, Value and Satisfaction), Basics of Market segmentation, Target

markets and Positioning.

UNITII The Marketing mix element – Product 9

Introduction, Characteristics of the product life cycle and their marketing implications, Facets of the PLC, New

product development, The market diffusion process, Organizing for new product development

UNITIII The Marketing mix element – Price 9

Introduction, Price and the marketing mix, Pricing objectives, Factors affecting pricing decisions, Setting a price,

Pricing industrial goods, Pricing and information technology

UNITIV The Marketing mix element – Promotion 9

Communications contact techniques (Promotion mix) - Advertising, Direct marketing, Sales promotion, Personal

selling, Sponsorship, Publicity

UNITV The Marketing mix element – Place: channels of distribution 9

Introduction, Intermediaries in channels of distribution - Sales agents, Distributors, Wholesalers, Retailers, Franchising,

Internet marketing.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Marilyn A. Stone, John Desmond, “Fundamentals of Marketing” (Special Indian Edition), Routledge, Taylor

& Francis Group, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. William J. Stanton, Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walter, “Fundamentals of Marketing”, (10th ed.), TMH, 1994.

2. Philip Kotler, “Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective”, (14th

ed.), Pearson India, 2012.

15BAA03 ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization

To know the various functional areas of HRM

To understand the recent developments in HR

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Students will understand the basic concepts in HRM

Students will be aware of human resource requirement for an organization

Students will be aware of the ways for developing the skills and knowledge of the employees

Students will be able to understand the motivation model in an organization

Students will be aware of present development in HR

UNITI Introduction 9

196

Introduction to HRM – Meaning, Importance and Objectives, History of Managing Human Resources,

Environment of HR. Functions and Roles of HR Manager

UNITII Procurement of Human Resources 9

Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance, Process, HR Demand

and Supply Forecasting Techniques. Recruitment – Importance, Recruitment Sources, Selection – Process

Socialization / Induction – Importance and Types

UNITIII Development / Training 9

Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, On-the-Job Methods and Off-the-Job Methods. Executive

Development Programmes – Difference from training. Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques – MBO and

360 Degree Feedback. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer

UNITIV Compensation and Motivation 9

Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors & Framing Process. Human Needs –

Motivation Theories – Maslow’s Need theory and Herzberg’s two factor theory, Applications – Rewards and

Reinforcement. Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods. Disciplinary Action – Nature and Types

UNITV Maintenance and Separation 9

The Factories Act, 1948 – Health, Safety and Welfare Provisions. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)

Act, 1946 – Framing Standing Order. Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement & Discharge. Latest trends

in HRM - HRIS – Meaning and Implementation Process. E-HRM.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Arun Monappa, “Managing Human Resources”, (1st ed.), Trinity Press Publications, 2014.

2. Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12th

ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2011.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Aswathappa K., “Human Resource Management”, (7th ed.), 2013, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

2. Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10th

ed.), Wiley, 2010.

3. Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2010.

4. Eugence Mckenna & Nic Beach, “Human Resource Mgmt”, (2nd

ed.), Pearson Education Ltd, 2008.

5. Wayne Cascio, “Managing Human Resource”, (9th

ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

6. Ivancevich, “Human Resource Management”, (12th ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.

· 2020-01-13 · MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS) AFFILIATED TO ANNA...

Documents

Transcript of · 2020-01-13 · MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS) AFFILIATED TO ANNA...